Online User's Guide
MFC-L8395CDW
© 2023 Brother Industries, Ltd. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents
Before You Use Your Machine ............................................................................................................. 1
Definitions of Notes ........................................................................................................................................ 2
Notice - Disclaimer of Warranties (USA and Canada) ................................................................................... 3
Trademarks .................................................................................................................................................... 4
Open Source Licensing.................................................................................................................................. 5
Copyright and License ................................................................................................................................... 6
Important Notes.............................................................................................................................................. 7
Introduction to Your Machine............................................................................................................... 8
Before Using Your Machine ........................................................................................................................... 9
Control Panel Overview ............................................................................................................................... 10
How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD ....................................................................................................... 17
How to Enter Text on Your Machine............................................................................................................. 18
Set the Main Home Screen .......................................................................................................................... 19
Access Brother Utilities (Windows) .............................................................................................................. 20
Uninstall the Software and Drivers (Windows) ................................................................................... 21
Input/Output Port Locations on Your Machine ............................................................................................. 22
Paper Handling.................................................................................................................................... 23
Load Paper................................................................................................................................................... 24
Load and Print Using the Paper Tray ................................................................................................. 25
Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) .................................................................... 29
Paper Settings.............................................................................................................................................. 39
Change the Paper Size and Paper Type............................................................................................ 40
Select the Paper Tray For Printing ..................................................................................................... 41
Change the Check Paper Setting....................................................................................................... 42
Recommended Print Media ......................................................................................................................... 43
Load Documents .......................................................................................................................................... 44
Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) ............................................................. 45
Load Documents on the Scanner Glass............................................................................................. 47
Unscannable and Unprintable Areas ........................................................................................................... 48
Using Special Paper..................................................................................................................................... 49
Print ...................................................................................................................................................... 50
Print from Your Computer (Windows)........................................................................................................... 51
Print a Document (Windows).............................................................................................................. 52
Print Settings (Windows) .................................................................................................................... 54
Secure Print (Windows)...................................................................................................................... 59
Change the Default Print Settings (Windows) .................................................................................... 60
Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript
®
3
™
Language Emulation)
(Windows) .......................................................................................................................................... 62
Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows) .................................................. 63
Print from Your Computer (Mac) .................................................................................................................. 64
Print an Email Attachment............................................................................................................................ 65
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive ................................................................................................. 66
Compatible USB Flash Drives............................................................................................................ 67
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting Mass Storage ................. 68
Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows) ............................................................................... 70
Home > Table of Contents
i
Print Duplicate Copies.................................................................................................................................. 71
Cancel a Print Job........................................................................................................................................ 72
Test Print ...................................................................................................................................................... 73
Universal Print.............................................................................................................................................. 74
Universal Print Overview .................................................................................................................... 75
Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based Management.................................... 76
Assign Universal Print Users via Microsoft Azure Portal.................................................................... 77
Add a Universal Print-enabled Printer to Your Computer ................................................................... 78
Print Using Universal Print ................................................................................................................. 79
Deregister Your Machine from Universal Print ................................................................................... 80
Scan...................................................................................................................................................... 81
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine ............................................................................................ 82
Scan Photos and Graphics................................................................................................................. 83
Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File .................................................................................. 85
Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive......................................................................................... 87
Scan Multiple Business Cards and Photos (Auto Crop)..................................................................... 89
Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) .................................................................................................. 90
Save Scanned Data as an Email Attachment .................................................................................... 92
Send Scanned Data to an Email Recipient ........................................................................................ 94
Scan to FTP ....................................................................................................................................... 96
Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) ............................................................................................................ 100
Scan to Network (Windows) ............................................................................................................. 107
Scan to SharePoint .......................................................................................................................... 113
Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) .................. 117
Change the Scan Button Settings from Brother iPrint&Scan .......................................................... 121
Configure Certificates for Signed PDFs ........................................................................................... 122
Disable Scanning from Your Computer ............................................................................................ 124
Scan from Your Computer (Windows)........................................................................................................ 125
Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)............................................................................. 126
Scan Using Nuance
™
PaperPort
™
14SE or Other Windows Applications....................................... 127
Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan ................................................................................................ 132
Scan from Your Computer (Mac)................................................................................................................ 136
Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management......................................................................... 137
Set the Scan File Name Using Web Based Management................................................................ 138
Set the Scan Job Email Report Using Web Based Management .................................................... 139
Copy ................................................................................................................................................... 140
Copy on One Side of the Paper (1-sided) .................................................................................................. 141
Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided)................................................................................................ 143
Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images ............................................................................................................ 145
Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature ................................................................................. 146
Sort Copies ................................................................................................................................................ 147
Copy an ID Card ........................................................................................................................................ 148
Copy Options ............................................................................................................................................. 149
Fax ...................................................................................................................................................... 151
Send a Fax................................................................................................................................................. 152
Send a Fax ....................................................................................................................................... 153
Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF.................................................................................................... 155
Home > Table of Contents
ii
Send a Fax Manually........................................................................................................................ 156
Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation ........................................................................................ 157
Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting) .................................................... 158
Send a Fax in Real Time .................................................................................................................. 160
Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax)................................................................................ 161
Add a Cover Page to Your Fax......................................................................................................... 162
Cancel a Fax in Progress ................................................................................................................. 164
Check and Cancel a Pending Fax.................................................................................................... 165
Fax Options ...................................................................................................................................... 166
Receive a Fax ............................................................................................................................................ 167
Receive Mode Settings .................................................................................................................... 168
Memory Receive Options ................................................................................................................. 178
Remote Fax Retrieval....................................................................................................................... 185
Voice Operations and Fax Numbers .......................................................................................................... 191
Voice Operations .............................................................................................................................. 192
Store Fax Numbers .......................................................................................................................... 200
Set up Broadcasting Groups ............................................................................................................ 204
Dial Access Codes and Credit Card Numbers ................................................................................. 208
Telephone Services and External Devices................................................................................................. 209
Voice Mail ......................................................................................................................................... 210
Distinctive Ring................................................................................................................................. 211
External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)................................................................................... 215
External and Extension Telephones ................................................................................................. 218
Multi-line Connections (PBX) ........................................................................................................... 224
Fax Reports................................................................................................................................................ 225
Print a Transmission Verification Report .......................................................................................... 226
Print a Fax Journal ........................................................................................................................... 227
PC-FAX ...................................................................................................................................................... 228
PC-FAX for Windows........................................................................................................................ 229
PC-FAX for Mac .............................................................................................................................. 247
Network .............................................................................................................................................. 248
Supported Basic Network Features ........................................................................................................... 249
Configure Network Settings ....................................................................................................................... 250
Configure Network Details Using the Control Panel......................................................................... 251
Wireless Network Settings ......................................................................................................................... 252
Use the Wireless Network ................................................................................................................ 253
Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
............................................................................................................................. 266
Enable/Disable Wireless LAN .......................................................................................................... 270
Print the WLAN Report..................................................................................................................... 271
Network Features....................................................................................................................................... 275
Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel................................................. 276
Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management ............................................ 277
Print the Network Configuration Report............................................................................................ 278
Configure PC-FAX Receiving Using Web Based Management ....................................................... 279
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) .......................................................................................................... 280
Use the Send Fax to Server Feature................................................................................................ 301
Configure and Operate LDAP Search .............................................................................................. 305
Home > Table of Contents
iii
Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management ..................................... 309
Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination.......................................................................... 312
Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only) ............................................................................................ 315
Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings......................................................................... 317
Security .............................................................................................................................................. 318
Before Using Network Security Features ................................................................................................... 319
Disable Unnecessary Protocols ....................................................................................................... 320
Configure Certificates for Device Security ................................................................................................. 321
Supported Security Certificate Features .......................................................................................... 322
How to Create and Install a Certificate............................................................................................. 323
Create a Self-signed Certificate ....................................................................................................... 324
Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority
(CA) .................................................................................................................................................. 325
Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key ........................................................................... 329
Import and Export a CA Certificate................................................................................................... 332
Manage Multiple Certificates ............................................................................................................ 335
Use SSL/TLS ............................................................................................................................................. 336
Introduction to SSL/TLS ................................................................................................................... 337
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS............................................................... 340
Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS ...................................................................................... 344
Use SNMPv3.............................................................................................................................................. 346
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SNMPv3 ............................................................... 347
Use IPsec................................................................................................................................................... 348
Introduction to IPsec......................................................................................................................... 349
Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management ............................................................................ 350
Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management ......................................... 352
Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management ....................................................... 354
Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network ......................................................... 362
What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication? .............................................................................................. 363
Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or Wireless Network Using Web Based
Management (Web Browser)............................................................................................................ 364
IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods............................................................................................... 366
Use Active Directory Authentication........................................................................................................... 367
Introduction to Active Directory Authentication................................................................................. 368
Configure Active Directory Authentication Using Web Based Management .................................... 369
Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (Active Directory
Authentication) ................................................................................................................................. 371
Use LDAP Authentication........................................................................................................................... 372
Introduction to LDAP Authentication ................................................................................................ 373
Configure LDAP Authentication Using Web Based Management.................................................... 374
Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (LDAP
Authentication) ................................................................................................................................. 375
Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 ................................................................................................................... 376
Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0........................................................................................... 377
Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management ............................................ 378
Scan Using Secure Function Lock 3.0 ............................................................................................. 379
Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0 ...................................................................... 380
Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features................................................................................. 381
Home > Table of Contents
iv
Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control Panel ............................................................ 382
Send or Receive an Email Securely........................................................................................................... 383
Configure Email Sending or Receiving Using Web Based Management......................................... 384
Send an Email with User Authentication .......................................................................................... 385
Send or Receive an Email Securely Using SSL/TLS ....................................................................... 386
Store Print Log to Network ......................................................................................................................... 387
Store Print Log to Network Overview ............................................................................................... 388
Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using Web Based Management....................... 389
Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection Setting .......................................................... 391
Use Store Print Log to Network with Secure Function Lock 3.0....................................................... 393
Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel .................................................................................... 394
Setting Lock Overview...................................................................................................................... 395
Use Global Network Detection Features.................................................................................................... 399
Enable Global IP Address Detection ................................................................................................ 400
Block Communications from the Global Network ............................................................................. 401
Mobile/Web Connect......................................................................................................................... 402
Brother Web Connect................................................................................................................................. 403
Brother Web Connect Overview....................................................................................................... 404
Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect............................................................................ 406
Set Up Brother Web Connect........................................................................................................... 408
Scan and Upload Documents Using Brother Web Connect............................................................. 416
Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect ......................................................... 417
FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail ........................................................................................................ 419
AirPrint ....................................................................................................................................................... 422
AirPrint Overview.............................................................................................................................. 423
Before Using AirPrint (macOS) ........................................................................................................ 424
Print Using AirPrint ........................................................................................................................... 425
Scan Using AirPrint (macOS)........................................................................................................... 428
Send a Fax Using AirPrint (macOS)................................................................................................. 429
Mopria
™
Print Service and Mopria
™
Scan................................................................................................. 430
Brother Mobile Connect ............................................................................................................................. 431
Register an External IC Card Reader ........................................................................................................ 432
Brother iPrint&Scan.......................................................................................................................... 433
Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac) ............................................................................................. 434
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................ 435
Error and Maintenance Messages ............................................................................................................. 436
Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes.................................................................................. 442
Error Messages When Using the Brother Web Connect Feature .............................................................. 446
Document Jams ......................................................................................................................................... 448
Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit ............................................................................ 449
Document is Jammed under the Document Cover .......................................................................... 450
Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF ...................................................................... 451
Paper Jams ................................................................................................................................................ 452
Clear Paper Jams............................................................................................................................. 453
Paper is Jammed in the MP tray ...................................................................................................... 454
Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray ................................................................................................. 455
Paper is Jammed in the Output Paper Tray ..................................................................................... 457
Home > Table of Contents
v
Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine .................................................................................. 458
Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine .............................................................................................. 460
Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray............................................................................................... 462
Printing Problems....................................................................................................................................... 464
Improve the Print Quality............................................................................................................................ 467
Telephone and Fax Problems .................................................................................................................... 473
Set Dial Tone Detection.................................................................................................................... 477
Set Telephone Line Compatibility for Interference and VoIP Systems ............................................. 478
Network Problems...................................................................................................................................... 479
Error Messages ................................................................................................................................ 480
Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows) ...................................................................... 482
Check Your Machine's Network Settings.......................................................................................... 483
If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network ................................................................ 484
AirPrint Problems ....................................................................................................................................... 490
Other Problems .......................................................................................................................................... 491
Check the Machine Information ................................................................................................................. 493
Reset Your Machine................................................................................................................................... 494
Reset Functions Overview ............................................................................................................... 495
Routine Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 496
Replace Supplies ....................................................................................................................................... 497
Replace the Toner Cartridge ............................................................................................................ 499
Replace the Drum Unit ..................................................................................................................... 503
Replace the Belt Unit........................................................................................................................ 508
Replace the Waste Toner Box.......................................................................................................... 512
Clean the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 517
Clean the Scanner............................................................................................................................ 519
Clean the LED Heads....................................................................................................................... 521
Clean the Touchscreen LCD ............................................................................................................ 522
Clean the Corona Wires ................................................................................................................... 523
Clean the Drum Unit......................................................................................................................... 526
Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers ...................................................................................................... 531
Correct Color Printing................................................................................................................................. 533
Set the Auto Correction Function ..................................................................................................... 534
Reset the Machine's Color Correction Settings................................................................................ 535
Check the Remaining Part Life .................................................................................................................. 536
Pack and Ship Your Machine ..................................................................................................................... 537
Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts ......................................................................................................... 539
Machine Settings............................................................................................................................... 540
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel ..................................................................................... 541
In the Event of Power Failure (Memory Storage) ............................................................................. 542
General Settings............................................................................................................................... 543
Save Your Favorite Settings as a Shortcut....................................................................................... 560
Print Reports .................................................................................................................................... 564
Settings and Features Tables........................................................................................................... 567
Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management ...................................................................... 589
What is Web Based Management?.................................................................................................. 590
Access Web Based Management .................................................................................................... 592
Home > Table of Contents
vi
Set or Change a Login Password for Web Based Management...................................................... 594
Set Up Your Machine's Address Book Using Web Based Management.......................................... 595
Appendix............................................................................................................................................ 596
Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 597
5 GHz Wi-Fi Network Channels Supported by Your Machine (USA, Canada, Mexico and Caribbean
countries only)............................................................................................................................................ 604
Supplies ..................................................................................................................................................... 605
Important Information About Toner Cartridge Life...................................................................................... 607
Accessories................................................................................................................................................ 608
Brother Help and Customer Support.......................................................................................................... 609
Home > Table of Contents
vii
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Definitions of Notes
Definitions of Notes
We use the following symbols and conventions throughout this User's Guide:
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injuries.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate injuries.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in damage to property or loss of product functionality.
NOTE
NOTE specifies the operating environment, conditions for installation, or special
conditions of use.
Tips icons indicate helpful hints and supplementary information.
Electrical Hazard icons alert you to possible electrical shock.
Fire Hazard icons alert you to the possibility of a fire.
Hot Surface icons warn you not to touch hot machine parts.
Prohibition icons indicate actions you must not perform.
Bold Bold style identifies buttons on the machine's control panel or computer screen.
Italics Italicized style emphasizes an important point or refers you to a related topic.
Courier New
Courier New font identifies messages shown on the machine's LCD.
Related Information
• Before You Use Your Machine
2
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Notice - Disclaimer of Warranties (USA and Canada)
Notice - Disclaimer of Warranties (USA and Canada)
BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S), AND THEIR DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS
(COLLECTIVELY BROTHER’S LICENSOR) MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE SOFTWARE. BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S) DOES NOT
WARRANT, GUARANTEE OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS
OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY,
CURRENTNESS OR OTHERWISE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
SOFTWARE IS ASSUMED BY YOU. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS NOT PERMITTED BY
SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN CANADA. THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU.
IN NO EVENT WILL BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S) BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL,
INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, AND THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF BROTHER’S LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN
CANADA DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN ANY EVENT BROTHER’S
LICENSOR’S LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ACTUAL DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, AND
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE ACTION (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE), WILL BE LIMITED TO $50.
Related Information
• Before You Use Your Machine
3
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Trademarks
Trademarks
Apple, App Store, AirPrint, Mac, macOS, iPadOS, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, and Safari are trademarks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Nuance and PaperPort are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications, Inc. or its affiliates
in the United States and/or other countries.
Adobe
®
, Reader
®
, PostScript and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Wi-Fi
®
, Wi-Fi Alliance
®
, and Wi-Fi Direct
®
are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
WPA
™
, WPA2
™
, WPA3
™
, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED, and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
Android, Google Drive and Google Play are trademarks of Google LLC. Use of these trademarks is subject to
Google Permissions.
Mopria
™
and the Mopria
™
Logo are registered and/or unregistered trademarks and service marks of Mopria
Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
EVERNOTE is a trademark of Evernote Corporation and used under a license.
The Bluetooth
®
word mark is a registered trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Brother Industries, Ltd. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License Agreement specific to its
proprietary programs.
Software Trademarks
FlashFX
®
is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
FlashFX
®
Pro
™
is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
FlashFX
®
Tera
™
is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Reliance
™
is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Reliance Nitro
™
is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Datalight
®
is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Any trade names and product names of companies appearing on Brother products, related documents
and any other materials are all trademarks or registered trademarks of those respective companies.
Related Information
• Before You Use Your Machine
4
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Open Source Licensing
Open Source Licensing
This product includes open source software.
To view Open Source Licensing Remarks and Copyright Information, go to your model's Manuals page at
support.brother.com/manuals.
Related Information
• Before You Use Your Machine
5
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Copyright and License
Copyright and License
©2023 Brother Industries, Ltd. All rights reserved.
This product includes software developed by the following vendors:
This product includes the “KASAGO TCP/IP” software developed by ZUKEN ELMIC, Inc.
Copyright 1989-2020 Datalight, Inc., All Rights Reserved.
FlashFX
®
Copyright 1998-2020 Datalight, Inc.
Related Information
• Before You Use Your Machine
6
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Important Notes
Important Notes
• Check support.brother.com/downloads for Brother driver and software updates.
• To keep your machine performance up to date, check support.brother.com/downloads for the latest firmware
upgrade. Otherwise, some of your machine's functions may not be available.
• Do not use this product outside the country of purchase as it may violate the wireless telecommunication and
power regulations of that country.
• Not all models are available in all countries.
• Before giving your machine to anyone else, replacing it, or disposing of it, we strongly recommend resetting it
to its factory settings to remove all personal information.
• Windows 10 in this document represents Windows 10 Home, Windows 10 Pro, Windows 10 Education, and
Windows 10 Enterprise.
• Windows 11 in this document represents Windows 11 Home, Windows 11 Pro, Windows 11 Education, and
Windows 11 Enterprise.
• For macOS v13 Users:
This machine supports macOS v13.
For machine setup and software installation instructions, see the Quick Setup Guide included in the carton.
All features in macOS v11 and macOS v12 are available in the macOS v13 environment and work in a similar
way.
• The screens or images in this User's Guide are for illustration purposes only and may differ from those of the
actual products.
• Unless otherwise specified, the screens in this manual are from Windows 10. Screens on your computer may
vary depending on your operating system.
• The contents of this document and the specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.
• Not all features are available in countries subject to applicable export restrictions.
Related Information
• Before You Use Your Machine
7
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Before Using Your Machine
Before Using Your Machine
Before attempting any printing operation, confirm the following:
• Make sure you have installed the correct software and drivers for your machine.
• For USB or network cable users: Make sure the interface cable is physically secure.
Firewall (Windows)
If your computer is protected by a firewall and you are unable to network print, network scan, or PC-FAX, you
may need to configure the firewall settings. If you are using the Windows Firewall and you installed the drivers
using the steps in the installer, the necessary firewall settings have been already set. If you are using any other
personal firewall software, see the User's Guide for your software or contact the software manufacturer.
Related Information
• Introduction to Your Machine
9
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Control Panel Overview
Control Panel Overview
1
2
3
4
1. Touchscreen Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
You can select from two types of screens to set as the Main Home screen: Home screens and Shortcuts
screens. When a Home screen is displayed, swipe left or right or press d or c to display the other Home
screens.
The Main Home screen displays the machine's status when the machine is idle. When displayed, this screen
indicates that your machine is ready for the next command.
If Active Directory Authentication or LDAP Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel is locked.
The available features vary depending on your model.
The Home screens provide access to features, such as Fax, Copy, and Scan.
10
Home screen: Screen 1
###.###.###.###
Home screen: Screen 2
###.###.###.###
11
Home screen: Screen 3
###.###.###.###
Shortcuts screen
Create Shortcuts for frequently-used operations, such as sending a fax, copying, scanning, and using Web
Connect.
Eight Shortcuts tabs are available with six Shortcuts on each Shortcuts tab. A total of 48 Shortcuts are
available.
68
1. Date & Time
Displays the date and time set on the machine.
2. Function Icons
•
[Fax] (For MFC Models)
Press to access Fax mode.
12
• [Copy]
Press to access Copy mode.
•
[Scan]
Press to access Scan mode.
• [Secure Print]
Press to access the [Secure Print] option.
• [Web]
Press to connect your machine to an Internet service.
•
[Apps]
Press to connect your machine to the Brother Apps service.
•
[USB]
Press to access the USB menu and select [Scan to USB] or [Direct Print] options.
• [2 in 1 ID Copy]
Press to access the 2 in 1 ID Copy option.
3.
(Toner)
Displays the remaining toner life. Press to access the [Toner] menu.
4. (Settings)
Press to access the [Settings] menu.
If Setting Lock has been turned on, a lock icon appears on the LCD. You must unlock the machine to
change settings.
• Toner
- Displays the remaining toner life.
- Press to access the [Toner] menu.
• / Network
- Press to set up a network connection.
- A four level indicator on the screen displays the current wireless signal strength if you are using a
wireless connection.
•
Fax Preview (For MFC Models)
13
Press to access the [Fax Preview] menu.
• Wi-Fi Direct (For DCP Models)
Press to access the [Wi-Fi Direct] menu.
• Tray Setting
Press to access the [Tray Setting] menu.
• Eco Mode
Press to access the [Eco Mode] menu.
• All Settings
Press to access a menu of all machine settings.
• Date & Time
- Displays the date and time set on the machine.
- Press to access the [Date & Time] menu.
5. IP Address
If the IP Address setting in the [Display Information] menu has been turned on, your machine's
[IP Address] appears on the Home screens.
6.
or (Wireless Status)
Press to configure wireless settings.
If you are using a wireless connection, a four-level indicator displays the current wireless signal strength.
0 Max
Wireless LAN Disabled
7. [Shortcuts]
Press to access the [Shortcuts] screen.
8. (Home screen)
Press to access the Home screens.
• New Fax (For MFC Models)
When [Fax Preview] is set to [On], the number of new faxes you received into the memory appears
at the top of the screen.
• Warning icon
14
The warning icon appears when there is an error or maintenance message. Press the message area
to view it, and then press to return to the Main Home screen.
2. Touchpanel
(Back)
Press to go back to the previous menu.
(Home)
Press to return to the Main Home screen.
(Cancel)
Press to cancel an operation.
3. LED Power Indicator
The LED lights up depending on the machine’s power status.
4.
Power On/Off
• Turn on the machine by pressing .
• Turn off the machine by pressing and holding down
. The LCD displays [Shutting Down] for a few
seconds before the machine turns off. If you have an external telephone or TAD connected, it is always
available.
Near Field Communication (NFC)
Use card authentication, if applicable, by touching your Integrated Circuit Card (IC Card) to the NFC symbol
on the machine.
15
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD
How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD
Press your finger on the LCD to operate it. To display and access all the options, swipe left, right, up, down, or
press d c or a b on the LCD to scroll through them.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT press the LCD with a sharp object, such as a pen or stylus. It may damage the machine.
NOTE
DO NOT touch the LCD immediately after plugging in the power cord or turning on the machine. Doing this
may cause an error.
This product uses fonts owned by ARPHIC TECHNOLOGY CO., LTD.
Related Information
• Introduction to Your Machine
17
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > How to Enter Text on Your Machine
How to Enter Text on Your Machine
• When you must enter text on your machine, a keyboard appears on the LCD.
• The characters that are available may differ depending on your country.
• The keyboard layout may differ depending on the operation you perform.
• The keyboard display may differ depending on your model.
• Press to cycle between letters, numbers, and special characters.
• Press to cycle between lowercase and uppercase letters.
• To move the cursor to the left or right, press d or c.
Inserting spaces
• To enter a space, press [Space] or c.
Making corrections
• If you entered a character incorrectly and want to change it, press d or c to move the cursor to the incorrect
character, and then press
. Enter the correct character.
• To insert a character, press d or c to move the cursor to the correct place, and then enter the character.
• Press
for each character you want to erase, or press and hold to erase all the characters.
Related Information
• Introduction to Your Machine
18
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Set the Main Home Screen
Set the Main Home Screen
You can change the LCD to display a specific Home screen or Shortcut screen.
When the machine is idle or you press , the touchscreen will return to the screen you set.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Screen Settings] > [Home
Screen].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the screen settings, and then press the setting you want.
3. Press .
The LCD displays the screen you selected. You can change this main screen as needed.
Related Information
• Introduction to Your Machine
19
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Access Brother Utilities (Windows)
Access Brother Utilities (Windows)
Brother Utilities is an application launcher that offers convenient access to all Brother applications installed on
your computer.
1. Do one of the following:
• (Windows 11)
Click
> All apps > Brother > Brother Utilities.
• (Windows 10)
Click > Brother > Brother Utilities.
2. Select your machine.
3. Choose the option you want.
Related Information
• Introduction to Your Machine
• Uninstall the Software and Drivers (Windows)
20
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Access Brother Utilities (Windows) > Uninstall the Software and
Drivers (Windows)
Uninstall the Software and Drivers (Windows)
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11
Click
> All apps > Brother > Brother Utilities.
• Windows 10
Click > Brother > Brother Utilities.
2. Select your model from the drop-down list (if it is not already selected).
3. Click Tools in the left navigation bar.
• If the Software Update Notification icon is visible, select it, and then click Check now > Check for
Software Updates > Update. Follow the on-screen instructions.
• If the Software Update Notification icon is not visible, go to the next step.
4. Click Uninstall in the Tools section of Brother Utilities.
Follow the instructions in the dialog box to uninstall the software and drivers.
Related Information
• Access Brother Utilities (Windows)
21
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Input/Output Port Locations on Your Machine
Input/Output Port Locations on Your Machine
The input/output ports are located on the front and back of the machine.
4
5
1
2
3
1. LINE jack(For MFC models)
2. EXT. jack(For MFC models)
3. USB accessory port (Front)
4. 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 1000BASE-T port (For wired network models)
5. USB port
When connecting the USB or network cable, follow the instructions in the software/driver installer.
To install driver and software necessary for operating your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at
support.brother.com/downloads.
Related Information
• Introduction to Your Machine
22
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Paper Tray > Load Paper in the Paper
Tray
Load Paper in the Paper Tray
• If, when the Check Paper setting is set to On and you pull the paper tray out of the machine, a message
appears on the LCD asking if you want to change the paper size and paper type, change these settings, if
needed, following the LCD instructions.
• When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and
Paper Type settings on the machine, or on your computer.
1. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
2. Press the green levers to slide the paper guides to fit the paper.
For Legal or Folio size paper, press the release lever (1) in the back of the tray, and then pull out the back
of the paper tray. (Legal and Folio size paper are not available in some regions.)
1
3. Fan the stack of paper well.
4. Load paper in the paper tray with the printing surface face down.
When you use preprinted paper, load the paper in the correct orientation.See Related Information: Change
Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the Paper Tray.
26
5. Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (b b b).
Overfilling the paper tray will cause paper jams.
6. Slowly push the paper tray completely into the machine.
7. Lift the support flap to prevent paper from sliding off the output tray.
Related Information
• Load and Print Using the Paper Tray
• Change Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the Paper Tray
27
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Paper Tray > Load Paper in the Paper
Tray > Change Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the Paper Tray
Change Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the Paper
Tray
When you use preprinted paper for 2-sided printing, change the machine's settings.
• DO NOT load different sizes and types of paper in the paper tray at the same time. Doing this may
cause the paper to jam or misfeed.
• If the print position is misaligned with the preprinted objects, the print position is adjustable using the
Print Position setting for the paper tray.
• Some preprinted paper may cause print stains, depending on the printing method and ink type.
Orientation
For 1-sided printing
• face down
• top edge toward the front of the paper tray
For automatic 2-sided printing (long edge binding)
• face up
• bottom edge toward the front of the paper tray
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [2-sided] > [Single Image] > [2-
sided Feed].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press .
Related Information
• Load Paper in the Paper Tray
28
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
• Load Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
• Load and Print Labels Using the MP Tray
• Load and Print Envelopes Using the MP Tray
• Printing Problems
• Error and Maintenance Messages
29
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load
Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
Load Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper
Type settings on the machine, or on your computer.
• Plain Paper
• Thin Paper
• Thick Paper
• Recycled Paper
• Bond Paper
• Glossy Paper
1. Lift the support flap to prevent paper from sliding off the face down output tray.
2. Open the MP tray and lower it gently.
3. Pull out the MP tray support (1) and unfold the flap (2).
1
2
30
4. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the paper you are using.
5. Load paper with the printing surface face up in the MP tray.
1
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (1).
• When using glossy paper, load only one sheet at a time in the MP tray to avoid a paper jam.
• When you use preprinted paper, load the paper in the correct orientation. See Related Information:
Change Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the MP Tray.
• To remove a small printout from the output tray, use both hands to lift up the scanner cover as shown in
the illustration.
• You can still use the machine while the scanner cover is up. To close the scanner cover, gently push it
down with both hands.
31
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load
Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Change Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using
the MP Tray
Change Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the MP
Tray
When you use preprinted paper for 2-sided printing, change the machine's settings.
• DO NOT load different sizes and types of paper in the paper tray at the same time. Doing this may
cause the paper to jam or misfeed.
• If the print position is misaligned with the preprinted objects, the print position is adjustable using the
Print Position setting for the MP tray.
• Some preprinted paper may cause print stains, depending on the printing method and ink type.
Orientation
For 1-sided printing
• face up
• top edge first
For automatic 2-sided printing (long edge binding)
• face down
• bottom edge first
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [2-sided] > [Single Image] > [2-
sided Feed].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press .
Related Information
• Load Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
33
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load
and Print Labels Using the MP Tray
Load and Print Labels Using the MP Tray
When the back cover (face up output tray) is pulled down, the machine has a straight paper path from the MP
tray through to the back of the machine. Use this paper feed and output method when you print on labels.
When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper
Type settings on the machine, or on your computer.
1. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray).
2. On the front of the machine, open the MP tray and lower it gently.
3. Pull out the MP tray support (1) and unfold the flap (2).
1
2
4. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the paper you are using.
5. Load paper with the printing surface face up in the MP tray.
1
34
Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (1).
6. Change your print preferences in the Print screen.
7. Send your print job to the machine.
8. When finished, close the back cover (the face up output tray) until it locks in the closed position.
Related Information
• Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
35
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load
and Print Envelopes Using the MP Tray
Load and Print Envelopes Using the MP Tray
You can load up to three envelopes in the MP tray.
Before loading, press the corners and sides of the envelopes to make them as flat as possible.
When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper
Type settings on the machine, or on your computer.
1. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray).
2. Pull down the two gray levers, one on the left side and one on the right side, as shown in the illustration.
3. On the front of the machine, open the MP tray and lower it gently.
36
4. Pull out the MP tray support (1) and unfold the flap (2).
1
2
5. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the envelopes that you are using.
6. Load paper with the printing surface face up in the MP tray.
1
Load up to three envelopes in the MP tray with the printing surface face up. Make sure the envelopes are
below the maximum paper mark (1). Loading more than three envelopes may cause paper jams.
7. Change your print preferences in the Print dialog box.
Settings Options for Envelopes
Paper Size Com-10
DL
C5
Monarch
Media Type Envelopes
Env. Thick
Env. Thin
8. Send your print job to the machine.
9. When you have finished printing, return the two gray levers you adjusted in the earlier step back to their
original positions.
10. Close the back cover (face-up output tray) until it locks in the closed position.
37
Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings > Change the Paper Size and Paper Type
Change the Paper Size and Paper Type
When you change the size and type of paper you load in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and
Paper Type settings on the LCD.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Tray Setting] > [Paper
Type].
2. Press the option you want.
3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the paper type options, and then press the option you want.
4. Press
.
5. Press [Paper Size].
6. Press the option you want.
7. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the paper size options, and then press the option you want.
8. Press .
Related Information
• Paper Settings
40
Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings > Select the Paper Tray For Printing
Select the Paper Tray For Printing
Change the machine's default paper tray for printing copies, received faxes, and print jobs from your computer.
DCP models do not support the fax feature.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Tray Setting].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Tray Use: Copy], [Tray Use: Fax], or [Tray Use:
Print] option, and then press the option you want.
3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the option you want, and then press it. For example, when you
select the [MP>T1] option, the machine pulls paper from the MP tray until it is empty, and then from Tray 1.
4. Press
.
• When you make a copy using the ADF and give priority to multiple trays, the machine looks for the tray
with the most suitable paper and pulls paper from that tray.
• When you make a copy using the scanner glass, your document is copied from the higher priority tray
even if more suitable paper is in another paper tray.
• (For models with facsimile function) Use the following sizes of paper for printing faxes: Letter, A4, Legal,
Folio, Mexico Legal, or India Legal. When an appropriate size is not in any of the trays, the machine
stores received faxes and [Size Mismatch] appears on the touchscreen.
• (For models with facsimile function) If the tray is out of paper and received faxes are in the machine’s
memory, [No Paper] appears on the touchscreen. Load paper in the empty tray.
Related Information
• Paper Settings
41
Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings > Change the Check Paper Setting
Change the Check Paper Setting
When the Check Paper setting is set to On and you pull the paper tray out of the machine, or load paper in the
paper tray, a message appears on the LCD asking if you want to change the paper size and paper type.
The default setting is On.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Tray Setting] > [Check
Paper].
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press
.
Related Information
• Paper Settings
42
Home > Paper Handling > Recommended Print Media
Recommended Print Media
To get the best print quality, we recommend using the paper listed in the table.
Paper Type Item
Plain Paper Xerox Vitality Multipurpose Printer Paper, 20 lb
(20 lb = 75 g/m
2
)
Hammermill Laser Print
(24 lb = 90 g/m
2
)
Recycled Paper No specific brand recommended
Labels Avery laser labels white #5160
Envelopes No specific brand recommended
Glossy Paper NewPage Futura Laser Gloss 80 lb Text
(80 lb =118 g/m
2
)
Related Information
• Paper Handling
43
Home > Paper Handling > Load Documents > Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Use the ADF when copying or scanning multi page, standard-sized documents.
• The ADF can hold the following sheets and feed each sheet individually:
Up to 50 sheets
• Use standard 20 lb (80 g/m
2
) paper.
• Make sure documents with correction fluid or written in ink are completely dry.
IMPORTANT
• DO NOT leave thick documents on the scanner glass. If you do this, the ADF may jam.
• DO NOT use paper that is curled, wrinkled, folded, ripped, stapled, paper-clipped, glued together, or
taped.
• DO NOT use cardboard, newspaper, or fabric.
• To avoid damaging your machine while using the ADF, DO NOT pull on the document while it is feeding.
Supported Document Sizes
Length:
5.8 in. to 14.0 in. (147.3 mm to 355.6 mm)
Width: 4.1 in. to 8.5 in. (105 mm to 215.9 mm)
Weight: 60 to 105 g/m² (16-28lb)
1. Unfold the ADF document output support flap.
2. Fan the pages well.
3. Stagger the pages of your document and load it into the ADF face up and top edge first, as shown in the
illustration.
4. Adjust the paper guides to fit the width of your document.
45
Home > Paper Handling > Load Documents > Load Documents on the Scanner Glass
Load Documents on the Scanner Glass
Use the scanner glass to fax, copy, or scan one page at a time.
Supported Document Sizes
Length:
Up to 11.8 in. (300 mm)
Width: Up to 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)
Weight: Up to 4.4 lb (2 kg)
NOTE
(For ADF models) To use the scanner glass, the ADF must be empty.
1. Lift the document cover.
2. Place the document on the scanner glass face down.
3. Place the corner of the page in the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
4. Close the document cover.
If the document is a book or is thick, gently press on the document cover.
Related Information
• Load Documents
47
Home > Paper Handling > Unscannable and Unprintable Areas
Unscannable and Unprintable Areas
The measurements in the table below show maximum unscannable and unprintable areas from the edges of the
most commonly-used paper sizes. These measurements may vary depending on the paper size or settings in the
application you are using.
1
3
24
Do not attempt to scan, copy, or print in these areas. Any content included in such areas will not be
reflected in the output.
Usage Document Size Top (1)
Bottom (3)
Left (2)
Right (4)
Fax (Sending) Letter, Legal 0.12 in. (3 mm) 0.16 in. (4 mm)
A4 0.12 in. (3 mm) (ADF)
0.04 in. (1 mm)
(Scanner Glass)
0.12 in. (3 mm)
Copy
2
Letter, Legal 0.16 in. (4 mm) 0.16 in. (4 mm)
A4 0.16 in. (4 mm) 0.12 in. (3 mm)
Scan Letter
0.12 in. (3 mm)
1
0.12 in. (3 mm)
1
A4
0.12 in. (3 mm)
1
0.12 in. (3 mm)
1
Legal
0.12 in. (3 mm)
1
0.12 in. (3 mm)
1
Print Letter, Legal 0.16 in. (4.2 mm) 0.16 in. (4.2 mm)
A4 0.16 in. (4.2 mm) 0.16 in. (4.2 mm)
1
The number shown is the default value. This number is adjustable to 0 in. (0 mm). If the number is set to 0 in. (0 mm), a black shadow
may appear around the edges on the scanned image.
2
A 1 in 1 copy and 100% document size copy
Related Information
• Paper Handling
48
Home > Paper Handling > Using Special Paper
Using Special Paper
Always test paper samples before purchasing them to ensure desirable performance.
• DO NOT use inkjet paper; it may cause a paper jam or damage your machine.
• If you use bond paper, paper with a rough surface, or paper that is wrinkled or creased, the paper may exhibit
degraded performance.
Store paper in its original packaging and keep it sealed. Keep the paper flat and away from moisture, direct
sunlight, and heat.
IMPORTANT
Some types of paper may not perform well or may cause damage to your machine.
DO NOT use paper:
• that is highly textured
• that is extremely smooth or shiny
• that is curled or warped
• that is coated or has a chemical finish
• that is damaged, creased, or folded
• that exceeds the recommended weight specification in this guide
• with tabs and staples
• that is multipart or carbonless
• that is designed for inkjet printing
If you use any of the types of paper listed above, they may damage your machine. This damage is not
covered under any Brother warranty or service agreement.
Related Information
• Paper Handling
49
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows)
Print from Your Computer (Windows)
• Print a Document (Windows)
• Print Settings (Windows)
• Secure Print (Windows)
• Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)
•
Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript
®
3
™
Language
Emulation) (Windows)
• Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows)
51
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Print a Document (Windows)
Print a Document (Windows)
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select your model's name, and then click the printer's properties or preferences button.
The printer driver window appears.
3. Make sure you have loaded the correct size paper in the paper tray.
4. Click the Paper Size drop-down list, and then select your paper size.
5. In the Orientation field, select the Portrait or Landscape option to set the orientation of your printout.
If your application contains a similar setting, we recommend that you set the orientation using the
application.
6. Type the number of copies (1-999) you want in the Copies field.
7. Click the Media Type drop-down list, and then select the type of paper you are using.
8. To print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper or print one page of your document on multiple sheets,
click the Multiple Page drop-down list, and then select your options.
9. Change other printer settings, if needed.
10. Click OK.
11. Complete your print operation.
52
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Print Settings (Windows)
Print Settings (Windows)
>> Basic Tab
>> Advanced Tab
Basic Tab
1. Paper Size
Select the paper size you want to use. You can either choose from standard paper sizes or create a custom
paper size.
2. Orientation
Select the orientation (portrait or landscape) of your printout.
If your application contains a similar setting, we recommend that you set the orientation using the application.
3. Copies
Type the number of copies (1-999) that you want to print in this field.
Collate
Select this option to print sets of multi-page documents in the original page order. When this option is
selected, one complete copy of your document will print, and then reprint according to the number of
54
copies you choose. If this option is not selected, then each page will print according to the number of
copies chosen before the next page of the document is printed.
4. Media Type
Select the media type you want to use. To achieve the best print results, the machine automatically adjusts its
print settings according to the selected media type.
5. Print Quality
Select the print quality you want. Because print quality and speed are related, the higher the quality, the
longer it will take to print the document.
6. Color / Mono
Select the Color/Mono settings to use.
NOTE
• The machine’s color sensor is very sensitive and may perceive faded black text or an off-white
background as color. If you know that your document is black and white and you want to conserve
color toner, select the Mono mode.
• If either the Cyan, Magenta, or Yellow toner reaches the end of its life while printing a color document,
the print job cannot be completed. Cancel your print job and select to start the print job again in the
Mono mode, as long as the Black toner is available.
7. Document Type
Select the type of document you want to print.
Settings button
Specify advanced settings, such as color mode.
Color Mode
Select the color mode to suit your preference.
Import
To adjust the print configuration of a particular image, click Settings. When you have finished
adjusting the image parameters, such as brightness and contrast, import those settings as a print
configuration file. Use the Export option to create a print configuration file from the current settings.
Export
To adjust the print configuration of a particular image, click Settings. When you have finished
adjusting the image parameters, such as brightness and contrast, export those settings as a print
configuration file. Use the Import option to load a previously exported configuration file.
Improve Gray Color
Select this option to improve the image quality of shaded areas.
Enhance Black Printing
If a black graphic does not print correctly, select this setting.
Improve Pattern Printing
Select this option to improve the pattern printing if printed fills and patterns are different from the fills
and patterns you see on your computer screen.
8. Multiple Page
Select this option to print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper, or print one page of your document on
multiple sheets.
Page Order
Select the page order when printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
Border Line
Select the type of border to use when printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
55
9. 2-sided / Booklet (available for certain models)
Select this option to print on both sides of the paper, or print a document in booklet format using 2-sided
printing.
2-sided Settings button
Click this button to select the type of 2-sided binding. Four types of 2-sided bindings are available for each
orientation.
10. Paper Source
Select the paper source setting according to your print conditions or purpose.
First Page
Select the paper source to use for printing the first page.
Other Pages
Select the paper source to use for printing the second and subsequent pages.
Advanced Tab
1. Scaling
Select these options to enlarge or reduce the size of the pages in your document.
56
Fit to Paper Size
Select this option to enlarge or reduce the document pages to fit a specified paper size. When you select
this option, select the paper size you want from the drop-down list.
Free [ 25 - 400 % ]
Select this option to enlarge or reduce the document pages manually. When you select this option, type a
value into the field.
2. Reverse Print
Select this option to rotate the printed image 180 degrees.
3. Use Watermark
Select this option to print a logo or text on your document as a watermark. Select one of the preset
watermarks, add a new watermark, or use an image file you have created.
4. Header-Footer Print
Select this option to print the date, time, and login user name on the document.
5. Toner Save Mode
Select this feature to use less toner to print documents; printouts appear lighter, but are still legible.
6. Secure Print
This feature ensures that confidential or sensitive documents are not printed out until you enter a password
on the machine's control panel.
7. Administrator
This feature allows you to change the administrator password and restrict various printing functions.
8. User Authentication
This feature allows you to confirm the restrictions for each user.
9. Other Print Options button
Sleep Time
Select this option to set the machine to enter sleep mode immediately after printing.
Macro/Stream (available for certain models)
Select this feature to print an electronic form (macro/stream), which you have stored in your machine's
memory, as an overlay on the print job.
Improve Print Output
Select this option to reduce the amount of paper curling and improve the toner fixing.
Edge Emphasis
Select this option to make the text appear sharper.
Skip Blank Page
Select this option to allow the printer driver to automatically detect blank pages and exclude them from
printing.
TrueType Mode
Mode
Select how the fonts are processed for printing.
Use Printer TrueType Fonts (available for certain models)
Select whether to use built-in fonts for the font processing.
Eco settings
Select this option to reduce printing noise.
Related Information
• Print from Your Computer (Windows)
57
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Secure Print (Windows)
Secure Print (Windows)
Use Secure Print to ensure that confidential or sensitive documents do not print until you enter a password on
the machine's control panel.
The secure data is deleted from the machine when you turn off the machine.
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select your model's name, and then click the printer's properties or preferences button.
The printer driver window appears.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Click the Settings button in the Secure Print field.
5. Select the Secure Print checkbox.
6. Type your four-digit password in the Password field.
7. Type the user name and job name in the User Name and Job Name fields, if needed.
8. Click OK to close the Secure Print Settings window.
9. Click OK.
10. Complete your print operation.
11. On the machine's control panel, swipe left or right or press d or c to display the [Secure Print] option,
and then press it.
12. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display user names, and then press your user name.
13. Enter your four-digit password, and then press [OK].
14. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the print job, and then press it.
15. Enter the number of copies you want, and then press [OK].
16. Press [Start].
The secured data will be cleared from the machine's memory after printing.
Related Information
• Print from Your Computer (Windows)
59
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)
Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)
When you change an application's print settings, the changes only apply to documents printed with that
application. To change print settings for all Windows applications, you must configure the printer driver
properties.
1. Do one of the following:
• For Windows 11
Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View
devices and printers.
• For Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019, and Windows Server 2022
Click
> Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click
View devices and printers.
• For Windows Server 2012 R2
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
• For Windows Server 2012
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings,
and then click Control Panel. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
2. Right-click your model's icon, and then select Printer properties. (If printer driver options appear, select your
printer driver.)
The printer properties dialog box appears.
3. Click the General tab, and then click the Printing Preferences... or Preferences... button.
The printer driver dialog box appears.
• To configure the tray settings, click the Device Settings tab (available for certain models).
• To change the printer port, click the Ports tab.
4. Select the print settings you want to use as defaults for all of your Windows programs.
5. Click OK.
6. Close the printer properties dialog box.
Related Information
• Print from Your Computer (Windows)
• Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows)
60
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Change the Default Print Settings
(Windows) > Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows)
Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows)
Access your machine's Properties to auto-detect your machine's Optional Tray and check the machine's serial
number.
The printer driver automatically detects the Optional Tray during the driver installation. If you added the
Optional Tray after the driver installation, follow these steps:
1. Do one of the following:
• For Windows 11
Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View
devices and printers.
• For Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019, and Windows Server 2022
Click
> Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click
View devices and printers.
• For Windows Server 2012 R2
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
• For Windows Server 2012
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings,
and then click Control Panel. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
2. Right-click your model's icon, and then select Printer properties. (If printer driver options appear, select your
printer driver.)
The printer properties dialog box appears.
3. Click the Device Settings tab.
4. Click the Auto Detect button.
The Optional Tray and the machine's serial number are automatically detected.
5. Click the Apply button.
6. Close the printer properties dialog box.
The Auto Detect function is not available under the following machine conditions:
• The machine is turned off.
• The machine is shared via Print Server
• The machine and your computer are not connected.
Related Information
• Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)
61
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer
Driver (PostScript
®
3
™
Language Emulation) (Windows)
Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript
®
3
™
Language Emulation) (Windows)
The BR-Script3 printer driver lets you print PostScript
®
data more clearly.
Go to your model's Downloads page at
support.brother.com/downloads to install the PS driver (BR-Script3
printer driver).
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select your model with BR-Script3 in the name, and then click the printer's properties or preferences button.
The printer driver window appears.
3. Click the Layout, Paper/Quality, or Secure Print tab to change basic print settings. (available for certain
models)
Click the Layout or Paper/Quality tab, and then click the Advanced... button to change advanced print
settings. Click OK.
4. Click OK.
5. Complete your print operation.
Related Information
• Print from Your Computer (Windows)
62
Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your
Computer (Windows)
Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows)
The Status Monitor is a configurable software tool for monitoring the status of one or more machines, allowing
you to get immediate notification of errors.
Do one of the following:
- Double-click the
icon in the task tray.
- Launch
(Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model's name (if not
already selected). Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Status Monitor.
Troubleshooting
Click the Troubleshooting button to access the support website.
Visit the Genuine Supplies website
Click the Visit the Genuine Supplies website button for more information on Brother genuine supplies.
Related Information
• Print from Your Computer (Windows)
Related Topics:
• Printing Problems
63
Home > Print > Print an Email Attachment
Print an Email Attachment
You can print files by emailing them to your Brother machine.
• Make sure Web Based Management is set to On. For more information, see Related Information.
• You can attach up to 10 documents, 20 MB in total, to an email.
• This feature supports the following formats:
- Document files: PDF, TXT, and Microsoft Office files
- Image files: JPEG, BMP, GIF, PNG, and TIFF
• The machine prints both the email content and attachments by default. To print only email attachments,
change the settings as necessary.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Online Functions > Online Functions Settings.
• If the left navigation bar is not visible, start navigating from
.
• If this function is locked, contact your network administrator for access.
5. Click the I accept the terms and conditions button.
6. Go to your machine, and then follow the machine's instructions to enable the settings.
7. On your computer, click General Settings.
The Email Print: General Settings screen appears.
8. Click the Enable button.
The machine prints the instruction sheet.
9. Send your email to the email address included on the sheet. The machine prints the email attachments.
• To change the settings, including email address and printer settings, click the Online Functions
Settings Page button.
• You can also configure the settings from your machine. Press [Apps] > [Online Functions], and
then follow the on-screen instructions.
Related Information
• Print
Related Topics:
• Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel
• Access Web Based Management
65
Home > Print > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
You can print photos directly from a digital camera or a USB flash drive.
Supported file types are PDF, JPEG, TIFF, XPS, and PRN.
• Compatible USB Flash Drives
• Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting Mass Storage
• Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows)
66
Home > Print > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive > Compatible USB Flash Drives
Compatible USB Flash Drives
IMPORTANT
The USB direct interface supports only USB flash drives and digital cameras that use the USB mass storage
standard. Other USB devices are not supported.
Compatible USB Flash Drives
USB Class USB Mass Storage Class
USB Mass Storage Sub Class SCSI or SFF-8070i
Transfer Protocol Bulk transfer Only
Format
1
FAT12/FAT16/FAT32/exFAT
Sector Size Max. 4096 Byte
Encryption Encrypted devices are not supported.
1
NTFS format is not supported.
Related Information
• Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
67
Home > Print > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or
Digital Camera Supporting Mass Storage
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting
Mass Storage
• Make sure your digital camera is turned on.
• Your digital camera must be switched from PictBridge mode to Mass Storage mode.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to your machine, DO NOT connect any device other than a digital camera or USB flash
drive to the USB direct interface.
USB Port Location (Front View)
1. Connect your USB flash drive or digital camera to the USB direct interface. The touchscreen will
automatically display the USB menu to confirm that the USB flash drive or digital camera is correctly
connected.
• If an error occurs, the USB menu will not appear on the touchscreen.
• When the machine is in Deep Sleep mode, the touchscreen does not display any information even if
you connect a USB flash drive to the USB direct interface. Press the touchscreen to wake up the
machine.
• If your machine's Secure Function Lock is On, you may not be able to print from a USB flash drive or
digital camera.
2. Press [Direct Print].
3. Swipe up or down, or press a or b to display the file you want to print, and then select the file.
To print an index of the files stored on the USB flash drive or digital camera, press [Index Print] on the
touchscreen. Press [Black Start] or [Color Start] to print the data.
4. Do one of the following:
• To change the settings, press
[Print Settings]. Go to the next step.
• If you want to use the default settings, enter the number of copies, and then press [Black Start] or
[Color Start].
5. Select the print settings you want to change:
• [Print Quality]
• [Tray Use]
• [Paper Type]
68
• [Paper Size]
• [Multiple Page]
• [Orientation]
• [2-sided]
• [Collate]
• [PDF Print Options]
• [PDF Fit to Page]
Depending on the file type, some of these settings may not appear.
6. Press [OK].
7. Enter the number of copies you want.
8. Press [Black Start] or [Color Start] to print the data.
9. Press .
IMPORTANT
DO NOT remove the USB flash drive or digital camera from the USB direct interface until the machine
has finished printing.
Related Information
• Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
69
Home > Print > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive > Create a PRN File for Direct Printing
(Windows)
Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows)
These instructions may vary depending on your print application and operating system.
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select your model, and then select the print to file option.
3. Complete your print operation.
4. Enter the required information to save the file.
If the computer prompts you to enter a file name only, you can also specify the folder where you want to
save the file by typing the directory name (for example: C:\Temp\FileName.prn).
If a USB flash drive is connected to your computer, you can save the file directly to the USB flash drive.
Related Information
• Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
70
Home > Print > Print Duplicate Copies
Print Duplicate Copies
Use the Carbon Copy function to make multiple copies of the same print data, as if printing on carbon paper.
Send the data to individual paper trays that you loaded with different paper types or colors.
For example, you may want to set the machine to send your print data to Tray 1, which you have pre-loaded with
blue colored paper, and then reprint the data in a certain location on the page from the MP Tray, which you have
loaded with yellow colored paper that already contains text.
If you load blue paper in Tray 1 and yellow paper in the MP tray, the printer will automatically feed paper for
Sheet 1 from Tray 1 and Sheet 2 from the MP Tray.
If you enable the Carbon Copy function, the machine will always make copies automatically.
Windows
The Carbon Copy function also allows you to select a different printing macro/stream for each page.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Carbon Menu] > [Carbon Copy] >
[On].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Copies] option, and then press the [Copies] option.
3. Enter the number of copies you want, and then press [OK].
4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Copy1 Tray] option, and then press the [Copy1 Tray]
option.
5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the paper tray you want to configure for the [Copy1 Stream]
option, and then press to select the paper tray.
Windows
a. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Copy1 Stream] option, and then press it.
b. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the ID number of the macro/stream you want to use, and
then press it.
6. Repeat these steps until you have selected all the tray settings for each copy.
7. Press
.
8. Send your print job to the machine.
Related Information
• Print
71
Home > Print > Universal Print
Universal Print
• Universal Print Overview
• Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based Management
• Assign Universal Print Users via Microsoft Azure Portal
• Add a Universal Print-enabled Printer to Your Computer
• Print Using Universal Print
• Deregister Your Machine from Universal Print
74
Home > Print > Universal Print > Universal Print Overview
Universal Print Overview
Universal Print is a cloud-based print service from Microsoft. You can print documents, from anywhere on the
Internet, without installing a printer driver. Universal Print is available for Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) users
with the Microsoft 365 subscription.
1. Computer running Windows 10 20H1 or greater
2. Cloud server
Related Information
• Universal Print
75
Home > Print > Universal Print > Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based
Management
Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based
Management
• Make sure you set the correct date and time for your time zone.
• If your network uses a proxy server, configure the proxy server settings.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the Universal Print checkbox, and then click Advanced Settings.
6. Change your machine's name in the Device Name field if necessary.
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
7. Click Register.
If an error occurs, follow the on-screen instructions.
8. A Universal Print user code appears. Click the Sign in button, and then type the user code.
9. Follow the on-screen instructions to finish the registration.
Related Information
• Universal Print
Related Topics:
• Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
• Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management
• Access Web Based Management
76
Home > Print > Universal Print > Assign Universal Print Users via Microsoft Azure Portal
Assign Universal Print Users via Microsoft Azure Portal
You can assign users to the Universal Print service only if your machine is registered on the Microsoft Azure
portal.
1. Access the Microsoft Azure portal.
URL: portal.azure.com
2. Log in as a Printer Administrator.
3. Select the Universal Print service.
4. Select the Printers option, and then select your machine from the list.
5. Select the Share option.
6. Select the users you want to assign to the Universal Print service, and then click Share Printer.
Related Information
• Universal Print
77
Home > Print > Universal Print > Add a Universal Print-enabled Printer to Your Computer
Add a Universal Print-enabled Printer to Your Computer
1. Click > > Devices > Printers & scanners > Add a printer or scanner.
2. Select your machine registered as a Universal Print-enabled printer from the list, and then click Add device.
Related Information
• Universal Print
78
Home > Print > Universal Print > Print Using Universal Print
Print Using Universal Print
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select the machine you registered as a Universal Print-enabled printer, and then click the printer's properties
or preferences button.
3. Change the printer settings, if needed.
4. Complete your print operation.
Related Information
• Universal Print
79
Home > Print > Universal Print > Deregister Your Machine from Universal Print
Deregister Your Machine from Universal Print
To deregister your machine, you must delete it from Web Based Management, and then delete it on the Microsoft
Azure portal.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Next to the Universal Print checkbox, click Advanced Settings.
6. Click Delete Registration Data, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
7. Access the Microsoft Azure portal.
URL:
portal.azure.com
8. Log in as a Printer Administrator.
9. Select the Universal Print service.
10. Select the Printers option, and then select your machine from the list.
11. Click Delete Printer Share.
12. Click Unregister.
Related Information
• Universal Print
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
80
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
• Scan Photos and Graphics
• Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File
• Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive
• Scan Multiple Business Cards and Photos (Auto Crop)
• Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR)
• Save Scanned Data as an Email Attachment
• Send Scanned Data to an Email Recipient
• Scan to FTP
• Scan to SSH Server (SFTP)
• Scan to Network (Windows)
• Scan to SharePoint
• Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
• Change the Scan Button Settings from Brother iPrint&Scan
• Configure Certificates for Signed PDFs
• Disable Scanning from Your Computer
82
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan Photos and Graphics
Scan Photos and Graphics
Send scanned photos or graphics directly to your computer.
Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent
changes, use Brother iPrint&Scan.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to PC] > [to Image].
3. If the machine is connected over the network, select the computer name where you want to send data.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK].
4. To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to change. If you
use the default settings, skip this step.
• [2-sided Scan]
• [Scan Settings]
• [Color Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Brightness]
• [Contrast]
(available only for the [Color] and [Gray] options)
• [Auto Deskew]
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity]
• [Remove Background Color]
(available only for the [Color] and [Gray] options)
• [Margin Settings]
• [B&W TIFF Compression]
83
• To change scan settings, a computer with the Brother iPrint&Scan software installed must be connected
to your machine.
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK].
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].
5. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
• Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
Related Topics:
• Change the Scan Button Settings from Brother iPrint&Scan
84
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF
File
Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File
Scan documents and save them to a folder on your computer as PDF files.
Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent
changes, use Brother iPrint&Scan.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to PC] > [to File].
3. If the machine is connected over the network, select the computer name where you want to send data.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK].
4. To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to change. If you
use the default settings, skip this step.
• [2-sided Scan]
• [Scan Settings]
• [Color Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Brightness]
• [Contrast]
(available only for the [Color] and [Gray] options)
• [Auto Deskew]
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity]
• [Remove Background Color]
(available only for the [Color] and [Gray] options)
• [Margin Settings]
• [B&W TIFF Compression]
85
• To change scan settings, a computer with the Brother iPrint&Scan software installed must be connected
to your machine.
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK].
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].
5. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
• Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
Related Topics:
• Change the Scan Button Settings from Brother iPrint&Scan
86
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive
Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive
Scan documents directly to a USB flash drive.
1. Load your document.
2. Insert a USB flash drive into your machine.
3. Press [Scan to USB].
4. To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to change. If you
use the default settings, skip this step.
• [2-sided Scan]
• [Color Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Brightness]
• [Contrast]
(available only for the [Color] and [Gray] options)
• [File Name]
• [File Name Style]
• [File Size]
(available only for the [Color] and [Gray] options)
• [Auto Crop]
• [Auto Deskew]
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity]
• [Remove Background Color]
(available only for the [Color] and [Gray] options)
• [Margin Settings]
• [Document Separation]
• [B&W TIFF Compression]
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK].
• To set your own default settings: after making changes to settings, press the [Set New Default]
option, and then press [Yes].
• To restore the factory settings: press [Factory Reset], and then press [Yes].
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].
5. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
IMPORTANT
The LCD displays a message while reading the data. DO NOT unplug the power cord or remove the USB
flash drive from the machine while it is reading the data. You could lose your data or damage the USB
flash drive.
87
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan Multiple Business Cards and Photos
(Auto Crop)
Scan Multiple Business Cards and Photos (Auto Crop)
You can scan multiple documents placed on the scanner glass. The machine will scan each document and use
the Auto Crop feature to create separate files or a single multi-page file.
Guidelines for Auto Crop
LTR
1
2
3
4
1
24 3
LTR
1
2 1
1. 0.4 in. (10 mm) or greater
2. 0.8 in. (20 mm) or greater (bottom)
• This setting is available only for documents that are rectangular or square.
• If your document is too long or wide, this feature will not work as described here.
• You must place the documents away from the edges of the scanner glass as shown in the illustration.
• You must place the documents at least 0.4 in. (10 mm) away from each other.
• Auto Crop adjusts the skew of the document on the scanner glass; however, if your document is skewed
more than 45 degrees at less than 300 x 300 dpi or 10 degrees at 600 x 600 dpi, this feature will not work.
• The ADF must be empty to use Auto Crop.
• The Auto Crop feature is available for a maximum of 16 documents, depending on the size of the documents.
To scan documents using the Auto Crop feature, you must place the documents on the scanner glass.
1. Load documents on the scanner glass.
2. Insert a USB flash drive into your machine.
The LCD automatically changes.
3. Press [Scan to USB] >
[Options] > [Auto Crop].
4. Press [On].
5. Press [OK].
6. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. Follow the LCD instructions to complete the scanning job.
Related Information
• Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
89
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR)
Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR)
Your machine can convert characters in a scanned document to text using the optical character recognition
(OCR) technology. You can edit this text using your preferred text-editing application.
• The Scan to OCR feature is available only for certain languages.
• Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent
changes, use Brother iPrint&Scan.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to PC] > [to OCR].
3. If the machine is connected over the network, select the computer name where you want to send data.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK].
4. To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to change. If you
use the default settings, skip this step.
• [2-sided Scan]
• [Scan Settings]
• [Color Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Brightness]
• [Contrast]
(available only for the [Color] and [Gray] options)
• [Auto Deskew]
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity]
• [Remove Background Color]
(available only for the [Color] and [Gray] options)
• [Margin Settings]
• To change scan settings, a computer with the Brother iPrint&Scan software installed must be connected
to your machine.
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK].
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].
5. Press [Start].
90
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Save Scanned Data as an Email
Attachment
Save Scanned Data as an Email Attachment
Send the scanned data from your machine to your email application as an attachment.
• Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent
changes, use Brother iPrint&Scan.
• To use this feature with your machine's Scan button, make sure you select one of these applications in
Brother iPrint&Scan:
- Windows: Microsoft Outlook
- Mac: Apple Mail
For other applications and Webmail services, use the Scan to Image or Scan to File feature to scan a
document, and then attach the scanned file to an email message.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to PC] > [to E-mail].
3. If the machine is connected over the network, select the computer name where you want to send data.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK].
4. To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to change. If you
use the default settings, skip this step.
• [2-sided Scan]
• [Scan Settings]
• [Color Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Brightness]
• [Contrast]
(available only for the [Color] and [Gray] options)
• [Auto Deskew]
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity]
• [Remove Background Color]
92
(available only for the [Color] and [Gray] options)
• [Margin Settings]
• [B&W TIFF Compression]
• To change scan settings, a computer with the Brother iPrint&Scan software installed must be connected
to your machine.
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK].
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].
5. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
• Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
Related Topics:
• Change the Scan Button Settings from Brother iPrint&Scan
93
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Send Scanned Data to an Email Recipient
Send Scanned Data to an Email Recipient
Send scanned data directly from your machine to an email recipient without using a computer. This function
allows your machine to scan documents and send them to an email address without your machine being
connected to a computer. To send the scanned data as an attachment directly to your default email application
using the iPrint&Scan software on your computer or the Scan button on your machine, use the "Scan to Email
Attachment" function instead.
• To send scanned data to an email recipient, you must configure your machine to communicate with your
network and email server, which is used to send and receive emails.
• Configure these items from the machine's control panel or Web Based Management.
• To use the Scan to Email Server function, connect your machine to the network and access an SMTP
server. Set up the following SMTP email settings:
- Server address
- Port number
- User name
- Encryption type (SSL or TLS)
- Email server certificate (if used)
If you do not know these settings, contact your email service provider or network administrator.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to E-mail Server].
• If you registered your email address with your user ID, the [to My E-mail] option appears when you
log on to the machine using Secure Function Lock, Active Directory Authentication, or LDAP
Authentication.
• To send scanned data to your email address, press [to My E-mail]. When your email address
appears on the LCD, press [Next].
• To enable this feature in Web Based Management, go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan >
Scan to E-mail Server. In the Send to My E-mail field, select On. Click Submit.
3. Do one of the following to enter the destination email address:
• To enter the email address manually, press [Manual], and then enter the email address using the
keyboard on the LCD. When finished, press [OK].
• If the email address is stored in the machine's address book, press [Address Book], and then select
the email address.
Press [OK].
4. Confirm the email address, and then press [Next].
5. To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to change.
• [2-sided Scan]
• [Color Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Brightness]
• [Contrast]
(available only for the [Color] and [Gray] options)
• [File Name]
• [File Name Style]
94
• [File Size]
(available only for the [Color] and [Gray] options)
• [Auto Deskew]
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity]
• [Remove Background Color]
(available only for the [Color] and [Gray] options)
• [Margin Settings]
• [Document Separation]
• [B&W TIFF Compression]
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK].
• To set your own default settings: after making changes to settings, press the [Set New Default]
option, and then press [Yes].
• To restore the factory settings: press [Factory Reset], and then press [Yes].
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].
(This function may not be available depending on your machine conditions.)
6. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
• Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
95
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to FTP
Scan to FTP
Scan documents directly to an FTP server when you need to share the scanned information. For added
convenience, configure different profiles to save your favorite Scan to FTP destinations.
• Set up a Scan to FTP Profile
• Upload Scanned Data to an FTP Server
96
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to FTP > Set up a Scan to FTP
Profile
Set up a Scan to FTP Profile
Set up a Scan to FTP Profile to scan and upload the scanned data directly to an FTP location.
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the FTP option, and then click Submit.
6. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint Profile menu.
7. Select the profile you want to set up or change.
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
Option Description
Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Host Address Type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64
characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189).
Port Number Change the Port Number setting used to access the FTP server. The
default setting is port 21. In most cases this setting does not need to be
changed.
Username Type a user name (up to 32 characters) of a user that has permission to
write data to the FTP server.
Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name
you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the
Retype password field.
SSL/TLS Set the SSL/TLS option to scan securely using SSL/TLS
communication. Change the CA Certificate setting, if needed.
Store Directory Type the path (up to 60 characters) to the folder on the FTP server
where you want to send your scanned data. Do not type a slash mark at
the beginning of the path (correct example: brother/abc).
File Name Select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or from user-
defined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be
97
Option Description
the file name prefix you select, followed by the last six digits of the
flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example:
"Estimate_098765.pdf").
Quality Select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the
machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the
scan profile.
File Type Select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If you
choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select
a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Document Size Select your document size from the list. This is necessary to make sure
the scanned file is the correct size.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to
select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
File Size Select your file size from the list.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to
select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Auto Deskew Select the Auto option to set the machine to correct document skewing
automatically as the pages are scanned.
Skip Blank Page Select the On option to remove blank pages of the document from the
scanning results.
Skip Blank Page Sensitivity Select the sensitivity level for detecting blank pages in the scanned data.
The higher the sensitivity, the easier it is for the machine to detect blank
pages.
2-sided Scan Select the Long Edge or Short Edge option to scan both sides of the
document, depending on the layout of your original.
Remove Background Color Change the amount of background color that is removed.
Margin Settings Adjust your document's margins.
Document Separation Split a scanned image.
When multiple documents have been scanned, you can split and save
the documents separately by using this function.
B&W TIFF Compression Select the TIFF compression option for a black and white document.
Brightness Select the brightness level.
Contrast Select the contrast level.
Passive Mode Set the Passive Mode option to off or on depending on your FTP server
and network firewall configuration. The default setting is on. In most
cases, this setting does not need to be changed.
8. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Scan to FTP
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
98
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to FTP > Upload Scanned Data to an
FTP Server
Upload Scanned Data to an FTP Server
Share scanned information by saving it to your FTP server.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to FTP/SFTP].
3. When the server profiles you set up using Web Based Management appear, select the profile you want. If the
profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality or
file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.
4. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
• Scan to FTP
99
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SSH Server (SFTP)
Scan to SSH Server (SFTP)
Uses the Secure Shell Protocol to establish a private and safe data stream when scanning documents to a
network destination. For added convenience, configure different profiles to save your favorite Scan to SFTP
destinations.
• Set up a Scan to SFTP Profile
• Create a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
• Export a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
• Import a Server Public Key Using Web Based Management
• Upload Scanned Data to an SFTP Server
100
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) > Set up a
Scan to SFTP Profile
Set up a Scan to SFTP Profile
Set up a Scan to SFTP Profile to scan and upload scanned data directly to an SFTP location.
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the SFTP option, and then click Submit.
6. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint Profile menu.
7. Select the profile you want to set up or change.
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
Option Description
Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Host Address Type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64
characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189).
Username Type a user name (up to 32 characters) of a user that has permission to
write data to the SFTP server.
Auth. Method Select Password or Public Key.
Password When you select Password for the Auth. Method option, type the
password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you
typed in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype
password field.
Client Key Pair When you select Public Key for the Auth. Method option, select the
authentication type.
Server Public Key Select the authentication type.
Store Directory Type the path (up to 60 characters) to the folder on the SFTP server
where you want to send your scanned data. Do not type a slash mark at
the beginning of the path (correct example: brother/abc).
101
Option Description
File Name Select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or from user-
defined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be
the file name prefix you select, followed by the last six digits of the
flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example:
"Estimate_098765.pdf").
Quality Select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the
machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the
scan profile.
File Type Select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If you
choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select
a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Document Size Select your document size from the list. This is necessary to make sure
the scanned file is the correct size.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to
select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
File Size Select your file size from the list.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to
select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Auto Deskew Select the Auto option to set the machine to correct document skewing
automatically as the pages are scanned.
Skip Blank Page Select the On option to remove blank pages of the document from the
scanning results.
Skip Blank Page Sensitivity Select the sensitivity level for detecting blank pages in the scanned data.
The higher the sensitivity, the easier it is for the machine to detect blank
pages.
2-sided Scan Select the Long Edge or Short Edge option to scan both sides of the
document, depending on the layout of your original.
Remove Background Color Change the amount of background color that is removed.
Margin Settings Adjust your document's margins.
Document Separation Split a scanned image.
When multiple documents have been scanned, you can split and save
the documents separately by using this function.
B&W TIFF Compression Select the TIFF compression option for a black and white document.
Brightness Select the brightness level.
Contrast Select the contrast level.
Port Number Change the Port Number setting used to access the SFTP server. The
default setting is port 22. In most cases, this setting does not need to be
changed.
8. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Scan to SSH Server (SFTP)
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
102
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) > Create a
Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
Create a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Client Key Pair.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Create New Client Key Pair.
6. In the Client Key Pair Name field, type the name (up to 20 characters) you want.
7. Click the Public Key Algorithm drop-down list, and then select the algorithm you want.
8. Click Submit.
The client key pair is created and saved in your machine's memory. The client key pair name and public key
algorithm will be displayed in the Client Key Pair List.
Related Information
• Scan to SSH Server (SFTP)
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
103
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) > Export a
Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
Export a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Client Key Pair.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Export Public Key shown with Client Key Pair List.
6. Click Submit.
The client key pair is exported to your computer.
Related Information
• Scan to SSH Server (SFTP)
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
104
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) > Import a
Server Public Key Using Web Based Management
Import a Server Public Key Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Server Public Key.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Import Server Public Key.
6. Specify the file that you want to import.
7. Click Submit.
The server public key is imported to your machine.
Related Information
• Scan to SSH Server (SFTP)
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
105
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) > Upload
Scanned Data to an SFTP Server
Upload Scanned Data to an SFTP Server
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to FTP/SFTP].
3. When the server profiles you set up using Web Based Management appear, select the profile you want. If the
profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality or
file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.
4. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
• Scan to SSH Server (SFTP)
106
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to Network (Windows)
Scan to Network (Windows)
Scan documents directly to a CIFS server on your local network. For added convenience, you can configure
different profiles to save your favorite Scan to Network destinations.
• Set up a Scan to Network Profile
• Upload Scanned Data to a CIFS Server
107
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to Network (Windows) > Set up a
Scan to Network Profile
Set up a Scan to Network Profile
Set up a Scan to Network Profile to scan and upload scanned data directly to a folder on a CIFS server.
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the Network option, and then click Submit.
If you want to send the data to your designated folder on the CIFS server, select On for the Send to My
Folder option.
6. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint Profile menu.
7. Select the profile you want to set up or change.
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
Option Description
Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Network Folder Path Type the path to the folder on the CIFS server where you want to send
your scanned data.
File Name Select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or from user-
defined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be
the file name prefix you select, followed by the last six digits of the
flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example:
"Estimate_098765.pdf").
Quality Select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the
machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the
scan profile.
File Type Select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If you
choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select
a setting each time they use the scan profile.
108
Option Description
Document Size Select your document size from the list. This is necessary to make sure
the scanned file is the correct size.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to
select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
File Size Select your file size from the list.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to
select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Auto Deskew Select the Auto option to set the machine to correct document skewing
automatically as the pages are scanned.
Skip Blank Page Select the On option to remove blank pages of the document from the
scanning results.
Skip Blank Page Sensitivity Select the sensitivity level for detecting blank pages in the scanned data.
The higher the sensitivity, the easier it is for the machine to detect blank
pages.
2-sided Scan Select the Long Edge or Short Edge option to scan both sides of the
document, depending on the layout of your original.
Remove Background Color Change the amount of background color that is removed.
Margin Settings Adjust your document's margins.
Document Separation Split a scanned image.
When multiple documents have been scanned, you can split and save
the documents separately by using this function.
B&W TIFF Compression Select the TIFF compression option for a black and white document.
Brightness Select the brightness level.
Contrast Select the contrast level.
Use PIN for Authentication To PIN-protect this profile, select On and type a four-digit PIN in the PIN
Code field.
Auth. Method To set your authentication method, select Auto, Kerberos, or NTLMv2.
Username Type a user name (up to 96 characters) of a user that has permission to
write data to the folder specified in the Network Folder Path field. If the
user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of the
following styles:
• user@domain
• domain\user
Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name
you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the
Retype password field.
Kerberos Server Address When you select Kerberos for the Auth. Method option, you must type
the Kerberos Server Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up
to 64 characters).
8. Click Submit.
9. You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server) or set the date, time and time zone correctly on
the control panel for all authentication methods. The machine's time must match the time used by the
Kerberos Server and CIFS Server.
Related Information
• Scan to Network (Windows)
• Set the Date and Time Using Web Based Management
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
109
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to Network (Windows) > Set up a
Scan to Network Profile > Set the Date and Time Using Web Based Management
Set the Date and Time Using Web Based Management
Make sure the date and time and the time zone settings are set correctly using Web Based Management or the
control panel. The machine's time must match the time used by the server providing authentication.
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
• Ignore step 1, if you already have a Web Based Management window open.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Date&Time.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
110
5. Clear the Synchronize with SNTP server checkbox.
6. In the Date fields, enter the date.
7. Select the clock type from the Clock Type field.
8. In the Time fields, enter the time.
9. Select the time difference between your location and UTC from the Time Zone drop-down list. For example,
the time zone for Eastern time in the USA and Canada is UTC-05:00.
10. In the Auto Daylight field, click On to set the machine to change automatically to Daylight Saving Time. It will
reset itself forward one hour in the spring, and back one hour in the fall (available only for some countries).
11. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Set up a Scan to Network Profile
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
111
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to Network (Windows) > Upload
Scanned Data to a CIFS Server
Upload Scanned Data to a CIFS Server
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to Network].
• If you registered your user ID, the [to My Folder] option appears when you log on to the machine
using Active Directory Authentication or LDAP Authentication.
• To send scanned data to your designated folder on the CIFS server, press [to My Folder].
• To enable this feature in Web Based Management, go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan >
Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint. In the Send to My Folder field, select On.
3. When the server profiles you set up using Web Based Management appear, select the profile you want. If the
profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality or
file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK].
4. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
• Scan to Network (Windows)
112
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SharePoint
Scan to SharePoint
Scan documents directly to a SharePoint server when you need to share the scanned information. For added
convenience, configure different profiles to save your favorite Scan to SharePoint destinations.
• Set up a Scan to SharePoint Profile
• Upload Scanned Data to a SharePoint Server
113
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SharePoint > Set up a Scan to
SharePoint Profile
Set up a Scan to SharePoint Profile
Set up a Scan to SharePoint Profile to scan and upload the scanned data directly to a SharePoint location.
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the SharePoint option, and then click Submit.
6. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint Profile menu.
7. Select the profile you want to set up or change.
NOTE
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
Option
Description
Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
SharePoint Site Address Copy and paste the full destination address shown in the address bar of
your browser (for example: http://SharePointSiteAddress/Shared
%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx) or the IP address (for example:
http://192.168.0.1/Shared%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx).
SSL/TLS If the address in the SharePoint Site Address field starts with "https://",
you can verify the server certificate by selecting the Verify Server
Certificate checkbox.
File Name Select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or from user-
defined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be
the file name prefix you select, followed by the last six digits of the
flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example:
"Estimate_098765.pdf").
Quality Select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the
machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the
scan profile.
114
Option Description
File Type Select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If you
choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select
a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Document Size Select your document size from the list. This is necessary to make sure
the scanned file is the correct size.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to
select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
File Size Select your file size from the list.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to
select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Auto Deskew Select the Auto option to set the machine to correct document skewing
automatically as the pages are scanned.
Skip Blank Page Select the On option to remove blank pages of the document from the
scanning results.
Skip Blank Page Sensitivity Select the sensitivity level for detecting blank pages in the scanned data.
The higher the sensitivity, the easier it is for the machine to detect blank
pages.
2-sided Scan Select the Long Edge or Short Edge option to scan both sides of the
document, depending on the layout of your original.
Remove Background Color Change the amount of background color that is removed.
Margin Settings Adjust your document's margins.
Document Separation Split a scanned image.
When multiple documents have been scanned, you can split and save
the documents separately by using this function.
B&W TIFF Compression Select the TIFF compression option for a black and white document.
Brightness Select the brightness level.
Contrast Select the contrast level.
Use PIN for Authentication To PIN-protect this profile, select On and type a four-digit PIN in the PIN
Code field.
Auth. Method To set your authentication method, select Auto, NTLMv2, Kerberos, or
Basic. If you choose Auto, the authentication method will be detected
automatically.
Username Type the user name (up to 96 characters) of a user that has permission
to write data to the folder specified in the SharePoint Site Address
field. If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of
the following styles:
• user@domain
• domain\user
Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name
you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the
Retype password field.
Kerberos Server Address When you select Kerberos for the Auth. Method option, you must type
the Kerberos Server Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up
to 64 characters).
8. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Scan to SharePoint
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
115
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SharePoint > Upload Scanned
Data to a SharePoint Server
Upload Scanned Data to a SharePoint Server
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to SharePoint].
3. When the server profiles you set up using Web Based Management appear, select the profile you want. If the
profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality or
file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK].
4. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to
complete the scanning job.
Related Information
• Scan to SharePoint
116
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Use the Web Services Protocol for
Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and
Windows 11)
The Web Services protocol enables Windows 10 and Windows 11 users to scan using a Brother machine on the
network. You must install the driver via Web Services.
• Use the Web Services Protocol to Install the Scanner Driver (Windows 10 and Windows
11)
• Scan From Your Machine Using the Web Services Protocol (Windows 10 and Windows
11)
• Configure Scan Settings for the Web Services Protocol
117
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Use the Web Services Protocol for
Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) > Use the Web Services Protocol to Install the Scanner
Driver (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
Use the Web Services Protocol to Install the Scanner Driver (Windows
10 and Windows 11)
• Make sure you have installed the correct software and drivers for your machine.
• Verify that the host computer and the Brother machine are on the same subnet, or that the router is
correctly configured to pass data between the two devices.
• You must configure the IP address on your Brother machine before you configure this setting.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11
Click
> All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add
a device.
• Windows 10
Click
> Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add a device.
• The Web Services Name for the Brother machine is your model's name and the MAC Address.
• Move your mouse over the machine's name to display the machine's information.
2. Select the machine you want to install, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
To uninstall the drivers, click Uninstall or (Remove device).
Related Information
• Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
118
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Use the Web Services Protocol for
Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) > Scan From Your Machine Using the Web Services
Protocol (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
Scan From Your Machine Using the Web Services Protocol (Windows 10
and Windows 11)
If you have installed the scanner driver via Web Services, you can access the Web Services scanning menu on
your machine's LCD.
Certain characters in the messages displayed on the LCD may be replaced with spaces if the language
settings of your operating system and your machine are different.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [WS Scan].
3. Select the scan type.
4. Select the computer name where you want to send scanned data.
5. Press [Start].
The machine starts scanning.
If you are requested to select a scanning application, select Windows Fax and Scan from the list.
Related Information
• Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
119
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Use the Web Services Protocol for
Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) > Configure Scan Settings for the Web Services Protocol
Configure Scan Settings for the Web Services Protocol
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11
Click
> All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View
devices and printers.
• Windows 10
Click > Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices
and printers.
2. Right-click the machine icon, and then select Scan profiles.... The Scan Profiles dialog box appears.
3. Select the scan profile you want to use.
4. Make sure the scanner selected in the Scanner list is a machine that supports Web Services for scanning,
and then click the Set as Default button.
5. Click Edit....
The Edit Default Profile dialog box appears.
6. Select the Source, Paper size, Color format, File type, Resolution (DPI), Brightness and Contrast
settings.
7. Click the Save Profile button.
These settings will be applied when you scan using the Web Services protocol.
If the machine prompts you to select a scanning application, select Windows Fax and Scan from the list.
Related Information
• Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
120
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Change the Scan Button Settings from
Brother iPrint&Scan
Change the Scan Button Settings from Brother iPrint&Scan
Brother iPrint&Scan allows you to change the machine's Scan Button settings.
1. Start Brother iPrint&Scan.
• Windows
Launch
(Brother iPrint&Scan).
• Mac
In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications, and then double-click the iPrint&Scan icon.
The Brother iPrint&Scan screen appears.
2. If your Brother machine is not selected, click the Select your Machine button, and then follow the on-screen
instructions to select your Brother machine.
3. Click the Machine Scan Settings button, and then follow the on-screen instructions to change the scan
settings, such as document size, color, and resolution.
Related Information
• Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
121
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Configure Certificates for Signed PDFs
Configure Certificates for Signed PDFs
If you select Signed PDF for Scan features, you must configure a certificate on your machine using Web Based
Management.
To use Signed PDF, you must install a certificate on your machine and your computer.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Signed PDF.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click the Select the Certificate drop-down list, and then select the certificate.
6. Click Submit.
122
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Disable Scanning from Your Computer
Disable Scanning from Your Computer
To disable the scan function on your computer, disable the Pull Scan setting using Web Based Management.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan from PC.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. In the Pull Scan field, click Disabled.
6. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
124
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows)
Scan from Your Computer (Windows)
There are several ways you can use your computer to scan photos and documents on your machine. Use the
software applications we provide or use your favorite scanning application.
• Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
•
Scan Using Nuance
™
PaperPort
™
14SE or Other Windows Applications
• Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan
125
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
1. Start Brother iPrint&Scan.
• Windows
Launch (Brother iPrint&Scan).
• Mac
In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications, and then double-click the iPrint&Scan icon.
The Brother iPrint&Scan screen appears.
2. If your Brother machine is not selected, click the Select your Machine button, and then select your model's
name from the list. Click OK.
3. Click OK again.
4. Click the Scan icon, and then follow the on-screen instructions to scan your documents.
Related Information
• Scan from Your Computer (Windows)
Related Topics:
• Brother iPrint&Scan
126
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using Nuance
™
PaperPort
™
14SE or Other
Windows Applications
Scan Using Nuance
™
PaperPort
™
14SE or Other Windows Applications
You can use the Nuance
™
PaperPort
™
14SE application for scanning.
• To download the Nuance
™
PaperPort
™
14SE application, click (Brother Utilities), select Do More in
the left navigation bar, and then click PaperPort.
• Nuance
™
PaperPort
™
14SE supports Windows 10 and Windows 11.
• For detailed instructions on using each application, click the application's Help menu, and then click
Getting Started Guide in the Help ribbon.
The instructions for scanning in these steps are for PaperPort
™
14SE. For other Windows applications, the
steps will be similar. PaperPort
™
14SE supports both TWAIN and WIA drivers; the TWAIN driver
(recommended) is used in these steps.
1. Load your document.
2. Start PaperPort
™
14SE.
Do one of the following:
• Windows 11
Click
> All apps > Nuance PaperPort 14 > PaperPort.
• Windows 10
Click
> Nuance PaperPort 14 > PaperPort.
3. Click the Desktop menu, and then click Scan Settings in the Desktop ribbon.
The Scan or Get Photo panel appears on the left side of the screen.
4. Click Select.
5. From the available Scanners list, select your model with TWAIN: TW in the name.
6. Click OK.
7. Select the Display scanner dialog box checkbox in the Scan or Get Photo panel.
8. Click Scan.
The Scanner Setup dialog box appears.
127
9. Adjust the settings in the Scanner Setup dialog box, if needed.
10. Click the Document Size drop-down list, and then select your document size.
To scan both sides of the document:
Automatic 2-sided scan is available only when using the ADF.
You cannot use PreScan to preview the scanned image.
11. Click PreScan to preview your image and crop unwanted portions before scanning.
12. Click Start.
The machine starts scanning.
Related Information
• Scan from Your Computer (Windows)
• TWAIN Driver Settings (Windows)
128
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using Nuance
™
PaperPort
™
14SE or Other
Windows Applications > TWAIN Driver Settings (Windows)
TWAIN Driver Settings (Windows)
• Note that the item names and assignable values will vary depending on the machine.
• The Contrast option is available only when selecting the Gray (Error Diffusion), True Gray, or 24bit
Color options from the Color Setting settings.
1. Scan
Select the Photo, Web, or Text option depending on the type of document you want to scan.
Scan (Image Type)
Resolution Color Setting
Photo Use for scanning photo images. 300 x 300 dpi 24bit Color
Web Use for attaching scanned
images to web pages.
100 x 100 dpi 24bit Color
Text Use for scanning text
documents.
200 x 200 dpi Black & White
2. Resolution
Select a scanning resolution from the Resolution drop-down list. Higher resolutions take more memory and
transfer time, but produce a finer scanned image.
3. Color Setting
Select from a range of scan color depths.
129
• Black & White
Use for text or line art images.
• Gray (Error Diffusion)
Use for photographic images or graphics. (Error Diffusion is a method for creating simulated gray
images without using true gray dots. Black dots are arranged in a specific pattern to give a gray
appearance.)
• True Gray
Use for photographic images or graphics. This mode is more accurate because it uses up to 256
shades of gray.
• 24bit Color
Use to create an image with the most accurate color reproduction. This mode uses up to 16.8 million
colors to scan the image, but it requires the most memory and has the longest transfer time.
4. Document Size
Select the exact size of your document from a selection of preset scan sizes.
If you select Custom, the Custom Document Size dialog box appears and you can specify the document
size.
5. Auto Crop
Scan multiple documents placed on the scanner glass. The machine will scan each document and create
separate files or a single multi-page file.
6. Brightness
Set the brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the scanned
image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is too dark, set a
higher brightness level and scan the document again. You can also type a value in the field to set the
brightness level.
7. Contrast
Increase or decrease the contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasizes dark
and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in gray areas. You can also type a value
in the field to set the contrast level.
8. 2-sided Scanning
Scan both sides of the document. When using the Automatic 2-sided Scan feature, you must select the
Long-edge binding or Short-edge binding option from the 2-sided Scanning drop-down list, so that when
you turn the pages, they are facing the way you want.
9. Advanced Settings
Configure advanced settings by clicking the Advanced Settings button in the Scan Settings dialog box.
• Document Correction
- Auto Deskew
Set the machine to correct document skewing automatically as the pages are scanned.
- Detect End of Page (ADF)
Detects the end of page and automatically adjusts the size of a page when the length of the document
scanned from the ADF is shorter than the selected document size.
- Margin Settings
Adjust the margins in your document.
- Rotate Image
Rotate the scanned image.
- Fill With Color
Fill in the edges on four sides of the scanned image using the selected color and range.
- Skip Blank Page
Remove the document's blank pages from the scanning results.
• Image Quality
- Background Processing
130
• Remove Bleed-through / Pattern
Prevent bleed-through.
• Remove Background Color
Remove the base color of documents to make the scanned data more legible.
- Color Drop
Select a color to remove from the scanned image.
- Edge Emphasis
Make the characters of the original sharper.
- Reduce Noise
Improve the quality of your scanned images with this selection. The Reduce Noise option is available
when selecting the 24bit Color option and the 300 x 300 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, or 600 x 600 dpi scan
resolution.
• B&W Image Quality
- Character Correction
• Blurred Character Correction
Correct the broken or incomplete characters of the original to make them easier to read.
• Boldface Formatting
Emphasize the characters of the original by making them bold.
- B&W Inversion
Invert black and white in the black and white image.
• Feed Control
- Layout
Select the layout.
- Continuous Scan
Select this option to scan multiple pages. After a page is scanned, select whether to continue
scanning or finish.
Related Information
• Scan Using Nuance
™
PaperPort
™
14SE or Other Windows Applications
131
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan
Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan
The Windows Fax and Scan application is another option that you can use for scanning.
• Windows Fax and Scan uses the WIA scanner driver.
• If you want to crop a portion of a page after pre-scanning a document, you must scan using the scanner
glass (also called the flatbed).
1. Load your document.
2. Launch Windows Fax and Scan.
3. Click File > New > Scan.
4. Select the scanner you want to use.
5. Click OK.
The New Scan dialog box appears.
6. Adjust the settings in the dialog box, if needed.
The scanner resolution can be set to a maximum of 1200 dpi. If you want to scan at higher resolutions, use
the Scanner Utility software from Brother Utilities.
If your machine supports 2-sided scanning and you want to scan both sides of your document, select Feeder
(Scan both sides) from the Source drop-down list
7. Click Scan.
The machine starts scanning the document.
132
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan > WIA Driver
Settings (Windows)
WIA Driver Settings (Windows)
Profile
Select the scan profile you want to use from the Profile drop-down list.
Source
Select the Flatbed, Feeder (Scan one side), or Feeder (Scan both sides) option from the drop-down list.
Paper size
The Paper size option is available if you select the Feeder (Scan one side) or Feeder (Scan both sides)
option from the Source drop-down list.
Color format
Select a scan color format from the Color format drop-down list.
File type
Select a file format from the File type drop-down list.
Resolution (DPI)
Set a scanning resolution in the Resolution (DPI) field. Higher resolutions take more memory and transfer
time, but produce a finer scanned image.
Brightness
Set the brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the scanned
image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is too dark, set a
134
higher brightness level and scan the document again. You can also type a value in the field to set the
brightness level.
Contrast
Increase or decrease the contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasizes dark
and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in gray areas. You can also type a value in
the field to set the contrast level.
Related Information
• Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan
135
Home > Scan > Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management > Set the Scan File Name Using
Web Based Management
Set the Scan File Name Using Web Based Management
Set up a file name for scanned data using Web Based Management.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan File Name.
If the left navigation bar is not visible, start navigating from .
5. Select the File Name Style from the drop-down list.
6. If you selected the option to include the date in File Name Style field, select the date format from the drop-
down list.
7. In the Time field, select On to include the time information in the file name.
8. In the Counter field, select Continuous or Reset after each job.
If you select Reset after each job, duplication of file names may occur.
9. If you want to create a user-defined file name prefix, type a file name in the user-defined fields of each scan
function.
Do not use the following characters: ? / \ *
10. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
138
Home > Scan > Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management > Set the Scan Job Email Report
Using Web Based Management
Set the Scan Job Email Report Using Web Based Management
When you scan a document, the machine will send a scan job email report automatically to the registered email
address.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan Job e-mail report.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. In the Administrator Address field, type the email address.
6. For the scan functions you want, select On to send a scan job email report.
7. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
139
Home > Copy > Copy on One Side of the Paper (1-sided)
Copy on One Side of the Paper (1-sided)
1. Make sure you have loaded the correct size paper in the paper tray.
2. Do one of the following:
• Place the document face up in the ADF.
(If you are copying multiple pages, we recommend using the ADF.)
• Place the document face down on the scanner glass.
NOTE
For important or fragile documents, use the machine’s scanner glass.
3. Press [Copy].
The LCD displays:
141
4. Change the copy settings, if needed.
• (Number of copies)
Enter the number of copies in one of the following ways:
- Press or on the LCD.
- Press to display a numeric keypad on the LCD, and then enter the number of copies. Press
[OK].
• [Options]
Press to change the copy settings for the next copy only.
- When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
- After you have finished choosing new options, you can save them by pressing the [Save as
Shortcut] button.
Current setting
Press the following display area to change these settings for the next copy only. The icon displayed varies
depending on the model.
- [Quality]
- [Tray Use]
- [Enlarge/Reduce]
5. Press [Color Start] or [Black Start].
To stop copying, press .
Related Information
• Copy
142
Home > Copy > Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided)
Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided)
Reduce the amount of paper you use by copying onto both sides of the paper.
• You must choose a 2-sided copy layout from the following options before you can start 2-sided copying.
• The layout of your original document determines which 2-sided copy layout you should choose.
• (For ADF models) For important or fragile documents, use the machine’s scanner glass.
• (For ADF models) To use the automatic 2-sided copy feature, you must load your document in the ADF.
• When you manually make 2-sided copies from a 2-sided document, use the scanner glass.
• (For models without the lever on the 2-sided tray) Select Letter, Legal, Mexico Legal, India Legal, or Folio
sized paper when using the 2‑sided copy option.
Portrait
2–sided to 2–sided
1
2
1
2
1–sided to 2–sided (Long Edge Flip)
1
2
1
2
1–sided to 2–sided (Short Edge Flip)
1
2
1
2
Landscape
2–sided to 2–sided
1
2
1
2
1–sided to 2–sided (Long Edge Flip)
1
2
1
2
1–sided to 2–sided (Short Edge Flip)
1
2
1
2
1. Load your document.
143
NOTE
Load your 2-sided document in the ADF. If you use the scanner glass for your 2-sided document, select
the [1-sided⇒2-sided] option.
2. Press [Copy].
3. Enter the number of copies.
4. Press
[Options] > [2-sided Copy].
5. Do one of the following:
• To make 2-sided copies of a 2-sided document, press [2-sided⇒2-sided].
• To make 2-sided copies from a 1-sided document, follow these steps:
a. To change the layout options, press [Layout], and then press [Long Edge Flip] or [Short
Edge Flip].
b. Press [1-sided⇒2-sided].
6. When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
7. Press [Color Start] or [Black Start].
If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing.
8. If you are using the scanner glass, repeat the following steps for each page of the document:
For a 2-sided document, turn the sheet over along the long edge to scan the other side.
• Place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press [Continue] to scan the page.
• After scanning all the pages, press [Finish].
Related Information
• Copy
144
Home > Copy > Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images
Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images
Select an enlargement or reduction ratio to resize your copied data.
1. Load your document.
2. Press
[Copy].
3. Enter the number of copies.
4. Press [Options] > [Enlarge/Reduce].
5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the available options, and then press the option you want.
6. Do one of the following:
• If you select [Enlarge] or [Reduce], press the enlargement or reduction ratio you want to use.
• If you select [Custom(25-400%)], press
(backspace) to erase the displayed percentage, or press
d to move the cursor, and then enter an enlargement or reduction ratio from [25] to [400].
Press [OK].
• If you selected [100%], go to the next step.
7. When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
8. Press [Color Start] or [Black Start].
Related Information
• Copy
145
Home > Copy > Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature
Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature
The N in 1 copy feature saves paper by copying two or four pages of your document onto one page of the copy.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Copy].
3. Enter the number of copies.
4. Press
[Options] > [Page Layout].
5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the options, and then press the option you want.
Option Description
2in1(Portrait)
2in1(Landscape)
4in1(Portrait)
4in1(Landscape)
6. When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
7. Press [Color Start] or [Black Start].
If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing.
8. If you are using the scanner glass, repeat the following steps for each page of the document:
• Place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press [Continue] to scan the page.
• After scanning all the pages, press [Finish].
Related Information
• Copy
146
Home > Copy > Sort Copies
Sort Copies
Sort multiple copies. Pages will be stacked in the order they are fed, that is: 1, 2, 3, and so on.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Copy].
3. Enter the number of copies.
4. Press [Options] > [Stack/Sort] > [Sort].
5. When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
6. Press [Color Start] or [Black Start].
If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing.
7. If you are using the scanner glass, repeat the following steps for each page of the document:
• Place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press [Continue] to scan the page.
• After scanning all the pages, press [Finish].
Related Information
• Copy
147
Home > Copy > Copy an ID Card
Copy an ID Card
You may copy an identification card only to the extent permitted under applicable laws. For more detailed
information, see the Product Safety Guide.
1. Place your identification card face down near the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
1
1: Distance 0.16 in. (4.0 mm) or greater (top, left)
2. Press
[Copy].
3. Press [ID].
4. Enter the number of copies.
5. Press [Color Start] or [Black Start].
The machine scans one side of the identification card.
6. After the machine has scanned the first side, turn over the identification card.
7. Press [Continue] to scan the other side.
Related Information
• Copy
148
Home > Copy > Copy Options
Copy Options
To change the Copy settings, press [Options].
Menu selections Options
Quality
Select the copy quality for your type of document.
Tray Use
Select a paper tray for the next copy.
Enlarge/Reduce 100%
-
Enlarge
Select an enlargement ratio for the
next copy.
Reduce
Select a reduction ratio for the next
copy.
Custom(25-400%)
Enter an enlargement or reduction
ratio.
Density
Increase the density to make the text darker.
Decrease the density to make the text lighter.
Remove Background Color
Select to remove the background color of the document when copying.
2-sided Copy
Select to copy on both sides of the paper.
1-sided → 2-sided
1
2
1
2
2-sided → 2-sided
1
2
1
2
The available options will vary depending on your model.
2-sided Copy Page Layout
(available for certain settings)
Select long edge binding or short edge binding.
Contrast
Increase the contrast to make an image clearer.
Decrease the contrast to make an image more subdued.
Stack/Sort
Select to stack or sort multiple copies.
Stack
1
1
2
2
Sort
2
1
2
1
149
Home > Fax > Send a Fax
Send a Fax
• Send a Fax
• Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF
• Send a Fax Manually
• Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation
• Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting)
• Send a Fax in Real Time
• Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax)
• Add a Cover Page to Your Fax
• Cancel a Fax in Progress
• Check and Cancel a Pending Fax
• Fax Options
152
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax
Send a Fax
1. Do one of the following:
• Place the document face up in the ADF.
(If you are faxing multiple pages, we recommend using the ADF.)
• Place the document face down on the scanner glass.
2. Press [Fax].
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes].
3. Enter the fax number.
• Using the dial pad
Press the digits to enter the fax number.
• Using the Address Book
153
Press [Address Book], and then do one of the following:
- Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want, and then press it.
- Press
[Search:], and then enter the name or the first letter of the name and press [OK]. Press
the name you want to dial.
When finished, press [Apply].
• Using the Call History
Press [Call History], and then press the [Outgoing Call] option.
Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the fax number you want, and then press it.
To send a fax, press [Apply].
4. Press [Fax Start].
The machine scans and sends the document.
If you placed the document on the scanner glass, follow the instructions in the table.
Option Description
Yes
To scan the next page, press the Yes option, and then place the next page on the scanner glass.
Press OK to scan the page.
No
After you have scanned the last page, press the No option.
The machine sends the document.
To stop faxing, press , and then press .
When the LCD displays [Cancel Job?], press [Yes].
Related Information
• Send a Fax
154
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF
Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF
You must select a 2-sided scanning format before sending a 2-sided fax. Select either the Long Edge or Short
Edge option, depending on the layout of your document.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax].
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes].
3. Press [Options] > [2-sided Fax].
4. Do one of the following:
• If your document is flipped on the long edge, press the [2-sided Scan: Long Edge] option.
• If your document is flipped on the short edge, press the [2-sided Scan: Short Edge] option.
5. Press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
6. Enter the fax number.
7. Press [Fax Start].
Related Information
• Send a Fax
155
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax Manually
Send a Fax Manually
Manual fax transmission lets you hear the dialing, ringing and fax-receiving tones while sending a fax.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax].
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes].
3. Press [Hook] and listen for a dial tone.
4. Dial the fax number you want to call.
5. When you hear the fax tone, press [Fax Start].
If you are using the scanner glass, press [Send].
Related Information
• Send a Fax
156
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation
Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation
At the end of a conversation, you can send a fax to the other party before you both hang up.
1. Ask the other party to wait for fax tones (beeps) and then to press the Start button before hanging up.
2. Load your document.
3. Press [Fax Start].
If you are using the scanner glass, press [Send].
4. Replace the handset.
Related Information
• Send a Fax
157
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting)
Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting)
Use the Broadcasting feature to send the same fax to multiple fax numbers at the same time.
• The same broadcast can include Groups, Address Book numbers, and up to 50 manually dialed numbers.
• Address Book numbers must be stored in the machine’s memory before they can be used in a broadcast.
• Group numbers must also be stored in the machine’s memory before they can be used in a broadcast.
Group numbers include many stored Address Book numbers for easier dialing.
If you did not use any of the Address Book numbers for Groups, you can broadcast faxes to the maximum
number of locations supported by your machine. For information about the broadcasting locations, see
Related Information: Specifications.
1. Load your document.
2. Press
[Fax].
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes].
3. Press [Options] > [Broadcasting].
4. Press [Add Number].
You can add numbers to the broadcast in the following ways:
• Press [Add Number] and enter a number using the LCD.
Press [OK].
If you want to broadcast using an email address, press , enter the email address, and press [OK].
(On certain models, you must download Internet Fax to use the Internet Fax feature and the Scan to Email
server feature.)
• Press [Add from Address book]. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want
to add to the broadcast. Select the checkboxes of the broadcast. After you select all the numbers you
want, press [OK].
• Press [Search in Address book]. Press the name and press [OK]. Press the name or the first
letter of the name, and then press the number you want to add.
5. When finished, press [OK].
6. Press [Fax Start].
• The machine’s available memory will vary depending on the types of jobs in the memory and the
numbers used for broadcasting. If you broadcast to the maximum number available, you will not be able
to use dual access and delayed fax.
• If the [Out of Memory] message appears, press or [Quit] to stop the job. If more than one
page has been scanned, press [Send Now] to send the portion that is in the machine's memory.
Related Information
• Send a Fax
• Cancel a Broadcast in Progress
Related Topics:
• Specifications
158
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting) > Cancel a
Broadcast in Progress
Cancel a Broadcast in Progress
While broadcasting multiple faxes, you can cancel just the fax currently being transmitted or cancel the whole
broadcast job.
1. Press .
2. Press .
3. Do one of the following:
• To cancel the entire broadcast, press [Entire Broadcast].
When the LCD displays [Cancel Job?], press [Yes].
• To cancel the current job, press the name or number being dialed on the LCD.
When the LCD displays [Cancel Job?], press [Yes].
• To exit without canceling, press .
Related Information
• Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting)
159
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax in Real Time
Send a Fax in Real Time
When sending a fax, the machine scans the document into the memory before sending it. As soon as the
telephone line is free, the machine starts dialing and sending. If you want to send an important document
immediately without waiting for the machine to retrieve the scan from its memory, turn on [Real Time TX].
• If the memory is full and you are sending a fax from the ADF, the machine sends the document in real time
(even if [Real Time TX] is set to [Off]). If the memory is full, faxes from the scanner glass cannot be
sent until you clear some of the memory.
• In Real Time Transmission, the automatic redial feature does not work when using the scanner glass.
• If [Real Time TX] is set to on, the option to scan 2-sided documents is not available.
1. Load your document.
2. Press
[Fax].
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes].
3. Press [Options] > [Real Time TX].
4. Press [On] or [Off].
5. Press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
6. Enter the fax number.
7. Press [Fax Start].
Related Information
• Send a Fax
160
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax)
Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax)
You can store up to 50 faxes in the machine's memory to be sent within the next twenty-four hour period.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax].
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes].
3. Press [Options] > [Delayed Fax] > [Delayed Fax].
4. Press [On].
5. Press [Set Time].
6. To enter the time you want the fax to be sent, do one of the following:
• If you set [12h Clock] in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time in 12-hour format.
Press [AM] or [PM], and then press [OK].
• If you set [24h Clock] in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time in 24-hour format and then press
[OK].
(For example, enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
7. Press [OK].
8. Enter the fax number.
9. Press [Fax Start].
10. Press .
Related Information
• Send a Fax
161
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Add a Cover Page to Your Fax
Add a Cover Page to Your Fax
You can add a cover page to the next fax or every outgoing fax.
• This feature will not work unless you have set up your Station ID.
• The cover page includes your Station ID, a comment, and the name stored in the Address Book.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax].
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes].
3. Press [Options] > [Coverpage Setup] > [Coverpage Setup].
4. Press [On].
5. Press [Coverpage Message].
6. Swipe up or down or press a or b to choose the comment you want to use, and then press the comment.
Press .
7. Press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
8. Enter the fax number.
9. Press [Fax Start].
The cover page will be added to the next fax. If you want to add the cover page to every outgoing fax, set the
settings as the new default.
Related Information
• Send a Fax
• Create a Cover Page Message
162
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Add a Cover Page to Your Fax > Create a Cover Page Message
Create a Cover Page Message
Create up to two custom cover page messages to add to outgoing faxes.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Send] > [Coverpage Message].
2. Press [5.] or [6.] to store your customized message.
3. Enter the cover page message using the LCD. Press [OK].
Press to select numbers, letters, or special characters.
4. Press .
Related Information
• Add a Cover Page to Your Fax
163
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Cancel a Fax in Progress
Cancel a Fax in Progress
1. Press .
2. Press while the machine is dialing or sending a fax.
The LCD displays [Cancel Job?].
3. Press an option in the table to cancel or continue the fax job in progress.
Option Description
Yes
The machine cancels sending the fax job.
No
The machine does not cancel the fax job.
Related Information
• Send a Fax
164
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Check and Cancel a Pending Fax
Check and Cancel a Pending Fax
You can cancel a fax job before it is sent, while it is stored in the memory.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Remaining Jobs].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll through the waiting jobs, and then press the job you want to
cancel.
3. Press [OK].
4. Press [Yes] to cancel the fax job or press [No] to exit without canceling.
5. When finished, press .
Related Information
• Send a Fax
165
Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Fax Options
Fax Options
To change the fax-sending settings, press [Options].
Option Description
Fax Resolution
Set the resolution for outgoing faxes.
The fax quality often can be improved by changing the Fax
Resolution.
Contrast
Adjust the contrast.
If your document is very light or very dark, changing the contrast
may improve the fax quality.
2-sided Fax
(For automatic 2-sided scanning models)
Set the 2-sided scanning format.
Glass Scan Size
Adjust the scan area of the scanner glass to the size of the
document.
Broadcasting
Send the same fax message to more than one fax number at the
same time.
Preview
Preview a fax message before you send it.
Delayed Fax
Set the time of day the delayed faxes will be sent.
Real Time TX
Send a fax immediately without waiting for the machine to retrieve
the scan from its memory.
Coverpage Setup
Set the machine to automatically send a pre-programmed cover
page.
Overseas Mode
Set to On if you have difficulty sending faxes overseas.
Call History
Select a number from the Call History.
Address Book
Select a number from the Address Book.
Set New Default
Save your settings as the default.
Factory Reset
Restore all settings back to the factory settings.
You can save the current settings by pressing [Save as Shortcut].
Related Information
• Send a Fax
166
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings
Receive Mode Settings
• Receive Modes Overview
• Choose the Correct Receive Mode
• Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay)
• Set the F/T Ring Time (Pseudo/Double-ring)
• Set Easy Receive
• Shrink Page Size of an Oversized Incoming Fax
• Set the 2-sided Printing for Received Faxes
• Set the Fax Receive Stamp
• Receive a Fax at the End of a Telephone Conversation
168
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Receive Modes Overview
Receive Modes Overview
Some receive modes answer automatically (Fax Only Mode and Fax/Tel Mode). You may want to change the
Ring Delay before using these modes.
Fax Only Mode
([Fax Only] in the machine's menu)
Fax Only Mode automatically answers every call as a fax.
Fax/Tel Mode
([Fax/Tel] in the machine's menu)
Fax/Tel Mode helps you manage incoming calls, by recognizing whether they are fax or voice calls and
handling them in the following ways:
• Faxes will be received automatically.
• Voice calls will start the F/T ring to tell you to pick up the call. The F/T ring is a fast pseudo/double-ring
made by your machine.
Manual Mode
([Manual] in the machine's menu)
Manual Mode turns off all automatic answering operations unless you are using the Distinctive Ring Receive
feature.
To receive a fax in Manual Mode, lift the handset of the external telephone connected to the machine or press
the button in the table.
Applicable Models
Alternate way to lift the handset
MFC-L8395CDW
Hook
When you hear fax tones (short repeating beeps), press the buttons in the table to receive a fax. Use the Easy
Receive feature to receive faxes when you have lifted a handset on the same line as the machine.
Applicable Models
To receive a fax
MFC-L8395CDW Fax Start > Receive
External TAD Mode
([External TAD] in the machine's menu)
External TAD Mode lets an external answering device manage your incoming calls.
Incoming calls will be handled in the following ways:
• Faxes will be received automatically.
• Voice callers can record a message on the external TAD.
Related Information
• Receive Mode Settings
169
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Choose the Correct Receive Mode
Choose the Correct Receive Mode
The correct Receive Mode for you is determined by the external devices and telephone subscriber services
(Voice Mail, Distinctive Ring and so on) you will be using on the same line as your machine.
Will you be using a Distinctive Ring number for receiving faxes?
Brother uses the term "Distinctive Ring" but different telephone companies may have other names for this
service, such as Custom Ringing, Personalized Ring, Teen Ring, Ident-A-Ring, Ident-A-Call, Data Ident-A-
Call, Smart Ring and SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate Number Ringing.
Will you be using Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine?
If you have Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine, there is a strong possibility that
Voice Mail and the Brother machine will conflict with each other when receiving incoming calls.
Will you be using a Telephone Answering Device on the same telephone line as your Brother machine?
Your external telephone answering device (TAD) will answer every call automatically. Voice messages are
stored on the external TAD and fax messages are printed. Select [External TAD] as your receive mode.
Will you be using your Brother machine on a dedicated fax line?
Your machine automatically answers every call as a fax. Select [Fax Only] as your receive mode.
Will you be using your Brother machine on the same line as your telephone?
• Do you want to receive voice calls and faxes automatically?
The Fax/Tel Mode is used when sharing the Brother machine and your telephone on the same line.
Select [Fax/Tel] as your receive mode.
Important Note: You cannot receive voice messages on either Voice Mail or an answering machine if
you selected the Fax/Tel Mode.
• Do you expect to receive very few faxes?
Choose [Manual] as your receive mode. You control the telephone line and must answer every call
yourself.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Receive Mode].
If you cannot change the [Receive Mode] option, make sure the Distinctive Ring feature is set to [Off].
2. Press [Fax Only], [Fax/Tel], [External TAD], or [Manual].
3. Press
.
Related Information
• Receive Mode Settings
Related Topics:
• Telephone and Fax Problems
170
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine
Answers (Ring Delay)
Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay)
When somebody calls your machine, you will hear the normal telephone ring sound. The number of rings is set in
the Ring Delay option.
• The Ring Delay setting sets the number of times the machine rings before it answers in the Fax Only and
Fax/Tel Modes.
• If you have external or extension telephones on the same line as the machine, keep the Ring Delay setting
of 4.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Ring Delay].
2. Press the number of rings you want.
If you select [0], the machine will answer immediately and the line will not ring at all (available only for
some countries).
3. Press .
Related Information
• Receive Mode Settings
Related Topics:
• Telephone and Fax Problems
171
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set the F/T Ring Time (Pseudo/Double-ring)
Set the F/T Ring Time (Pseudo/Double-ring)
When you set the Receive Mode to Fax/Tel Mode, if the call is a fax, your machine will automatically receive it.
However, if it is a voice call, the machine will sound the F/T ring (pseudo/double-ring) for the time you set in the
F/T Ring Time option. When you hear the F/T ring, it means that a voice caller is on the line.
The F/T Ring Time feature works when you set Fax/Tel Mode as the Receive Mode.
Because the F/T ring is made by the machine, extension and external telephones will not ring; however, you can
still answer the call on any telephone.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [F/T Ring Time].
2. Press how long you want the machine to ring to alert you that you have a voice call.
3. Press
.
Even if the caller hangs up during the pseudo/double-ringing, the machine will continue to ring for the set
time.
Related Information
• Receive Mode Settings
172
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set Easy Receive
Set Easy Receive
If Easy Receive is On: The machine can receive a fax automatically, even if you answer the call. When
you see [Receiving] on the LCD or hear a click on the phone line through the handset you are using,
just replace the handset. Your machine will do the rest.
If Easy Receive is Off: If you are at the machine and answer a fax call first by lifting the external handset,
press the buttons in the following table to receive the fax. If you answered at an extension telephone, press
*51.
Applicable Models
To receive the fax
MFC-L8395CDW Fax Start > Receive
• If this feature is set to [On], but your machine does not connect a fax call when you lift an extension
or external telephone handset, press the fax receive code *51.
• If you send faxes from a computer on the same telephone line and the machine intercepts them, set
Easy Receive to [Off].
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Easy Receive].
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Receive Mode Settings
173
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Shrink Page Size of an Oversized Incoming Fax
Shrink Page Size of an Oversized Incoming Fax
If you enable the auto reduction function, the machine reduces each page of an incoming fax to fit on your paper.
The machine calculates the reduction ratio by using the fax page size and your Paper Size setting.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Auto Reduction].
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Receive Mode Settings
174
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set the 2-sided Printing for Received Faxes
Set the 2-sided Printing for Received Faxes
Your machine prints received faxes on both sides of the paper when [2-sided] is set to [On].
• Use Letter, Legal, Folio (8.5 in. × 13 in.), Mexico Legal, or India Legal size paper for this function [16 to 28
lb (60 to 105 g/m
2
)].
• When 2-sided printing is enabled, incoming faxes are automatically reduced to fit the paper in the paper
tray.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [2-sided].
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Receive Mode Settings
175
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set the Fax Receive Stamp
Set the Fax Receive Stamp
You can set the machine to print the received date and time at the top center of each received fax page.
• Make sure you have set the current date and time on the machine.
• The received time and date will not appear when using Internet Fax.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Fax Rx Stamp].
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Receive Mode Settings
176
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Receive a Fax at the End of a Telephone
Conversation
Receive a Fax at the End of a Telephone Conversation
If you are speaking on the telephone connected to your machine and the other party is also speaking on a
telephone connected to his fax machine, at the end of the conversation, the other party can send you a fax
before you both hang up.
Your machine's ADF must be empty.
1. Ask the other party to place the document in their machine and to press Start or Send.
2. When you hear the CNG tones (slowly repeating beeps), press [Fax Start].
3. Press [Receive] to receive a fax.
4. Replace the external handset.
Related Information
• Receive Mode Settings
177
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options
Memory Receive Options
Use the Memory Receive options to direct incoming faxes while you are away from the machine. You can use
only one Memory Receive option at a time.
Memory Receive can be set to:
• PC-Fax Receive
• Fax Forwarding
• Fax Storage
• Forward to Cloud (The machine forwards your received faxes to online services.)
• Forward to Network (The machine forwards your received faxes to a network destination.)
• Off
• Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer Received Faxes to Your Computer (Windows only)
• Forward Incoming Faxes to Another Machine
• Store Incoming Faxes in the Machine's Memory
• Change Memory Receive Options
• Turn Off Memory Receive
• Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory
• Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination
178
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options > Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer Received
Faxes to Your Computer (Windows only)
Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer Received Faxes to Your Computer
(Windows only)
Turn on the PC-Fax Receive feature to automatically store incoming faxes to your machine's memory, and then
send them to your computer. Use your computer to view and store these faxes.
To transfer the received faxes to your computer you must have the PC-FAX Receiving software running on
your computer.
Even if you have turned off your computer (at night or on the weekend, for example), your machine will receive
and store your faxes in its memory.
When you start your computer and the PC-FAX Receiving software runs, your machine transfers your faxes to
your computer automatically.
If you selected [Backup Print: On], the machine will also print the fax.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [PC Fax Receive].
2. Press [On].
3. Press [OK], and then follow the instructions on the LCD.
• PC-Fax Receive is not available for macOS.
• If you get an error message and the machine cannot print the faxes in the memory, you can use this
setting to transfer your faxes to your computer.
4. Press [<USB>] or the name of the computer you want to receive faxes if you are on a network, and then
press [OK].
5. Press [Backup Print: On] or [Backup Print: Off].
6. Press
.
Related Information
• Memory Receive Options
179
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options > Forward Incoming Faxes to Another Machine
Forward Incoming Faxes to Another Machine
Use the Fax Forwarding feature to automatically forward your incoming faxes to another machine.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive].
2. Press [Fax Forward].
3. Do one of the following:
• Press [Manual] to enter the recipient's fax number (up to 20 digits) or email address using the LCD.
Press [OK].
To forward a fax using an email address, press , enter the email address, and press [OK].
Select the file type you want.
(On certain models, you must download Internet Fax to use the Internet Fax feature and the Scan to Email
server feature.)
• Press [Address Book].
Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll until you find the fax number or email address where you want
your faxes to be forwarded.
Press the fax number or email address you want.
Press [Backup Print: On] or [Backup Print: Off]. If you select [Backup Print: On], the
machine also prints a copy of received faxes at your machine.
4. Press .
Related Information
• Memory Receive Options
180
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options > Store Incoming Faxes in the Machine's Memory
Store Incoming Faxes in the Machine's Memory
Use the Fax Storage feature to store incoming faxes in the machine's memory. Retrieve your stored fax
messages from your fax machine when you are at another location using the Remote Retrieval commands. Your
machine will print a backup copy of each stored fax.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive].
2. Press [Fax Storage].
Press [Backup Print: On] or [Backup Print: Off]. If you select [Backup Print: On], the
machine also prints a copy of received faxes at your machine.
3. Press .
Related Information
• Memory Receive Options
181
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options > Change Memory Receive Options
Change Memory Receive Options
If received faxes are in your machine's memory when you change the Remote Fax operations, the LCD will ask
you one of the following questions:
If received faxes have been printed automatically, the LCD displays [Erase all faxes?]
• Do one of the following:
- If you press [Yes], faxes in the memory will be erased before the setting changes.
- If you press [No], faxes in the memory will not be erased and the setting will be unchanged.
If unprinted faxes are in the machine's memory, the LCD displays [Print all faxes?]
• Do one of the following:
- If you press [Yes], faxes in the memory will be printed before the setting changes.
- If you press [No], faxes in the memory will not be printed and the setting will be unchanged.
If received faxes are left in the machine’s memory when you change to [PC Fax Receive] from another
option ([Fax Forward], [Fax Storage], [Forward to Cloud], or [Forward to Network]).
• Press [<USB>] or the name of the computer if you are on a network, and then press [OK]. You will be asked
if you want to turn on Backup Print.
The LCD displays:
[Send Fax to PC?]
- If you press [Yes], faxes in the memory will be sent to your computer before the setting changes.
- If you press [No], faxes in the memory will not be erased and the setting will be unchanged.
Related Information
• Memory Receive Options
182
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options > Turn Off Memory Receive
Turn Off Memory Receive
Turn off Memory Receive if you do not want the machine to save or transfer incoming faxes.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive].
2. Press [Off].
The LCD displays options if there are received faxes still in your machine's memory.
3. Press .
Related Information
• Memory Receive Options
183
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options > Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory
Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory
If you select [Fax Storage], you can still print a fax from the machine's memory.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Print Fax].
2. Press [Yes].
Related Information
• Memory Receive Options
Related Topics:
• Error and Maintenance Messages
184
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval
Remote Fax Retrieval
Use Remote Retrieval to call your machine from any touch-tone telephone or fax machine, and use a remote
access code and remote commands to retrieve fax messages.
• Set a Remote Access Code
• Use Your Remote Access Code
• Remote Retrieval Commands
• Forward Faxes Remotely
• Change the Fax Forwarding Number
185
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Set a Remote Access Code
Set a Remote Access Code
Set a Remote Access Code to access and control your machine even when you are away from it.
Before you can use the remote access and retrieval features, you must set up your own code. The factory
default code is the inactive code (---*).
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Remote Access].
2. Enter a three-digit code using the numbers [0] to [9], [*] or [#] using the LCD (the preset '*' cannot be
changed), and then press [OK].
• DO NOT use the same code used for your Fax Receive Code (*51) or Telephone Answer Code (#51).
• To make your code inactive, press and hold to restore the inactive setting (---*), and then press
[OK].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Remote Fax Retrieval
186
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Use Your Remote Access Code
Use Your Remote Access Code
1. Dial your fax number from a telephone or another fax machine using touch tone.
2. When your machine answers, immediately enter your Remote Access Code (three digits followed by *).
3. The machine signals if it has received messages:
• One long beep -- Fax messages
• No beeps -- No messages
4. When the machine gives two short beeps, enter a command.
• The machine will hang up if you wait longer than 30 seconds to enter a command.
• The machine will beep three times if you enter an invalid command.
5. Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you are finished.
6. Hang up.
This function may not be available in some countries or supported by your local telephone company.
Related Information
• Remote Fax Retrieval
187
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Remote Retrieval Commands
Remote Retrieval Commands
Use the Remote Commands in this table to access fax commands and options when you are away from your
machine. When you call the machine and enter your remote access code (three digits followed by *), the system
will sound two short beeps and you must enter a Remote Command (column 1), followed by one of the options
(column 2) for that command.
Remote
Command
Option Description
95 Change the Fax Forwarding, or Fax
Storage settings
1 OFF You can select Off after you retrieve or erase all
your messages.
2 Fax Forwarding One long beep means the change is accepted. If
you hear three short beeps, you cannot make a
change because one of the settings may not be
configured correctly (for example, a Fax
Forwarding number has not been registered). You
can register your Fax Forwarding number by
entering 4. After you register the number, Fax
Forwarding will work.
4 Fax Forwarding number
6 Fax Storage
96 Retrieve a fax
2 Retrieve all faxes Enter the fax number of a remote fax machine to
receive stored fax messages.
3 Erase faxes from memory If you hear one long beep, fax messages have
been erased from memory.
97 Check the receiving status
1 Fax Check whether your machine has received any
faxes. If yes, you will hear one long beep. If not,
you will hear three short beeps.
98 Change the Receive Mode
1 External TAD One long beep means the change has been
accepted.
2 Fax/Tel
3 Fax Only
90 Exit Press 9 0 to stop remote retrieval. Wait for the long
beep, then hang up.
Related Information
• Remote Fax Retrieval
188
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Forward Faxes Remotely
Forward Faxes Remotely
Call your machine from any touch-tone telephone or fax machine to forward incoming faxes to another machine.
You must turn on Fax Storage to use this feature.
1. Dial your fax number.
2. When your machine answers, enter your Remote Access Code (three digits followed by *). If you hear one
long beep, you have messages.
3. When you hear two short beeps, press 9 6 2.
4. Wait for the long beep, and then use the dial pad to enter the number of the remote fax machine where you
want your fax messages sent, followed by # # (up to 20 digits).
You cannot use * and # as dial numbers. However, press # if you want to create a pause.
5. Hang up after you hear your machine beep. Your machine will call the other fax machine, which will then print
your fax messages.
Related Information
• Remote Fax Retrieval
189
Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Change the Fax Forwarding Number
Change the Fax Forwarding Number
You can change your fax forwarding number from another touch-tone telephone or fax machine.
1. Dial your fax number.
2. When your machine answers, enter your Remote Access Code (three digits followed by *). If you hear one
long beep, you have messages.
3. When you hear two short beeps, press 9 5 4.
4. Wait for the long beep, enter the new number (up to 20 digits) of the remote fax machine you want your fax
messages forwarded to using the dial pad, then enter # #.
You will hear one long beep.
You cannot use * and # as dial numbers. However, press # if you want to create a pause.
5. When you hear two short beeps, press 9 0 to stop Remote Access when you have finished.
6. Hang up after you hear your machine beep.
Related Information
• Remote Fax Retrieval
190
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Voice Operations > Send Tone Signals (For Canada)
Send Tone Signals (For Canada)
If you have a Pulse dialing service, but must send Tone signals (for example, for telephone banking), follow these
steps. If you have a Touch Tone service, you will not need this feature to send tone signals.
1. Press
[Fax].
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes].
2. Press [Hook].
3. Press # on the machine's LCD.
Any digits dialed after this will send tone signals.
When you are finished with the call, the machine will return to the Pulse dialing service.
Related Information
• Voice Operations
193
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Voice Operations > Pick up a Voice Call in Fax/Tel
Receive Mode
Pick up a Voice Call in Fax/Tel Receive Mode
When the machine is in Fax/Tel mode, it will use the F/T Ring (pseudo/double-ring) to alert you to pick up a voice
call.
If you are at the machine, lift the external telephone’s handset, and then press the button in the following table to
answer:
Applicable Models
To pick up a voice call
MFC-L8395CDW
Pickup
If you are at an extension telephone, lift the handset during the F/T Ring and then press #51 between the
pseudo/double rings. If no one is on the line, or if someone wants to send you a fax, send the call back to the
machine by pressing *51.
Related Information
• Voice Operations
194
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Voice Operations > Special Line
Considerations > Rollover Telephone Lines
Rollover Telephone Lines
A rollover telephone system is a group of two or more separate telephone lines that pass incoming calls to each
other if they are busy.
This feature is available only in the USA and Canada.
The calls are usually passed down or 'rolled over' to the next available telephone line in a preset order.
Your machine can work in a rollover system only if it is the last number in the sequence, so the call cannot roll
away. Do not place the machine on any of the other numbers; when the other lines are busy and a second fax
call is received, the fax call would be transferred to a line that does not have a fax machine. Your machine will
work best on a dedicated line.
Related Information
• Special Line Considerations
196
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Voice Operations > Special Line
Considerations > Two-Line Telephone System
Two-Line Telephone System
A two-line telephone system uses two separate telephone numbers on the same wall outlet.
This feature is available only in the USA and Canada.
The two telephone numbers can be on separate jacks (RJ11) or combined into one jack (RJ14). Your machine
must be plugged into an RJ11 jack. RJ11 and RJ14 jacks may be equal in size and appearance and both may
contain four wires (black, red, green, yellow). To test the type of jack, plug in a two-line telephone and see if it
can access both lines. If it can access both lines, you must separate the line for your machine.
Related Information
• Special Line Considerations
197
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Voice Operations > Special Line
Considerations > Convert Telephone Wall Outlets
Convert Telephone Wall Outlets
This feature is available only in the USA and Canada.
There are three ways to convert to an RJ11 jack. The first two ways may require assistance from the telephone
company. You can change the wall outlets from one RJ14 jack to two RJ11 jacks. Or, you can have an RJ11 wall
outlet installed and slave or jump one of the telephone numbers to it.
The third way is the easiest: Buy a triplex adapter. You can plug a triplex adapter into an RJ14 outlet. It separates
the wires into two separate RJ11 jacks (Line 1, Line 2) and a third RJ14 jack (Lines 1 and 2). If your machine is
on Line 1, plug the machine into L1 of the triplex adapter. If your machine is on Line 2, plug it into L2 of the triplex
adapter.
Triplex adapter
Related Information
• Special Line Considerations
198
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Voice Operations > Special Line
Considerations > Install Your Machine, an External Two-Line TAD and Two-Line Telephone
Install Your Machine, an External Two-Line TAD and Two-Line
Telephone
When you are installing an external two-line telephone answering device (TAD) and a two-line telephone, your
machine must be isolated on one line at both the wall jack and at the TAD.
• This feature is available only in the USA and Canada.
• The most common connection is to place the machine on Line 2, which is explained in the following steps.
The back of the two-line TAD must have two telephone jacks: one labeled L1 or L1/L2, and the other
labeled L2. You will need at least three telephone line cords, the one that came with your machine and two
for your external two-line TAD. You will need a fourth line cord if you add a two-line telephone.
1. Place the two-line TAD and the two-line telephone next to your machine.
2. Plug one end of the telephone line cord for your machine into the L2 jack of the triplex adapter. Plug the other
end into the LINE jack of the machine.
3. Plug one end of the first telephone line cord for your TAD into the L1 jack of the triplex adapter. Plug the other
end into the L1 or L1/L2 jack of the two-line TAD.
4. Plug one end of the second telephone line cord for your TAD into the L2 jack of the two-line TAD. Plug the
other end into the EXT. jack of the machine.
a
b
c
d
a. Triplex Adapter
b. Two Line Telephone
c. External Two Line TAD
d. Machine
You can keep two-line telephones on other wall outlets as always. There are ways to add a two-line telephone to
the machine's wall outlet. You can plug the telephone line cord from the two-line telephone into the L1+L2 jack of
the triplex adapter. Or, you can plug the two-line telephone into the TEL jack of the two-line TAD.
Related Information
• Special Line Considerations
199
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Store Fax Numbers > Store Address Book Numbers
Store Address Book Numbers
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book].
2. Do the following steps:
a. Press [Edit].
b. Press [Add New Address].
c. Press [Name].
d. Enter the name using the LCD (up to 16 characters), and then press [OK].
e. Press [Address].
f. Enter the fax or telephone number using the LCD (up to 20 digits), and then press [OK].
To store an email address to use with Internet Fax or Scan to Email server, press and enter the email
address and press [OK].
(On certain models, you must download Internet Fax to use the Internet Fax feature and the Scan to Email
server feature.)
g. Press [OK].
To store another Address Book number, repeat these steps.
3. Press .
Related Information
• Store Fax Numbers
• Save Outgoing Call Numbers to the Address Book
201
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Store Fax Numbers > Store Address Book
Numbers > Save Outgoing Call Numbers to the Address Book
Save Outgoing Call Numbers to the Address Book
You can copy numbers from your Outgoing Call history and save them in your Address Book.
1. Press [Fax] > [Call History] > [Outgoing Call].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want, and then press it.
3. Press [Edit] > [Add to Address Book] > [Name].
To delete the number, press [Edit] > [Delete]. Press [Yes] to confirm.
4. Enter the name using the LCD (up to 16 characters).
5. Press [OK].
6. Press [OK] to confirm the fax or telephone number you want to store.
7. Press
.
Related Information
• Store Address Book Numbers
202
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Store Fax Numbers > Change or Delete Address
Book Names or Numbers
Change or Delete Address Book Names or Numbers
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit].
2. Do one of the following:
Press [Change] to edit the names or fax or telephone numbers.
Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want to change, and then press it.
- To change the name, press [Name]. Enter the new name (up to 16 characters) using the LCD, and then
press [OK].
- To change the fax or telephone number, press [Address]. Enter the new fax or telephone number (up to
20 digits) using the LCD, and then press [OK].
Press [OK] to finish.
How to enter text:
To change a character, press d or c to position the cursor to highlight the incorrect character, and then
press .
Enter the new character.
To delete numbers, press [Delete].
Select the fax or telephone numbers you want to delete by pressing them to display a check mark, and then
press [OK].
3. Press
.
Related Information
• Store Fax Numbers
203
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Broadcasting Groups
Set up Broadcasting Groups
A broadcasting group can be stored in the Address Book. It allows you to send the same fax message to many
fax numbers.
Store fax numbers in the Address Book and add them to a broadcasting group as needed.
Applicable Models Maximum number of groups Maximum numbers in a group
MFC-L8395CDW 20 299
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book].
2. Do the following steps:
a. Press [Edit] > [Setup Groups] > [Name].
b. Enter the Group name (up to 16 characters) using the LCD, and then press [OK].
c. Press [Add/Delete].
d. Add Address Book numbers to the Group by pressing them to display a check mark, and then press
[OK].
e. Read and confirm the displayed list of names and numbers you have chosen, and then press [OK] to
save your Group.
To store another Group for broadcasting, repeat these steps.
3. Press
.
Related Information
• Voice Operations and Fax Numbers
• Change a Broadcasting Group Name
• Delete a Broadcasting Group
• Add or Delete a Broadcasting Group Member
204
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Broadcasting Groups > Change a
Broadcasting Group Name
Change a Broadcasting Group Name
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit] > [Change].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the Group you want, and then press the Group name.
3. Press [Name].
4. Enter the new Group name (up to 16 characters) using the LCD, and then press [OK].
How to change the stored name:
To change a character, press d or c to position the cursor to highlight the incorrect character, and then
press .
Enter the new character.
5. Press [OK].
6. Press
.
Related Information
• Set up Broadcasting Groups
205
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Broadcasting Groups > Delete a Broadcasting
Group
Delete a Broadcasting Group
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit] > [Delete].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the Group you want, and then press the Group name.
3. Press [OK].
4. Press .
Related Information
• Set up Broadcasting Groups
206
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Broadcasting Groups > Add or Delete a
Broadcasting Group Member
Add or Delete a Broadcasting Group Member
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit] > [Change].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the Group you want, and then press the Group name.
3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Add/Delete] option, and then press [Add/Delete].
4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want to add or delete.
5. Do the following for each number you want to change:
• To add a number to the Group, press the checkbox of the number to add a check mark.
• To delete a number from the Group, press the checkbox of the number to remove the check mark.
6. Press [OK].
7. Press [OK].
8. Press
.
Related Information
• Set up Broadcasting Groups
207
Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Dial Access Codes and Credit Card Numbers
Dial Access Codes and Credit Card Numbers
Sometimes you may want to choose from several long-distance carriers when you send a fax. Rates may vary
depending on the time and destination. To take advantage of low rates, you can store the access codes of long-
distance carriers and credit card numbers as Address Book numbers.
You can store these long dialing sequences by dividing them and setting them up as separate Address Book
numbers in any combination. You can even include manual dialing using the dial pad.
For example: You might have stored '555' and '7000' in your machine as shown in the following table.
Applicable Models
'555' stored in '7000' stored in
MFC-L8395CDW Address Book: Brother 1 Address Book: Brother 2
You can use them both to dial '555-7000' by using the following procedure.
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number of Brother 1.
3. Press the number.
4. Press [Apply].
5. Press
[Options].
6. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Address Book] option, and then press it.
7. Press [OK].
8. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number of Brother 2.
9. Press the number.
10. Press [Apply].
11. Press [Fax Start].
The machine will dial '555-7000'.
To temporarily change a number, you can substitute part of the number by pressing it using the LCD. For
example, to change the number to '555-7001', you could enter the number (Brother 1: 555) using the Address
Book, press [Apply], and then enter 7001 using the LCD.
If you must wait for another dial tone or signal at any point in the dialing sequence, create a pause in the
number by pressing [Pause].
Related Information
• Voice Operations and Fax Numbers
208
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Voice Mail
Voice Mail
This feature is available only in the USA and Canada.
If you have Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine, Voice Mail and the Brother machine
will conflict with each other when receiving incoming calls.
For example, if your Voice Mail is set to answer after four rings and your Brother machine is set to answer after
two rings, then your Brother machine will answer first. This will prevent callers from being able to leave a
message in your Voice Mail.
Similarly, if your Brother machine is set to answer after four rings and your Voice Mail is set to answer after two
rings, then your Voice Mail will answer first. This will prevent your Brother machine from being able to receive an
incoming fax, since Voice Mail cannot transfer the incoming fax back to the Brother machine.
To avoid conflicts between your Brother machine and your Voice Mail service, do one of the following:
• Get the Distinctive Ring service from your telephone company. Distinctive Ring is a feature of your Brother
machine that allows a person with one line to receive fax and voice calls through two different telephone
numbers on that one line.
Brother uses the term ’Distinctive Ring,’ but telephone companies market the service under a variety of
names, such as Custom Ringing, Personalized Ring, Smart Ring, Ident-A-Ring, Ident-A-Call, Data Ident-A-
Call, Teen Ring, and SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate Number Ringing. This service establishes a second
telephone number on the same line as your existing telephone number, and each number has its own ring
pattern. Typically, the original number rings with the standard ring pattern and is used for receiving voice
calls, and the second number rings with a different ring pattern and is used for receiving faxes.
• Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to "Manual". Manual Mode requires you answer every incoming
call if you want to be able to receive a fax. If the incoming call is a telephone call, then complete the call as
you normally would. If you hear fax sending tones you must transfer the call to the Brother machine.
Unanswered fax and voice calls will go to your Voice Mail.
Related Information
• Telephone Services and External Devices
Related Topics:
• Telephone and Fax Problems
210
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Distinctive Ring
Distinctive Ring
This feature is available only in the USA and Canada.
Distinctive Ring is a function of your Brother machine that allows a person with one line to receive fax and voice
calls through two different phone numbers on that one line. Brother uses the term "Distinctive Ring," but
telephone companies market the service under a variety of names, such as Custom Ringing, Personalized Ring,
Smart Ring, Ident-A-Ring, Ident-A-Call, Data Ident-A-Call, Teen Ring, and SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate Number
Ringing. This service establishes a second telephone number on the same line as your existing telephone
number, and each number has its own ring pattern. Typically, the original number rings with the standard ring
pattern and is used for receiving voice calls, and the second number rings with a different ring pattern and is
used for receiving faxes.
• You must pay for your telephone company’s Distinctive Ring service before you program the machine to
work with it.
• Contact your telephone company for availability and rates.
What does your telephone company’s ‘Distinctive Ring’ do?
Your telephone company’s Distinctive Ring service allows you to have more than one number on the same
telephone line. If you need more than one telephone number, it is cheaper than paying for an extra line.
Each telephone number has its own distinctive ring pattern, so you will know which telephone number is ringing.
This is one way to have a separate telephone number for your machine.
Contact your telephone company for availability and rates.
What does Brother’s ‘Distinctive Ring’ do?
The Brother machine has a Distinctive Ring feature that allows you to use your machine to take full advantage of
the telephone company’s Distinctive Ring service. The new telephone number on your line can only receive
faxes.
You must pay for your telephone company’s Distinctive Ring service before you program the machine to
work with it.
Do you have Voice Mail?
If you have Voice Mail on the telephone line where you will install your new machine, there is a strong possibility
that Voice Mail and the machine will conflict with each other while receiving incoming calls. However, the
Distinctive Ring feature allows you to use more than one number on your line, so both Voice Mail and the
machine can work together without any problems. If each one has a separate telephone number, neither will
interfere with the other’s operations.
If you decide to get the Distinctive Ring service from the telephone company, you must register the new
Distinctive Ring pattern they give you. This is so your machine can recognize its incoming calls.
You can change or cancel the Distinctive Ring pattern at any time. You can switch it off temporarily, and turn
it back on later. When you get a new fax number, make sure you reset this feature.
Before you choose the ring pattern to register
You can register only one Distinctive Ring pattern with the machine. Some ring patterns cannot be registered.
The ring patterns below are supported by your Brother machine. Register the one your telephone company gives
you.
Ring Pattern
Rings
1 short-short or long-long
211
Ring Pattern Rings
2 short-long-short
3 short-short-long
4 very long
• Ring Pattern #1 is often called Short-Short and is the most commonly used.
• If the ring pattern you received is not on this chart, contact your telephone company and ask for one
that is shown.
• The machine answers only calls to its registered number.
• The first two rings are silent on the machine. This is because the fax must <<listen>> to the ring pattern (to
compare it to the pattern that was ‘registered’). (Other telephones on the same line ring.)
• If you program the machine correctly, it recognizes the registered ring pattern of the ‘fax number’ within two
ring patterns and then answer with a fax tone. When the ‘voice number’ is called, the machine does not
answer.
Related Information
• Telephone Services and External Devices
• Register the Distinctive Ring Pattern
• Turn Off Distinctive Ring
Related Topics:
• Telephone and Fax Problems
212
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Distinctive Ring > Register the Distinctive Ring
Pattern
Register the Distinctive Ring Pattern
This feature is available only in the USA and Canada.
After you set the Distinctive Ring feature to [On], your Distinctive Ring number will receive faxes automatically.
The receive mode is automatically set to [Manual] and you cannot change it to another receive mode while
Distinctive Ring is set to [On]. This ensures the machine will only answer the Distinctive Ring number and not
interfere when your main telephone number is called.
When Distinctive Ring is on, the LCD displays [D/R] as the Receive Mode.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Miscellaneous] > [Distinctive].
2. Do one of the following:
• If you have not registered the Distinctive Ring pattern, press [Distinctive], and then press [On].
• If you have already registered the Distinctive Ring pattern, and want to change the pattern, proceed to
Ring Pattern setting.
3. Press [Ring Pattern].
4. Press the stored ring pattern you want, and then press [OK].
You will hear each pattern as you press the four buttons. Make sure you select the pattern that the telephone
company gave you.
5. Press .
Distinctive Ring is now set to [On].
If you do not want to receive faxes on your Distinctive Ring number, you can turn off Distinctive Ring. The
machine will stay in [Manual] receive mode so you must set the Receive Mode again.
Related Information
• Distinctive Ring
213
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Distinctive Ring > Turn Off Distinctive Ring
Turn Off Distinctive Ring
This feature is available only in the USA and Canada.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Miscellaneous] > [Distinctive] >
[Distinctive].
2. Press [Off].
3. Press .
If you turn off Distinctive Ring, the machine will stay in Manual Mode. You must set the Receive Mode again.
Related Information
• Distinctive Ring
214
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)
External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)
Connect an external Telephone Answering Device (TAD) to the same line as your machine. When the TAD
answers a call, your machine will “listen” for the CNG (fax calling) tones sent by a sending fax machine. If it hears
them it will take over the call and receive the fax. If it does not hear them, it will let your TAD take a voice
message and the LCD will show [Telephone].
The external TAD must answer within four rings (we recommend setting it to two rings). This is because your
machine cannot hear the CNG tones until the external TAD has picked up the call. The sending machine will
send CNG tones for only eight to ten seconds longer. We do not recommend using the toll saver feature on your
external TAD if it needs more than four rings to activate it.
Unless you are using Distinctive Ring, the TAD must be connected to the EXT. jack of the machine.
• If you subscribe to your telephone company’s Distinctive Ring service:
You may connect an external TAD to a separate wall jack only if you subscribe to your telephone company’s
Distinctive Ring service, have registered the distinctive ring pattern on your machine, and use that number as
a fax number. The recommended setting is at least four rings on the external TAD when you have the
telephone company’s Distinctive Ring service. You cannot use the Toll Saver setting.
• If You Do Not Subscribe to the Distinctive Ring Service:
You must plug your TAD into the EXT. jack of your machine. If your TAD is plugged into a wall jack, both your
machine and the TAD will try to control the telephone line. (See the illustration.)
1
1
1 TAD
2 Protective Cap
2
1
IMPORTANT
DO NOT connect a TAD elsewhere on the same telephone line.
If you have problems receiving faxes, reduce the Ring Delay setting on your external TAD.
Related Information
• Telephone Services and External Devices
• Connect an External TAD
• Record an Outgoing Message (OGM) on the External TAD
215
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External TAD (Telephone Answering
Device) > Connect an External TAD
Connect an External TAD
The external TAD must be plugged into the back of the machine, into the jack labeled EXT. Your machine cannot
work correctly if you plug the TAD into a wall jack (unless you are using Distinctive Ring).
1. Plug the telephone line cord from the telephone wall jack into the back of the machine, in the jack labeled
LINE.
2. Plug the telephone line cord from your external TAD into the back of the machine, in the jack labeled EXT.
(Make sure this cord is connected to the TAD at the TAD’s telephone line jack, and not its handset jack.)
3. Set your external TAD to the minimum number of rings allowed. For more information, contact your telephone
provider. (The machine’s Ring Delay setting does not apply.)
4. Record an outgoing message on your external TAD.
5. Set the TAD to answer calls.
6. Set the Receive Mode on your machine to [External TAD].
Related Information
• External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)
216
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External TAD (Telephone Answering
Device) > Record an Outgoing Message (OGM) on the External TAD
Record an Outgoing Message (OGM) on the External TAD
1. Record five seconds of silence at the beginning of your message. This allows your machine time to listen for
fax tones.
2. Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.
3. End your 20-second message by giving your Fax Receive Code for people sending manual faxes. For
example: “After the beep, leave a message or press *51 and Start to send a fax.”
NOTE
We recommend beginning your OGM with an initial five second silence because the machine cannot hear
fax tones over a loud voice. You may try leaving out this pause, but if your machine has trouble receiving
faxes, then you should re-record the OGM to include it.
Related Information
• External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)
217
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Connect
an External or Extension Telephone
Connect an External or Extension Telephone
You can connect a separate telephone to your machine as shown in the diagram below.
Connect the telephone line cord to the jack labeled EXT.
Before you connect an external telephone, remove the protective cap (3) from the EXT. jack on the machine.
1 TAD
2 Protective Cap
3
1 Extension telephone
2 External telephone
3 Protective Cap
1
1
1
2
1
Related Information
• External and Extension Telephones
219
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Operation
from External and Extension Telephones
Operation from External and Extension Telephones
Use extension telephones
If you answer a fax call at an extension telephone, you can make your machine receive the fax by pressing the
Fax Receive Code *51.
If the machine answers a voice call and pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you can take the call at an
extension telephone by pressing the Telephone Answer Code #51.
Use an external telephone (Connected to the EXT. jack of the machine)
If you answer a fax call at the external telephone connected to the EXT. jack of the machine, you can make the
machine receive the fax by pressing [Fax Start] or Start, and selecting [Receive] or b.
If the machine answers a voice call and pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you can take the call at the
external telephone by pressing [Pickup] or Hook.
If you answer a call and no one is on the line:
You are receiving a manual fax.
Press *51 and wait for the chirp or until the LCD displays [Receiving], and then hang up.
You can also use the Easy Receive feature to make your machine automatically take the call.
Related Information
• External and Extension Telephones
220
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > If You Use
a Non-Brother Cordless External Handset
If You Use a Non-Brother Cordless External Handset
If your non-Brother cordless telephone is connected to the EXT. jack of the machine and you typically carry the
cordless handset elsewhere, it is easier to answer calls during the Ring Delay.
If you let the machine answer first, you must go to the machine so you can press [Pickup] or Hook to transfer
the call to the cordless handset.
Related Information
• External and Extension Telephones
221
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Use the
Remote Codes
Use the Remote Codes
Fax Receive Code
If you answer a fax call on an extension telephone, you can tell your machine to receive it by pressing the Fax
Receive Code *51. Wait for the chirping sounds, and then replace the handset.
If you answer a fax call at the external telephone, you can make the machine receive it by pressing the buttons in
the following table:
Applicable Models
To make the machine receive a fax
MFC-L8395CDW Fax Start and then Receive
Telephone Answer Code
If you receive a voice call and the machine is in F/T mode, it will start to sound the F/T ring (pseudo/double-ring)
after the initial ring delay. If you pick up the call on an extension telephone you can turn the F/T ring off by
pressing #51 (make sure you press this between the rings).
If the machine answers a voice call and pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you can take the call at the
external telephone by pressing the button in the following table:
Applicable Models
To pick up a voice call
MFC-L8395CDW
Pickup
Related Information
• External and Extension Telephones
• Change the Remote Codes
222
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Use the
Remote Codes > Change the Remote Codes
Change the Remote Codes
The preset Fax Receive Code is *51. The preset Telephone Answer Code is #51. If you are always disconnected
when accessing your External TAD remotely, try changing the three-digit remote codes, for example to ### and
999.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Remote Codes].
2. Do one of the following:
• To change the Fax Receive Code, press [Fax Receive Code]. Enter the new code, and then press
[OK].
• To change the Telephone Answer Code, press [Tel Answer]. Enter the new code, and then press
[OK].
• If you do not want to change the Codes, go to the next step.
• To turn off (or turn on) the Remote Codes, press [Remote Codes], and then press [Off] (or [On]).
3. Press .
Related Information
• Use the Remote Codes
223
Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Multi-line Connections (PBX)
Multi-line Connections (PBX)
We suggest you ask the company that installed your PBX to connect your machine. If you have a multi-line
system we suggest you ask the installer to connect the unit to the last line on the system. This prevents the
machine from being activated each time the system receives telephone calls. If all incoming calls are answered
by a switchboard operator, we recommend setting the Receive Mode to [Manual].
We cannot guarantee that your machine will operate correctly under all circumstances when connected to a PBX.
Any difficulties with sending or receiving faxes should be reported first to the company that handles your PBX.
Related Information
• Telephone Services and External Devices
224
Home > Fax > Fax Reports > Print a Transmission Verification Report
Print a Transmission Verification Report
You can use the Transmission Verification Report as proof that you sent a fax. This report lists the receiving
party's name or fax number, the time and date of transmission, duration of transmission, number of pages sent,
and whether or not the transmission was successful.
There are several settings available for the Transmission Verification Report:
On
Prints a report after every fax you send.
On(+Image)
Prints a report after every fax you send.
A portion of the fax’s first page appears on the report.
Error only
Prints a report if your fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission error.
Error only(+Image)
Prints a report if your fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission error.
A portion of the fax’s first page appears on the report.
Off
Your machine does not print any reports after sending faxes.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Report Setting] > [Transmission].
2. Press the option you want.
If you select [On(+Image)] or [Error only(+Image)], the image will not appear on the Transmission
Verification Report if Real Time Transmission is set to [On].
3. Press
.
If the transmission is successful, OK appears next to RESULT on the Transmission Verification Report. If the
transmission is not successful, NG appears next to RESULT.
Related Information
• Fax Reports
226
Home > Fax > Fax Reports > Print a Fax Journal
Print a Fax Journal
You can set the machine to print a Fax Journal at specific intervals (every 50 faxes, 6, 12 or 24 hours, 2 or 7
days).
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Report Setting] > [Journal Period] >
[Journal Period].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select the interval you want, and then press it.
• Every 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days
The machine will print the report at the selected time and then erase all reception and transmission log
data from its memory. If the machine's memory becomes full with 200 log data before the time you
selected has passed, the machine will print the Journal early and then erase all jobs from the memory. If
you want an extra report before it is due to print, you can print it without erasing the log data from the
memory.
• Every 50 Faxes
The machine will print the Journal when the machine has stored 50 reception and transmission log data.
3. If you selected every 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days, do one of the following to enter the time to start printing:
• If you selected [12h Clock] as the format in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time (in 12-hour
format) using the LCD. Press
to select [AM] or [PM].
Press [OK].
• If you set [24h Clock] in the [Clock Type] setting, press [Time], and then enter the time (in 24-
hour format) using the LCD.
Press [OK].
(For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
4. If you selected [Every 7 Days], press [Day].
5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Every Monday], [Every Tuesday], [Every
Wednesday], [Every Thursday], [Every Friday], [Every Saturday] or [Every Sunday] option,
and then press the first day of the 7-day countdown.
6. Press
.
Related Information
• Fax Reports
227
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure PC-FAX
(Windows)
Configure PC-FAX (Windows)
Before sending faxes using PC-FAX, personalize the send options in each tab of the PC-FAX Setup dialog box.
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Setup Sending.
The PC-FAX Setup dialog box appears.
3. Do one of the following:
• Click the User Information tab, and then type your user information in the fields.
Each Microsoft account can have its own customized User Information screen for custom fax headers and
cover pages.
• Click the Sending tab, and then type the number needed to access an outside line (if needed) in the
Outside line access field. Select the Include header checkbox to include the header information.
• Click the Address Book tab, and then select the address book you want to use for PC-FAX from the
Select Address Book drop-down list.
4. Click OK.
Related Information
• PC-FAX Overview (Windows)
231
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax
Address Book (Windows)
Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
Add, edit, and delete members and groups to personalize your Address Book.
• Add a Member to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
• Create a Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
• Edit Member or Group Information in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
• Delete a Member or Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
• Export your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
• Import Information to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
232
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax
Address Book (Windows) > Add a Member to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Add a Member to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Add new people and their fax information to the PC-Fax Address Book if you want to send a fax using the
Brother PC-Fax software.
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
The Address Book dialog box appears.
3. Click to add new members.
The Address Book Member Setup dialog box appears.
4. Type the member's information in the corresponding fields. The Name field is required.
5. Click OK.
Related Information
• Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
233
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax
Address Book (Windows) > Create a Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Create a Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Create a group to broadcast the same PC-FAX to several recipients at once.
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
The Address Book dialog box appears.
3. Click
to add a new group.
The Address Book Group Setup dialog box appears.
4. Type the name of the new group in the Group Name field.
5. In the Available Names field, select each name you want to include in the group, and then click Add >>.
Members added to the group appear in the Group Members box.
6. When finished, click OK.
Each group can contain up to 50 members.
Related Information
• Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
234
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax
Address Book (Windows) > Edit Member or Group Information in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Edit Member or Group Information in your PC-FAX Address Book
(Windows)
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
The Address Book dialog box appears.
3. Select the member or group you want to edit.
4. Click
(Properties).
5. Change the member or group information.
6. Click OK.
Related Information
• Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
235
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax
Address Book (Windows) > Delete a Member or Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Delete a Member or Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
The Address Book dialog box appears.
3. Select the member or group you want to delete.
4. Click (Delete).
5. When the confirmation dialog box appears, click OK.
Related Information
• Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
236
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax
Address Book (Windows) > Export your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Export your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
You can export the Address Book as an ASCII text file (*.csv) or a vCard (an electronic business card) and save
it on your computer.
You cannot export the group settings when you export the Address Book data.
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
The Address Book dialog box appears.
3. Click File > Export.
4. Select one of the following:
• Text
The Select Items dialog box appears. Go to the next step.
• vCard
You must select the member you want to export from your address book before selecting this option.
Browse to the folder where you want to save the vCard, type the vCard name in the File name field,
and then click Save.
5. In the Available Items field, select the data you want to export, and then click Add >>.
Select and add the items in the order you want them listed.
6. If you are exporting to an ASCII file, under the Divide Character section, select the Tab or Comma option to
separate the data fields.
7. Click OK.
8. Browse to the folder on your computer where you want to save the data, type the file name, and then click
Save.
237
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax
Address Book (Windows) > Import Information to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Import Information to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
You can import ASCII text files (*.csv) or vCards (electronic business cards) into your Address Book.
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).
The Address Book dialog box appears.
3. Click
File > Import.
4. Select one of the following:
• Text
The Select Items dialog box appears. Go to step 5.
• vCard
Go to step 8.
5. In the Available Items field, select the data you want to import, and then click Add >>.
You must select and add fields from the Available Items list in the same order they are listed in the import
text file.
6. If you are importing an ASCII file, under the Divide Character section, select the Tab or Comma option to
separate the data fields.
7. Click OK.
8. Browse to the folder where you want to import the data, type the file name, and then click Open.
Related Information
• Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
239
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Send a Fax Using PC-FAX (Windows)
Send a Fax Using PC-FAX (Windows)
PC-FAX supports only black and white faxes. A black and white fax will be sent even if the original data is in
color and the receiving fax machine supports color faxes.
1. Create a file in any application on your computer.
2. Select the print command in your application.
3. Select Brother PC-FAX as your printer, and then complete your print operation.
The Brother PC-FAX dialog box appears.
4. Type a fax number using one of the following methods:
• Click the numbers on the dial pad to type the number, and then click Add Send Address.
If you select the Dial Restriction checkbox, a confirmation dialog box will appear for you to re-type the fax
number using the keyboard. This feature helps to prevent transmissions to the wrong destination.
• Click the Address Book button, and then select a member or group from the Address Book.
If you make a mistake, click All Clear to delete all entries.
5. To include a cover page, select the Add Cover Page checkbox. You can also click to create or edit a
cover page.
6. Click Start to send the fax.
• To cancel the fax, click Cancel.
• To redial a number, click Redial to show the last five fax numbers, select a number, and then click Start.
Related Information
• PC-FAX for Windows
240
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) > Receive
Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows)
Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows)
The Brother PC-FAX Receive software lets you view and store faxes on your computer. It is automatically
installed when you install your machine's software and drivers and works on locally or network-connected
machines.
PC-FAX Receive supports only black and white faxes.
When you turn off your computer, your machine will continue to receive and store faxes in your machine's
memory. The machine's LCD will display the number of stored faxes received. When you start this application,
the software will transfer all received faxes to your computer at once. You can enable the Backup Print option if
you want the machine to print a copy of the fax before the fax is sent to your computer, or before the computer is
switched off. You can configure the Backup Print settings from your machine.
Related Information
• Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows)
• Run the Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
• View Received PC-FAX Messages (Windows)
242
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) > Receive
Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) > Run the Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
Run the Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
If the PC-FAX receiving is disabled on your machine, enable the setting before trying to run the PC-FAX
receiving.
For information on how to enable this function, , see Related Information: Configure PC-FAX Receiving Using
Web Based Management.
We recommend selecting the Start PC-FAX Receive on computer startup checkbox so that the software
runs automatically and transfers any faxes when you turn on your computer.
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Receive.
3. Confirm the message and click Yes.
The PC-FAX Receive window appears. The
(PC-FAX Receive) icon also appears in your computer task
tray.
Related Information
• Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows)
• Set Up PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
Related Topics:
• Configure PC-FAX Receiving Using Web Based Management
243
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) > Receive
Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) > Run the Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer
(Windows) > Set Up PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
Set Up PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
1. Double-click the (PC-FAX Receive) icon in your computer task tray.
The PC-FAX Receive window appears.
2. Click Settings.
3. Configure these options as needed:
Preferences
Configure to start PC-FAX Receive automatically when you start Windows.
Save
Configure the path to save PC-FAX files and select the received document format.
Upload to
Configure the path to the server and select the option to upload automatically or manually (available only
for administrators).
Device
Select the machine where you want to receive PC-FAX files.
Lock (available only for administrators)
Restrict users who do not have administrator privileges from configuring the settings options shown above.
4. Click OK.
Related Information
• Run the Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
244
Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) > Receive
Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) > View Received PC-FAX Messages (Windows)
View Received PC-FAX Messages (Windows)
Receiving Status
Icon
Status
Standby mode
No unread messages
Receiving messages
Messages received
Unread messages
1. Double-click the (PC-FAX Receive) icon in your computer task tray.
The PC-FAX Receive window appears.
2. Click any faxes in the list to view them.
3. When finished, close the window.
Even after closing the window, PC-FAX Receive is active and the (PC-FAX Receive) icon will remain
in your computer task tray. To close PC-FAX Receive, click the icon in the computer task tray and click
Close.
245
Home > Network > Supported Basic Network Features
Supported Basic Network Features
The machine supports various features depending on the operating system. Use this table to see which network
features and connections are supported by each operating system.
Operating Systems Windows Windows Server macOS
Printing Yes Yes Yes
Scanning Yes Yes
PC Fax Send (available for
certain models)
Yes Yes
PC Fax Receive (available for
certain models)
Yes
Web Based Management
1
Yes Yes Yes
Status Monitor Yes
Driver Deployment Wizard Yes Yes
1
The default password to manage your machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". We recommend
immediately changing the default password to protect your machine from unauthorized access.
• When connecting your machine to an outside network such as the Internet, make sure your network
environment is protected by a separate firewall or other means in order to prevent information leaks due
to inadequate settings or unauthorized access by malicious third parties.
• When your machine is connected to the global network, a warning appears. When you see this warning,
we strongly recommend confirming your network settings, and then re-connecting to a secure network.
• Enabling your machine's global network communication filtering feature blocks access from the global
network. The global network communication filtering feature may prevent the machine from receiving
certain print or scan jobs from a computer or mobile device that uses a global IP address.
Related Information
• Network
Related Topics:
• Set or Change a Login Password for Web Based Management
249
Home > Network > Configure Network Settings > Configure Network Details Using the Control Panel
Configure Network Details Using the Control Panel
To configure the machine for your network, use the control panel's [Network] menu selections.
• For information about the network settings you can configure using the control panel, see Related
Information: Settings Tables.
• You can also use Web Based Management, to configure and change your machine's network settings.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the network option you want, and then press it. Repeat this step
until you access the menu you want to configure, and then follow the LCD instructions.
Related Information
• Configure Network Settings
Related Topics:
• Settings Tables
• Supported Basic Network Features
251
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network
Use the Wireless Network
• Before Configuring Your Machine for a Wireless Network
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Setup Wizard from Your
Computer
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel
Setup Wizard
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi
Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected
Setup
™
(WPS)
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
• Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network
253
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Before Configuring Your
Machine for a Wireless Network
Before Configuring Your Machine for a Wireless Network
Before attempting to configure a wireless network, confirm the following:
• If you are using an enterprise wireless network, you must know the User ID and Password.
• To achieve optimum results with normal everyday document printing, place your machine as close to the
wireless LAN access point/router as possible with minimal obstructions. Large objects and walls between the
two devices and interference from other electronic devices can affect the data transfer speed of your
documents.
Due to these factors, wireless may not be the best method of connection for all types of documents and
applications. If you are printing large files, such as multi-page documents with mixed text and large graphics,
you may want to consider selecting wired Ethernet for faster data transfer (supported models only), or USB
for the fastest throughput speed.
• Although your machine can be used in a wired and wireless network (supported models only), only one
connection method can be used at a time. However, a wireless network connection and Wi-Fi Direct
connection, or a wired network connection (supported models only) and Wi-Fi Direct connection can be used
at the same time.
• If there is a signal in the vicinity, wireless LAN allows you to freely make a LAN connection. However, if
security settings are not correctly configured, the signal may be intercepted by malicious third-parties,
possibly resulting in:
- Theft of personal or confidential information
- Improper transmission of information to parties impersonating the specified individuals
- Dissemination of transcribed communication contents that were intercepted
Make sure you know your wireless router/access point's Network Name (SSID) and Network Key
(Password). If you cannot find this information, consult the manufacturer of your wireless router/access
point, your system administrator, or Internet provider. Brother cannot provide this information.
Related Information
• Use the Wireless Network
254
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a
Wireless Network Using the Setup Wizard from Your Computer
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Setup Wizard
from Your Computer
1. Download the installer from your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
2. Start the installer, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Select Wireless Network Connection (Wi-Fi), and then click Next.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
You have completed the wireless network setup.
Related Information
• Use the Wireless Network
255
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a
Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's
Control Panel Setup Wizard
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need
this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and record the current wireless network settings of the computer to which you are connecting.
Network Name (SSID)
Network Key (Password)
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Network Key (Password)
12345
• Your access point/router may support the use of multiple WEP keys, but your Brother machine supports
the use of only the first WEP key.
• If you need assistance during setup and want to contact Brother Customer Service, make sure you
have your SSID (Network Name) and Network Key (Password) ready. We cannot assist you in locating
this information.
• If you do not know this information (SSID and Network Key), you cannot continue with the wireless
setup.
How can I find this information?
a. Check the documentation provided with your wireless access point/router.
b. The initial SSID could be the manufacturer's name or the model name.
c. If you do not know the security information, consult the router manufacturer, your system
administrator, or your Internet provider.
2. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [Find Wi-Fi
Network].
3. When [Switch Network interface to wireless?] appears, press [Yes].
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].
4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs.
If a list of SSIDs is displayed, swipe up or down or press a or b to display the SSID to which you want to
connect, and then press the SSID.
5. Press [OK].
6. Do one of the following:
• If you are using an authentication and encryption method that requires a Network Key, enter the Network
Key you wrote down in the first step.
When you have entered all the characters, press [OK].
• If your authentication method is Open System and your encryption mode is None, go to the next step.
7. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
256
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Press [OK], and
then press .
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating
your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
Related Information
• Use the Wireless Network
Related Topics:
• How to Enter Text on Your Machine
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
257
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a
Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push
Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
If your wireless access point/router supports WPS (PBC: Push Button Configuration), you can use WPS from
your machine's control panel menu to configure your wireless network settings.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [WPS/Push Button].
2. When [Switch Network interface to wireless?] appears, press [Yes].
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].
3. When the touchscreen displays [Start WPS on your wireless access point/router, then
press [OK].], press the WPS button on your wireless access point/router. Then press [OK] on your
machine. Your machine will automatically detect your wireless access point/router and try to connect to your
wireless network.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Press [OK], and
then press .
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers and software necessary to use your
machine, go to your model's Downloads page at
support.brother.com/downloads.
Related Information
• Use the Wireless Network
Related Topics:
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
258
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a
Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method
of Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
If your wireless LAN access point/router supports WPS, you can use the Personal Identification Number (PIN)
Method to configure your wireless network settings.
The PIN Method is one of the connection methods developed by the Wi-Fi Alliance
®
. By submitting a PIN
created by an Enrollee (your machine) to the Registrar (a device that manages the wireless LAN), you can set up
the wireless network and security settings. For more information on how to access WPS mode, see the
instructions provided with your wireless access point/router.
Type A
Connection when the wireless LAN access point/router (1) doubles as the Registrar:
1
Type B
Connection when another device (2), such as a computer, is used as the Registrar:
259
2
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [WPS/PIN Code].
2. When [Switch Network interface to wireless?] appears, press [Yes].
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].
3. The LCD displays an eight-digit PIN and the machine starts searching for a wireless LAN access point/router.
4. Using a computer connected to the network, in your browser's address bar, type the IP address of the device
you are using as the Registrar (for example: http://192.168.1.2).
5. Go to the WPS settings page and type the PIN, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
• The Registrar is usually the wireless LAN access point/router.
• The settings page may differ depending on the brand of wireless LAN access point/router. For more
information, see the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/router.
If you are using a Windows 10 or Windows 11 computer as a Registrar, complete the following steps:
6. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11
Click
> All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add
a device.
• Windows 10
Click
> Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add a device.
• To use a Windows 10 or Windows 11 computer as a Registrar, you must register it to your network in
advance. For more information, see the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/
router.
• If you use Windows 10 or Windows 11 as a Registrar, you can install the printer driver after the wireless
configuration by following the on-screen instructions. To install the driver and software necessary to use
your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
7. Select your machine and click Next.
8. Type the PIN displayed on the machine's LCD, and then click Next.
9. Click Close.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Press [OK], and
then press
.
260
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a
Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not
Broadcast
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need
this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and write down the current wireless network settings.
Network Name (SSID)
Authentication Method Encryption Mode Network Key
Open System NONE -
WEP
Shared Key WEP
WPA/WPA2-PSK AES
TKIP
WPA3-SAE AES
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Authentication Method Encryption Mode Network Key
WPA2-PSK AES 12345678
If your router uses WEP encryption, enter the key used as the first WEP key. Your Brother machine
supports the use of the first WEP key only.
2. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [Find Wi-Fi
Network].
3. When [Switch Network interface to wireless?] appears, press [Yes].
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].
4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. Swipe up or down or press a
or b to display [<New SSID>]. Press [<New SSID>], and then press [OK].
5. Enter the SSID name, and then press [OK].
6. Select the Authentication Method.
7. Do one of the following:
• If you selected the [Open System] option, press the Encryption type [None] or [WEP].
If you selected the [WEP] option for Encryption type, select and enter the WEP key, and then press [OK].
• If you selected the [Shared Key] option, select and enter the WEP key, and then press [OK].
• If you selected the [WPA/WPA2-PSK/WPA3-SAE] option, press the Encryption type [TKIP+AES] or
[AES].
Enter the WPA
™
key, and then press [OK].
• If you selected the [WPA3-SAE] option, press the Encryption type [AES].
Enter the WPA
™
key, and then press [OK].
262
Your Brother machine supports the use of the first WEP key only.
8. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Press [OK], and
then press .
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating
your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
Related Information
• Use the Wireless Network
Related Topics:
• I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration
• How to Enter Text on Your Machine
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
263
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for an
Enterprise Wireless Network
Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need
this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and record the current wireless network settings.
Network Name (SSID)
Authentication Method Encryption Mode User ID Password
EAP-FAST/NONE AES
TKIP
EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2 AES
TKIP
EAP-FAST/GTC AES
TKIP
PEAP/MS-CHAPv2 AES
TKIP
PEAP/GTC AES
TKIP
EAP-TTLS/CHAP AES
TKIP
EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAP AES
TKIP
EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAPv2 AES
TKIP
EAP-TTLS/PAP AES
TKIP
EAP-TLS AES -
TKIP -
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Authentication Method Encryption Mode User ID Password
EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2 AES Brother 12345678
264
• If you configure your machine using EAP-TLS authentication, you must install the client certificate
issued by a CA before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the client
certificate. If you have installed more than one certificate, we recommend writing down the certificate
name you want to use.
• If you verify your machine using the common name of the server certificate, we recommend writing
down the common name before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the
common name of the server certificate.
2. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [Find Wi-Fi
Network].
3. When [Switch Network interface to wireless?] appears, press [Yes].
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].
4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. Swipe up or down or press a
or b to display [<New SSID>]. Press [<New SSID>], and then press [OK].
5. Enter the SSID name, and then press [OK].
6. Select the Authentication Method.
7. Do one of the following:
• If you selected the [EAP-FAST], [PEAP] or [EAP-TTLS] option, select the Inner Authentication method
[NONE], [CHAP], [MS-CHAP], [MS-CHAPv2], [GTC] or [PAP].
Depending on your Authentication method, the Inner Authentication method selections may differ.
Select the encryption type [TKIP+AES] or [AES].
Select the verification method [No Verification], [CA] or [CA + Server ID].
- If you selected the [CA + Server ID] option, enter the server ID, user ID, and password (if
required), and then press [OK] for each option.
- For other selections, enter the user ID and Password (if required), and then press [OK] for each
option.
If you have not imported a CA certificate into your machine, the machine displays [No Verification].
• If you selected the [EAP-TLS] option, select the encryption type [TKIP+AES] or [AES].
The machine will display a list of available Client Certificates, and then select the certificate.
Select the verification method [No Verification], [CA] or [CA + Server ID].
- If you selected the [CA + Server ID] option, enter the server ID and user ID, and then press [OK]
for each option.
- For other selections, enter the user ID, and then press [OK].
8. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Press [OK], and
then press .
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating
your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
Related Information
• Use the Wireless Network
Related Topics:
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
265
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
> Wi-Fi Direct Overview
Wi-Fi Direct Overview
Wi-Fi Direct is one of the wireless configuration methods developed by the Wi-Fi Alliance
®
. It allows you to
securely connect your mobile device to your machine without using a wireless router/access point.
2
1
1. Mobile device
2. Your machine
• You can use Wi-Fi Direct with the wired or wireless network connection at the same time.
• The Wi-Fi Direct-supported device can become a Group Owner. When configuring the Wi-Fi Direct
network, the Group Owner serves as an access point.
Related Information
• Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
Related Topics:
• Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually
• Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the Push Button Method
267
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
> Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network
Manually
Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually
Configure the Wi-Fi Direct settings from the machine's control panel:
When the machine receives a Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Wi-Fi Direct
connection request received.Press [OK] to connect.] appears on the LCD. Press [OK] to
connect.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Manual].
2. The machine will display the SSID (Network Name) and Password (Network Key). Go to your mobile device's
wireless network settings screen, select the SSID, and then enter the password.
3. When your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].
Related Information
• Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
Related Topics:
• Wi-Fi Direct Overview
• Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the Push Button Method
268
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
> Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using
the Push Button Method
Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the Push Button Method
When the machine receives a Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Wi-Fi Direct
connection request received.Press [OK] to connect.] appears on the LCD. Press [OK] to
connect.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Push Button] on
your machine's LCD.
If your mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct, do the following:
a. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Group
Owner], and then press [On].
b. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select the [Push Button].
2. When the [Activate Wi-Fi Direct on other device. Then Press [OK].] message appears,
turn your mobile device‘s Wi-Fi Direct function on (for more information, see your mobile device’s user‘s
guide). Press [OK] on your machine.
3. Do one of the following:
• If your mobile device displays a list of machines with Wi-Fi Direct enabled, select your Brother machine.
• If your Brother machine displays a list of mobile devices with Wi-Fi Direct enabled, select your mobile
device. To search for available devices again press [Rescan].
4. When your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].
Related Information
• Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
Related Topics:
• Wi-Fi Direct Overview
• Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually
269
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Enable/Disable Wireless LAN
Enable/Disable Wireless LAN
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select the [WLAN Enable] option. Press [WLAN Enable].
3. Do one of the following:
• To enable Wi-Fi, select [On].
• To disable Wi-Fi, select [Off].
4. Press .
Related Information
• Wireless Network Settings
270
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Print the WLAN Report
Print the WLAN Report
The WLAN Report shows your machine's wireless status. If the wireless connection fails, check the error code on
the printed report.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] > [WLAN Report].
2. Press [Yes].
The machine will print the WLAN Report.
3. Press
.
If the WLAN Report does not print, check your machine for errors. If there are no visible errors, wait for one
minute and then try to print the report again.
Related Information
• Wireless Network Settings
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
Related Topics:
• My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network
• I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
271
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Print the WLAN Report > Wireless LAN Report Error
Codes
Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
If the Wireless LAN Report shows that the connection failed, check the error code on the printed report and see
the corresponding instructions in the table:
Error Code
Problem and Recommended Solutions
TS-01 The WLAN (Wi-Fi) is not enabled.
Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again:
• Enable the WLAN setting on your machine.
• If a network cable is connected to your machine, disconnect it.
TS-02 The wireless router/access point cannot be detected.
Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again:
• Make sure the wireless router/access point is on.
• Temporarily place your machine closer to the wireless router/access point when you are
configuring the wireless settings.
• If your wireless router/access point is using MAC address filtering, confirm that the MAC
address of the machine is allowed in the filter. You can find the MAC address by printing the
Network Configuration Report.
• If you manually entered the Network Name (SSID) and security information (authentication
method/encryption method), the information may be incorrect. Check the Network Name and
security information again and re-enter the correct information.
• Restart your wireless router/access point. If you cannot find the Network Name (SSID) and
security information, see the documentation provided with your wireless router/access point,
or contact the router manufacturer, your system administrator, or Internet service provider.
TS-03
The wireless enterprise network and security settings you entered may be incorrect.
Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again:
Verify the following information:
- Network Name (SSID) you selected to configure your machine.
- Security information you selected to configure your machine (such as the authentication
method, encryption method, or User ID).
If you still cannot find the Network Name (SSID) and security information, see the
documentation provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router
manufacturer, your system administrator, or Internet service provider.
TS-04
Your machine does not support the authentication and encryption methods used by the selected
wireless router/access point.
For infrastructure mode (Most common)
Change the authentication and encryption methods of the wireless router/access point. Your
machine supports the following authentication and encryption methods:
• WPA-Personal:
TKIP / AES
• WPA2-Personal:
TKIP / AES
• WPA3-Personal:
AES
• OPEN:
WEP / NONE (without encryption)
• Shared key:
WEP
If your issue is not solved, the Network Name (SSID) or security settings you entered may be
incorrect. Check that all wireless network settings are correct for your network.
272
Error Code Problem and Recommended Solutions
TS-05 The Network Name (SSID) and Network Key (Password) are incorrect.
Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again:
• Confirm the Network Name (SSID) and Network Key (Password).
• If your Network Key contains upper-case and lower-case letters, make sure you type them
correctly.
• If you cannot find the Network Name (SSID) and security information, see the documentation
provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router manufacturer, your
system administrator, or Internet service provider.
• If your wireless router/access point uses WEP encryption with multiple WEP keys, write
down and use only the first WEP key.
TS-06
The wireless security information (authentication method/encryption method/Network Key
(Password)) is incorrect.
Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again:
• Confirm the Network Key. If your Network Key contains upper-case and lower-case letters,
make sure you type them correctly.
• Confirm whether the authentication method entered and the authentication method or
encryption method supported by the wireless router/access point are the same.
• If the network key, authentication method, and encryption method have been confirmed,
restart your wireless router/access point and the machine.
• If your wireless router/access point's Stealth Mode is on, you may need to disable it to
connect to the wireless network.
If you cannot find the Network Name (SSID) and security information, see the documentation
provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router manufacturer, your system
administrator, or Internet service provider.
TS-07
The machine cannot detect a wireless router/access point that has WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
enabled.
Check the following points and try again:
• To check if your wireless router/access point supports WPS, look for the WPS symbol
displayed on the router/access point. For more information, see the documentation provided
with your wireless router/access point.
• To set up your wireless connection using WPS, you must configure both your machine and
the wireless router/access point. For more information, see the user's guide.
• If you do not know how to set up your wireless router/access point using WPS, see the
documentation provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router
manufacturer, your system administrator, or Internet service provider.
TS-08
Two or more wireless routers or access points that have WPS enabled are detected.
Check the following points and try again:
• Make sure that only one wireless router/access point within range has WPS enabled, and
then try to connect again.
• Try to connect again after a few minutes to avoid interference from other access points/
routers.
273
How to confirm wireless security information (SSID/authentication method/encryption method/Network Key)
of your WLAN access point/router:
1. The default security settings may be provided on a label attached to the WLAN access point/router. Or
the manufacturer's name or model number of the WLAN access point/router may be used as the default
security settings.
2. See the documentation provided with your WLAN access point/router for information on how to find the
security settings.
• If the WLAN access point/router is set to not broadcast the SSID, the SSID will not automatically be
detected. You will have to manually enter the SSID name.
• The Network Key may also be described as the Password, Security Key, or Encryption Key.
If you do not know the SSID and wireless security settings of your WLAN access point/router or how to
change the configuration, see the documentation provided with your WLAN access point/router, ask the
manufacturer of your access point/router or ask your Internet provider or network administrator.
Related Information
• Print the WLAN Report
Related Topics:
• My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network
• I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS)
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
• Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network
274
Home > Network > Network Features
Network Features
• Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel
• Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management
• Print the Network Configuration Report
• Configure PC-FAX Receiving Using Web Based Management
• Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
• Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
• Configure and Operate LDAP Search
• Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
• Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination
• Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)
• Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings
275
Home > Network > Network Features > Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel
Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Web Based Mgmt].
2. Press to select the option you want.
If you enable this function, make sure you specify the connection method to use Web Based Management.
Related Information
• Network Features
Related Topics:
• Print an Email Attachment
276
Home > Network > Network Features > Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based
Management
Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management
If your network uses a proxy server, the following proxy server information must be configured using Web
Based Management:
• Proxy server address
• Port number
• User Name
• Password
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Make sure the Proxy checkbox is selected, and then click Submit.
6. In the Proxy field, click Advanced Settings.
7. Enter the proxy server information.
8. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Network Features
Related Topics:
• Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel
• Access Web Based Management
277
Home > Network > Network Features > Print the Network Configuration Report
Print the Network Configuration Report
The Network Configuration Report lists the network configuration, including the network print server settings.
• The Node Name appears on the Network Configuration Report. The default Node Name is
"BRN123456abcdef" for a wired network or "BRW123456abcdef" for a wireless network (where
"123456abcdef" is your machine's MAC Address / Ethernet Address.)
• If the IP Address on the Network Configuration Report shows 0.0.0.0, wait for one minute and try
printing it again.
• You can find your machine's settings, such as the IP address, subnet mask, node name, and MAC
Address on the report, for example:
- IP address: 192.168.0.5
- Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
- Node name: BRN000ca0000499
- MAC Address: 00-0c-a0-00-04-99
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] > [Network Configuration].
2. Press [Yes].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Network Features
Related Topics:
• Check Your Machine's Network Settings
• Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
• I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
• Access Web Based Management
• Error Messages
• If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
• Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management
278
Home > Network > Network Features > Configure PC-FAX Receiving Using Web Based Management
Configure PC-FAX Receiving Using Web Based Management
Use Web Based Management to configure your PC Fax Receiving in a web browser.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the PC Fax Receive checkbox, and then click Submit.
6. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
Related Information
• Network Features
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
279
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
With Internet Fax (I-Fax), you can send and receive fax documents using the Internet. Documents are
transmitted in email messages as attached TIFF-F files. Your computer can send and receive documents as long
as it has an application that can create and view TIFF-F files. You can use any TIFF-F viewer application.
Documents sent via the machine will be converted into a TIFF‑F format automatically. To send and receive
messages to and from your machine, your computer's email application must support Multipurpose Internet Mail
Extensions (MIME).
2
4
4
4
3
3
1
1. Sender
2. Internet
3. Receiver
4. Email server
I-Fax supports sending and receiving documents in Letter or A4 format and in black and white only.
Related Information
• Network Features
• Important Information about Internet Fax (I-Fax)
• Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
• Send an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
• Poll the Server Manually
• I-Fax Options
Related Topics:
• Forward Received Email and Fax Messages
280
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Important Information about
Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Important Information about Internet Fax (I-Fax)
I-Fax communication on a LAN is very similar to communication via email; however, it is different from fax
communication using standard phone lines. Make sure you read the following information about using I-Fax:
• Factors such as the receiver's location, structure of the LAN and how busy the circuit (such as the Internet) is
may cause the system to take longer than usual to send an error mail.
• When sending confidential documents, we recommend using standard phone lines instead of the Internet
(due to its low level of security).
• If the receiver's mail system is not MIME-compatible, you cannot use I-Fax to send documents. If possible,
check this in advance, and note that some servers will not send an error reply.
• If a document is too large to send via I-Fax, it may not reach the receiver.
• You cannot change the font or size of the text in any Internet mail you receive.
Related Information
• Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
281
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Configure the Brother Machine for
Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Before using I-Fax, configure your Brother machine to communicate with your network and mail server. You can
configure these items using the machine's control panel or Web Based Management. Make sure the following
items are configured on your machine:
• IP address (If you are already using your machine on your network, the machine's IP address has been
configured correctly.)
• Email address
• SMTP, POP3, IMAP4 server address/port/Authentication method/Encryption method/Server Certificate
Verification
• Mailbox name and password
If you are unsure of any of these items, contact your system administrator.
Related Information
• Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
• Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
• How Received I-Faxes Appear on a Computer
Related Topics:
• I-Fax Options
282
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Configure the Brother Machine for
Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) > Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Before sending your I-Fax, use the control panel or Web Based Management to configure the following
optional items:
• E-mail Subject
• E-mail Message
• Size Limit
• Request Delivery Notification (Send)
If you are unsure of any of these items, contact your system administrator.
Related Information
• Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
• How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
283
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Configure the Brother Machine for
Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) > Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) > How Your Brother Machine
Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
When your Brother machine receives an incoming I-Fax, it will print the I-Fax automatically. To receive an I-
Fax, we recommend using the control panel or Web Based Management to configure the following optional
items:
• Auto Polling
• Polling Frequency
• Print Mail Header
• Delete/Read Receive Error Mail
• Send Delivery Notification (Receive)
There are two ways you can receive email messages:
• POP3/IMAP4 receiving at regular intervals
• POP3/IMAP4 receiving, manually initiated
285
When using POP3/IMAP4 receiving, the machine polls your email server to receive data. Polling can occur at set
intervals (for example, you can configure the machine to poll the email server every ten minutes) or you can
manually poll the server.
• If your machine starts to receive email data, the LCD displays [Receiving].The email will be printed
automatically.
• If your machine is out of paper when receiving data, the received data will be held in the machine's
memory. This data will be printed automatically after paper is reloaded in the paper tray.
• When the machine's Temporary Fax Backup Function is turned on, received data will be stored for a
certain period of time.
• If the received mail is not in a plain text format, or an attached file is not in the TIFF-F format, the error
message "ATTACHED FILE FORMAT NOT SUPPORTED." will be printed.
• If the received mail is too large, the error message "E-MAIL FILE TOO LARGE." will be printed.
• If Delete/Read Receive Error Mail is On (default), then the error mail will be deleted from the email
server automatically.
Related Information
• Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Related Topics:
• How Received I-Faxes Appear on a Computer
• Forward Received Email and Fax Messages
286
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Configure the Brother Machine for
Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) > How Received I-Faxes Appear on a Computer
How Received I-Faxes Appear on a Computer
When a computer receives an I-Fax document, the document is attached to an email message that notifies you
in its Subject field that your email server has received an I-Fax. You can either wait for your Brother machine to
poll the email server, or you can manually poll the email server to receive the incoming data.
Related Information
• Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Related Topics:
• How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
287
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Send an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Send an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Sending an I-Fax is like sending a normal fax. Make sure that your recipient's information is saved in your email
address book, and load the document you want to I-Fax into your Brother machine.
• If the computer to which you want to send a document is not running Windows Server 2012/2012
R2/2016/2019/2022, Windows 10 or Windows 11, ask the computer's owner to install software that can
view TIFF files.
• To send multiple pages, use the ADF.
1. Load your document.
2. Do one of the following:
• If the Fax Preview option is set to [Off], press [Fax].
• If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax], and then press [Sending Faxes].
3. To change the fax-sending settings, press [Options].
4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll through the fax settings. When the setting you want appears, press
it and select your preference. When you have finished changing settings, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is
displayed.)
5. Do one of the following:
• Press
, enter the email address using the touchscreen, and then press [OK].
• Press [Address Book], select the email address of your recipient, and then press [Apply].
6. Press [Fax Start].
The machine starts scanning. After the document is scanned, it is transmitted to the recipient via your SMTP
server. You can cancel the send operation by pressing
during scanning.
7. Press .
Related Information
• Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
288
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Poll the Server Manually
Poll the Server Manually
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [E-mail/IFAX] > [Manual Receive].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Yes] to confirm.
3. The LCD displays [Receiving] and your machine will print the data from the email server.
Related Information
• Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
289
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Forward Received
Email and Fax Messages
Forward Received Email and Fax Messages
Use Brother's I-Fax feature to forward email or standard fax messages to another computer, to a fax machine, or
to another I-Fax machine. Enable the Forwarding feature using your machine's control panel.
To enable email forwarding using your machine's control panel:
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive] >
[Fax Forward].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Do one of the following:
• Press [Manual] to enter the recipient's fax number (up to 20 digits) or email address using the LCD.
Press [OK].
• Press [Address Book].
Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll until you find the fax number or email address where you want
your faxes to be forwarded.
Press the fax number or email address you want.
3. If you select the email address, select the file type you want.
Press [Backup Print: On] to print received faxes at your machine so you will have a copy.
4. Press .
Related Information
• I-Fax Options
Related Topics:
• Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
• Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
• How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
291
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Relay Broadcast
Relay Broadcast
A Relay Broadcast is when your Brother machine receives a message over the Internet and then relays it to
another fax machine using conventional telephone lines. If you must fax a document over a long distance or
abroad, use the Relay Broadcast Function to save the communication fee.
2
33
1
1. The Internet
2. Telephone line
3. Email server
Use the Brother machine's control panel or Web Based Management to configure the following items:
• Relay Broadcast Function
Set the Relay Broadcast Function to On.
• Relay Domain
Configure your machine's domain name on the machine that will broadcast the document to the conventional
fax machine. If you wish to use your machine as a relay broadcast device, you must specify the trusted
domain name (the portion of the name after the "@" sign) at the machine. Use care in selecting a trusted
domain: any user on a trusted domain will be able to send a relay broadcast. You can register up to ten
domain names.
• Relay Broadcast Report
Specify whether or not you want a report to print after the machine completes the relay broadcast.
292
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Relay
Broadcast > Relay Broadcast from Your Brother Machine
Relay Broadcast from Your Brother Machine
Use the Relay Broadcast Function to send an email from your machine to a conventional fax machine.
Confirm the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes are selected in Web Based
Management. If the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes are not selected, select the
POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes. Click Submit, and then restart your machine.
FAX@brother.com UKFAX@brother.co.uk 123456789
1
UKFAX@brother.co.uk(fax#123456789)
r
1. The Internet
In this example, your machine's email address is FAX@brother.com and you want to send a document from your
machine to a standard fax machine in England with the email address UKFAX@brother.co.uk, and you want your
machine to send the document using a conventional telephone line.
1. Load your document.
2. Do one of the following:
• If the Fax Preview option is set to [Off], press [Fax].
• If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax], and then press [Sending Faxes].
3. Press [Options].
4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Broadcasting] option.
5. Press [Broadcasting].
6. Press [Add Number].
7. You can add email addresses to the broadcast in the following ways:
• Press [Add Number] and press , enter the email address and press [OK].
• Press [Add from Address book]. Press the checkbox of the email address you want to add to the
broadcast. After you have selected all the email addresses you want, press [OK].
• Press [Search in Address book]. Enter the name or the first letter of the name and press [OK].
The search results will be displayed. Press the name and then press the email address you want to add
to the broadcast.
The following is an example of how to enter the email address and phone number:
294
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Relay
Broadcast > Relay Broadcast from Your Computer
Relay Broadcast from Your Computer
Use the Relay Broadcast Function to send an email from your computer to a conventional fax machine.
• Some email applications do not support sending an email to multiple fax numbers. If your email application
cannot support multiple fax numbers, you can relay to only one fax machine at a time.
1
UKFAX@brother.co.uk 123456789
UKFAX@brother.co.uk(fax#123456789)
1. The Internet
• Confirm the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes are selected in Web Based
Management. If the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes are not selected, select the
POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes. Click Submit, and then restart your machine.
If you are sending an email to a conventional fax machine, the method of entering the fax machine's fax number
will vary, depending on the mail application you are using.
1. In your email application, create a new email message and type the email address of the relay machine and
fax number of the first fax machine in the "TO" box.
The following is an example of how to enter the email address and fax number:
UKFAX@brother.co.uk(fax#123456789)
email address
Fax Phone Number
The word "fax#" must be
included with the phone
number inside the parenthesis.
For Microsoft Outlook, the address information must be entered into the address book as follows:
Name: fax#123456789
Email address: UKFAX@brother.co.uk
2. Type the email address of the relay machine and fax number of the second fax machine in the "TO" box.
3. Send the email.
Related Information
• Relay Broadcast
296
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Internet Fax (I-
Fax) Verification Mail
Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail
• Verification Mail for sending allows you to request notification from the receiving station where your I-Fax or
email was received and processed.
• Verification Mail for receiving allows you to transmit a default report back to the sending station after
successfully receiving and processing an I-Fax or email.
To use this feature, set the [Notification] options in the [Setup Mail RX] and [Setup Mail TX]
options of your machine's control panel menu.
Related Information
• I-Fax Options
• Enable Send Notifications for TX Verification Mail
• Enable Receive Notification for TX Verification Mail
• I-Fax Error Mail
297
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Internet Fax (I-
Fax) Verification Mail > Enable Send Notifications for TX Verification Mail
Enable Send Notifications for TX Verification Mail
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [E-mail/IFAX] > [Setup Mail TX] >
[Notification].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Select [On] or [Off] to enable or disable the Send Notification feature.
When Send Notification is On, the fax includes an additional field, named Message Disposition Notification
(MDN), that contains message delivery information. By default, Send Notification is set to Off.
Your fax recipient's machine must support the MDN field in order to send a notification report.
3. Press .
Related Information
• Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail
298
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Internet Fax (I-
Fax) Verification Mail > Enable Receive Notification for TX Verification Mail
Enable Receive Notification for TX Verification Mail
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [E-mail/IFAX] > [Setup Mail RX] >
[Notification].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press one of the three possible settings:
Option Description
Receive
Notification On
When Receive Notification is set to On, a template is sent back to the sender to
indicate successful receipt and processing of the message.
These templates depend on the operation requested by the sender.
Example:
SUCCESS : Received From <Mail Address>
Receive
Notification MDN
When Receive Notification is set to MDN, a report to indicate successful receipt and
processing is sent back to the sender if the originating station sent a request
confirmation to the MDN (Message Disposition Notification) field.
Receive
Notification Off
When Receive Notification is set to Off, all forms of receipt notification are disabled
and no message is sent back to the sender regardless of the request.
• To send TX Verification Mail, the Sender must configure these settings:
- Switch [Notification] in [Setup Mail TX] to [On].
- Switch [Header] in [Setup Mail RX] to [All] or [Subject+From+To].
• To receive TX Verification Mail, the Receiver must configure these settings:
Switch [Notification] in [Setup Mail RX] to [On].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail
299
Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Internet Fax (I-
Fax) Verification Mail > I-Fax Error Mail
I-Fax Error Mail
If there is a delivery error while sending an I-Fax, the mail server will send an error message back to the Brother
machine and the error message will be printed.
If there is an error while receiving an I-Fax, an error message will be printed, for example, "The message being
sent to the machine was not in a TIFF format."
To receive the error mail and have these printed on your machine, in [Setup Mail RX], switch the [Header]
option to [All] or to [Subject+From+To].
Related Information
• Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail
300
Home > Network > Network Features > Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
The Fax to Server feature allows the machine to scan a document and send it over the network to a separate fax
server. The document will then be sent from the server as fax data to the destination fax number over standard
phone lines. When the Fax to Server feature is set to On, all automatic fax transmissions from the machine will
be sent to the fax server for fax transmission.
You can send a fax directly from the machine using the manual fax feature when the Send to Server feature is
on.
Related Information
• Network Features
• Before Sending a Fax to the Fax Server
• Enable Fax to Server
• Operate Fax to Server
301
Home > Network > Network Features > Use the Send Fax to Server Feature > Before Sending a Fax to the
Fax Server
Before Sending a Fax to the Fax Server
To send a document to the fax server, the correct syntax for that server must be used. The destination fax
number must be sent with a prefix and a suffix that match the parameters used by the fax server. In most cases,
the syntax for the prefix is “fax=” and the syntax for the suffix would be the domain name of the fax server email
gateway. The suffix must also include the “@” symbol at the beginning of the suffix. The prefix and the suffix
information must be stored in the machine before you can use the Fax to Server function. Destination fax
numbers can be saved in the address book or entered using the dial pad (up to 40-digit numbers). For example:
if you wanted to send a document to a destination fax number of 123-555-0001, use the following syntax:
Your fax server application must support an email gateway.
Related Information
• Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
302
Home > Network > Network Features > Use the Send Fax to Server Feature > Enable Fax to Server
Enable Fax to Server
Store the prefix/suffix address for the fax server in your Brother machine.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Fax to Server].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Fax to Server].
3. Press [On].
4. Press [Prefix].
5. Enter the prefix using the touchscreen, and then press [OK].
6. Press [Suffix].
7. Enter the suffix using the touchscreen, and then press [OK].
8. Press
.
Related Information
• Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
303
Home > Network > Network Features > Use the Send Fax to Server Feature > Operate Fax to Server
Operate Fax to Server
1. Place the document in the ADF or on the scanner glass.
2. Do one of the following:
• If the Fax Preview option is set to [Off], press [Fax].
• If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax], and then press [Sending Faxes].
3. Enter the fax number.
4. Press [Fax Start].
The machine will send the message over a TCP/IP network to the fax server.
Related Information
• Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
304
Home > Network > Network Features > Configure and Operate LDAP Search
Configure and Operate LDAP Search
The LDAP feature allows you to search for information, such as fax numbers and email addresses, on your
server. When you use the Fax, I-Fax, or Scan to Email server feature, you can use the LDAP search to find fax
numbers or email addresses.
• The LDAP feature does not support simplified Chinese, traditional Chinese, or Korean.
• The LDAP feature supports LDAPv3.
Related Information
• Network Features
• Change LDAP Configuration Using Web Based Management
• Perform an LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel
305
Home > Network > Network Features > Configure and Operate LDAP Search > Change LDAP
Configuration Using Web Based Management
Change LDAP Configuration Using Web Based Management
Use Web Based Management to configure your LDAP settings in a web browser.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the LDAP checkbox, and then click Submit.
6. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
7. On your computer, in Web Based Management, go to the navigation menu, and then click Address Book >
LDAP.
• LDAP Search
• LDAP Server Address
• SSL/TLS
• Port (The default port number is 389.)
• Authentication
• Username
This selection will be available depending on the authentication method used.
• Password
This selection will be available depending on the authentication method used.
- If the LDAP server supports Kerberos authentication, we recommend selecting Kerberos for the
Authentication settings. It provides strong authentication between the LDAP server and your machine.
- You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server), or you must set the date, time and time
zone correctly on the control panel for Kerberos authentication.
• Kerberos Server Address
This selection will be available depending on the authentication method used.
• Search Root
• Timeout for LDAP
• Attribute of Name (Search Key)
• Attribute of E-mail
• Attribute of Fax Number
8. When finished, click Submit. Make sure the Status field reads OK.
Related Information
• Configure and Operate LDAP Search
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
306
Home > Network > Network Features > Configure and Operate LDAP Search > Perform an LDAP Search
Using Your Machine's Control Panel
Perform an LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel
When you have configured LDAP settings, you can use the LDAP search feature to find fax numbers or email
addresses to use for:
• Sending a Fax (not available for DCP models)
• Sending an Internet Fax (I-Fax) (not available for DCP models)
• Scanning to Email Server
• The LDAP feature supports LDAPv3.
• You may need to use Kerberos Authentication or Simple Authentication to connect to your LDAP server,
depending on the security policy set by your network administrator.
• You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server), or you must set the date, time and time
zone correctly on the control panel for Kerberos authentication.
1. Press to search.
2. Enter the initial characters for your search using the LCD.
3. Press [OK].
The LDAP search result will be shown on the LCD; the icon appears before the fax number (local) or
the email (local) address book search results.
If there is no match on the server or in the local address book, the LCD displays [Results cannot be
found.] for about 60 seconds.
4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the name you want.
5. Press the name.
To view the details of the name, press [Detail].
6. If the result includes more than one fax number or email address, the machine will prompt you to select just
one. Press [Apply]. Do one of the following:
• If you are sending a fax or an I-Fax, press [Fax Start].
• If you are scanning to the Email Server, load your document, press [Next], and then press [Start].
Related Information
• Configure and Operate LDAP Search
Related Topics:
• Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
308
Home > Network > Network Features > Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based
Management
Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) is used to synchronize the time used by the machine for
authentication with the SNTP time server. (This is not the time displayed on the machine's LCD.) You can
automatically or manually synchronize the machine's time with the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) provided
by the SNTP time server.
• Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
• Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management
• Change LDAP Configuration Using Web Based Management
• Perform an LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel
309
Home > Network > Network Features > Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based
Management > Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
Configure date and time to synchronize the time used by the machine with the SNTP time server.
This feature is not available in some countries.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Date&Time.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Verify the Time Zone settings.
Select the time difference between your location and UTC from the Time Zone drop-down list. For
example, the time zone for Eastern Time in the USA and Canada is UTC-05:00.
6. Select the Synchronize with SNTP server checkbox.
7. Click Submit.
You can also configure date and time manually.
Related Information
• Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
310
Home > Network > Network Features > Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based
Management > Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management
Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management
Configure the SNTP protocol to synchronize the time the machine uses for authentication with the time kept by
the SNTP time server.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the SNTP checkbox to activate the settings.
6. Click Submit.
7. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
8. Next to the SNTP checkbox, click Advanced Settings.
9. Configure the settings.
Option
Description
Status Displays whether the SNTP protocol is enabled or disabled.
Synchronization Status Confirm the latest synchronization status.
SNTP Server Method Select AUTO or STATIC.
• AUTO
If you have a DHCP server on your network, the SNTP server will
obtain the address from that server automatically.
• STATIC
Type the address you want to use.
Primary SNTP Server Address
Secondary SNTP Server Address
Type the server's address (up to 64 characters).
The secondary SNTP server's address is used as a backup to the
primary SNTP server's address. If the primary server is unavailable,
the machine will contact the secondary SNTP server.
Primary SNTP Server Port
Secondary SNTP Server Port
Type the port number (1-65535).
The secondary SNTP server port is used as a backup to the primary
SNTP server port. If the primary port is unavailable, the machine will
contact the secondary SNTP port.
Synchronization Interval Type the number of hours between server synchronization attempts
(1-168 hours).
10. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
311
Home > Network > Network Features > Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination
Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination
Set up a profile to forward incoming faxes directly to a folder on an FTP, SFTP, CIFS, or SharePoint server.
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Network Profile.
If the left navigation bar is not visible, start navigating from
.
5. Click the protocol option next to the Profile number.
6. Select the FTP, SFTP, Network, or SharePoint option, and then click Submit.
7. Set up the profile for your server, using one of the following tables:
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
FTP
Option
Description
Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Host Address Type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64
characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189).
Port Number Change the Port Number setting used to access the FTP server. The
default setting is port 21. In most cases this setting does not need to be
changed.
Username Type a user name (up to 32 characters) of a user that has permission to
write data to the FTP server.
Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name
you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the
Retype password field.
SSL/TLS Set the SSL/TLS option to forward incoming faxes securely using
SSL/TLS communication. Change the CA Certificate setting, if needed.
Store Directory Type the path (up to 255 characters) to the folder on the FTP server
where you want to forward incoming faxes. Do not type a slash mark at
the beginning of the path (correct example: brother/abc).
312
Option Description
Passive Mode Set the Passive Mode option to off or on depending on your FTP server
and network firewall configuration. The default setting is on. In most
cases, this setting does not need to be changed.
SFTP
Option Description
Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Host Address Type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64
characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189).
Username Type a user name (up to 32 characters) of a user that has permission to
write data to the SFTP server.
Auth. Method Select Password or Public Key.
Password When you select Password for the Auth. Method option, type the
password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you
typed in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype
password field.
Client Key Pair When you select Public Key for the Auth. Method option, select the
authentication type.
Server Public Key Select the authentication type.
Store Directory Type the path (up to 255 characters) to the folder on the SFTP server
where you want to forward incoming faxes. Do not type a slash mark at
the beginning of the path (correct example: brother/abc).
Port Number Change the Port Number setting used to access the SFTP server. The
default setting is port 22. In most cases, this setting does not need to be
changed.
Network
Option
Description
Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric
characters). The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Network Folder Path Type the path to the folder on the CIFS server where you want to
forward incoming faxes.
Auth. Method To set your authentication method, select Auto, Kerberos, or
NTLMv2.
Username Type a user name (up to 96 characters) that has permission to write
data to the folder specified in the Network Folder Path field. If the
user name is part of a domain, type the user name in one of the
following styles:
user@domain
domain\user
Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user
name you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in
the Retype password field.
Kerberos Server Address When you select Kerberos for the Auth. Method option, you must
type the Kerberos Server Address (for example:
kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters).
You must configure the SNTP (network time server) or you must set the date, time and time zone correctly
on the control panel. The time must match the time used by the Kerberos Server and CIFS Server.
SharePoint
313
Option Description
Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
SharePoint Site Address Copy and paste the full destination address shown in the address bar of
your browser (for example: http://SharePointSiteAddress/Shared
%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx) or the IP address (for example:
http://192.168.0.1/Shared%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx).
SSL/TLS If the address in the SharePoint Site Address field starts with "https://",
you can verify the server certificate by selecting the Verify Server
Certificate checkbox.
Auth. Method To set your authentication method, select Auto, NTLMv2, Kerberos, or
Basic. If you choose Auto, the authentication method will be detected
automatically.
Username Type the user name (up to 96 characters) of a user that has permission
to write data to the folder specified in the SharePoint Site Address
field. If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of
the following styles:
• user@domain
• domain\user
Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name
you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the
Retype password field.
Kerberos Server Address When you select Kerberos for the Auth. Method option, you must type
the Kerberos Server Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up
to 64 characters).
8. Click Submit.
9. To set the Fax Forward feature, go to the navigation menu, and then click Fax > Remote Fax Options.
10. Select Forward to Network from the Fwd/Store/Cloud/Network drop-down list.
11. Select the file type you want to use.
12. To print a backup copy of incoming faxes, select On for Backup print.
13. Select the profile you want to use from the Network Profile drop-down list.
14. Type a three-digit Remote Access Code in the Remote Access Code field, if needed.
• You can use the numbers 0 through 9, *, or # for the Remote Access Code.
• The Remote Access Code must be different from the remote codes for the Fax features.
15. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Network Features
314
Home > Network > Network Features > Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)
Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)
Your machine supports 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet. To connect to a 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet Network,
you must set the machine’s Ethernet link mode to Auto from the machine’s control panel or Web Based
Management (web browser).
Use a Category 5e (or greater) network cable. The machine can automatically negotiate the highest
supported network speed, for example: to achieve 1000BASE-T network speeds, all connecting
infrastructure, including network switches and cables must also support 1000BASE-T speeds. Otherwise
the machine will communicate at either 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX.
Related Information
• Network Features
• Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management
315
Home > Network > Network Features > Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only) > Configure the Gigabit
Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management
Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Wired > Ethernet.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select Auto from the Ethernet Mode drop-down list.
6. Click Submit.
7. To activate the settings, click Yes to restart your machine.
You can confirm your settings by printing the Network Configuration Report.
Related Information
• Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
• Print the Network Configuration Report
316
Home > Network > Network Features > Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings
Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings
You can use your machine's control panel to reset the machine's network settings to its default factory settings.
This resets all information, such as the password and IP address.
• This feature restores all network settings to the factory settings.
• You can also reset the print server to its factory settings using Web Based Management.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Network Reset].
2. [Machine will reboot after resetting. Press [OK] for 2 seconds to confirm.]
appears. Press [OK] for two seconds to confirm.
The machine will restart.
Related Information
• Network Features
Related Topics:
• Reset Your Machine
317
Home > Security
Security
• Before Using Network Security Features
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
• Use SSL/TLS
• Use SNMPv3
• Use IPsec
• Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
• Use Active Directory Authentication
• Use LDAP Authentication
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
• Send or Receive an Email Securely
• Store Print Log to Network
• Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel
• Use Global Network Detection Features
318
Home > Security > Before Using Network Security Features
Before Using Network Security Features
Your machine employs some of the latest network security and encryption protocols available today. These
network features can be integrated into your overall network security plan to help protect your data and prevent
unauthorized access to the machine.
We recommend disabling the Telnet, FTP server, and TFTP protocols. Accessing the machine using these
protocols is not secure.
Related Information
• Security
• Disable Unnecessary Protocols
319
Home > Security > Before Using Network Security Features > Disable Unnecessary Protocols
Disable Unnecessary Protocols
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Clear any unnecessary protocol checkboxes to disable them.
6. Click Submit.
7. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
Related Information
• Before Using Network Security Features
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
320
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security
Configure Certificates for Device Security
You must configure a certificate to manage your networked machine securely using SSL/TLS. You must use Web
Based Management to configure a certificate.
• Supported Security Certificate Features
• How to Create and Install a Certificate
• Create a Self-signed Certificate
• Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate
Authority (CA)
• Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
• Import and Export a CA Certificate
• Manage Multiple Certificates
321
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Supported Security Certificate Features
Supported Security Certificate Features
Your machine supports the use of multiple security certificates, which allows secure management, authentication,
and communication with the machine. The following security certificate features can be used with the machine:
• SSL/TLS communication
• SSL communication for SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 (only available for certain models)
• IEEE 802.1x authentication
• IPsec
Your machine supports the following:
• Pre-installed certificate
Your machine has a pre-installed self-signed certificate. This certificate enables you to use SSL/TLS
communication without creating or installing a different certificate.
The pre-installed self-signed certificate protects your communication up to a certain level. We recommend
using a certificate that is issued by a trusted organization for better security.
• Self-signed certificate
This print server issues its own certificate. Using this certificate, you can easily use the SSL/TLS
communication without creating or installing a different certificate from a CA.
• Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
There are two methods for installing a certificate from a CA. If you already have a certificate from a CA or if
you want to use a certificate from an external trusted CA:
- When using a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) from this print server.
- When importing a certificate and a private key.
• Certificate Authority (CA) Certificate
To use a CA certificate that identifies the CA and owns its private key, you must import that CA certificate
from the CA before configuring the security features of the Network.
• If you are going to use SSL/TLS communication, we recommend contacting your system administrator
first.
• When you reset the print server back to its default factory settings, the certificate and the private key
that are installed will be deleted. If you want to keep the same certificate and the private key after
resetting the print server, export them before resetting, and then reinstall them.
Related Information
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
322
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > How to Create and Install a Certificate
How to Create and Install a Certificate
There are two options when choosing a security certificate: use a self-signed certificate or use a certificate from a
Certificate Authority (CA).
Option 1
Self-Signed Certificate
1. Create a self-signed certificate using Web Based Management.
2. Install the self-signed certificate on your computer.
Option 2
Certificate from a CA
1. Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) using Web Based Management.
2. Install the certificate issued by the CA on your Brother machine using Web Based Management.
3. Install the certificate on your computer.
Related Information
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
323
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Create a Self-signed Certificate
Create a Self-signed Certificate
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Create Self-Signed Certificate.
6. Enter a Common Name and a Valid Date.
• The length of the Common Name is less than 64 bytes. Enter an identifier, such as an IP address, node
name, or domain name to use when accessing this machine through SSL/TLS communication. The node
name is displayed by default.
• A warning will appear if you use the IPPS or HTTPS protocol and enter a different name in the URL than
the Common Name that was used for the self-signed certificate.
7. Select your setting from the Public Key Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is RSA(2048bit).
8. Select your setting from the Digest Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is SHA256.
9. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
324
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from
a Certificate Authority (CA)
If you already have a certificate from an external trusted Certificate Authority (CA) , you can store the certificate
and private key on the machine and manage them by importing and exporting. If you do not have a certificate
from an external trusted CA, create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR), send it to a CA for authentication, and
install the returned certificate on your machine.
• Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
• Install a Certificate on Your Machine
325
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) > Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
A Certificate Signing Request (CSR) is a request sent to a Certificate Authority (CA) to authenticate the
credentials contained within the certificate.
We recommend installing a Root Certificate from the CA on your computer before creating the CSR.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Create CSR.
6. Type a Common Name (required) and add other information about your Organization (optional).
• Your company details are required so that a CA can confirm your identity and verify it to the outside
world.
• The length of the Common Name must be less than 64 bytes. Enter an identifier, such as an IP
address, node name, or domain name to use when accessing this machine through SSL/TLS
communication. The node name is displayed by default. The Common Name is required.
• A warning will appear if you type a different name in the URL than the Common Name that was used for
the certificate.
• The length of the Organization, the Organization Unit, the City/Locality, and the State/Province
must be less than 64 bytes.
• The Country/Region should be a two-character ISO 3166 country code.
• If you are configuring an X.509v3 certificate extension, select the Configure extended partition
checkbox, and then select Auto (Register IPv4) or Manual.
7. Select your setting from the Public Key Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is RSA(2048bit).
8. Select your setting from the Digest Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is SHA256.
9. Click Submit.
The CSR appears on your screen. Save the CSR as a file or copy and paste it into an online CSR form
offered by a Certificate Authority.
10. Click Save.
326
• Follow your CA's policy regarding the method to send a CSR to your CA.
• If you are using the Enterprise root CA of Windows Server 2012/2012 R2/2016/2019/2022, we
recommend using the Web Server for the certificate template to securely create the Client Certificate. If
you are creating a Client Certificate for an IEEE 802.1x environment with EAP-TLS authentication, we
recommend using User for the certificate template.
Related Information
• Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
327
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) > Install a Certificate on Your Machine
Install a Certificate on Your Machine
When you receive a certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA), follow the steps below to install it on the print
server:
Only a certificate issued with your machine's Certificate Signing Request (CSR) can be installed on your
machine. When you want to create another CSR, make sure that the certificate is installed before creating the
new CSR. Create another CSR only after installing the certificate on the machine, otherwise the CSR created
before installing the new CSR will be invalid.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Install Certificate.
6. Browse to the file that contains the certificate issued by the CA, and then click Submit.
The certificate has been created and saved in your machine's memory successfully.
To use SSL/TLS communication, the Root Certificate from the CA must be installed on your computer. Contact
your network administrator.
Related Information
• Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
328
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export the Certificate and
Private Key
Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
Store the certificate and private key on your machine and manage them by importing and exporting them.
• Import a Certificate and Private Key
• Export the Certificate and Private Key
329
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export the Certificate and
Private Key > Import a Certificate and Private Key
Import a Certificate and Private Key
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Import Certificate and Private Key.
6. Browse to the file you want to import.
7. Type the password if the file is encrypted, and then click Submit.
The certificate and private key are imported to your machine.
Related Information
• Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
330
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export the Certificate and
Private Key > Export the Certificate and Private Key
Export the Certificate and Private Key
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Export shown with Certificate List.
6. Enter the password if you want to encrypt the file.
If a blank password is used, the output is not encrypted.
7. Enter the password again for confirmation, and then click Submit.
8. Click Save.
The certificate and private key are exported to your computer.
You can also import the certificate to your computer.
Related Information
• Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
331
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export a CA Certificate > Import
a CA Certificate
Import a CA Certificate
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > CA Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Import CA Certificate.
6. Browse to the file you want to import.
7. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Import and Export a CA Certificate
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
333
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export a CA Certificate > Export
a CA Certificate
Export a CA Certificate
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > CA Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the certificate you want to export and click Export.
6. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Import and Export a CA Certificate
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
334
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Manage Multiple Certificates
Manage Multiple Certificates
The multiple certificate feature allows you to use Web Based Management to manage each certificate installed
on your machine. In Web Based Management, navigate to the Certificate or CA Certificate screen to view
certificate content, delete, or export your certificates.
Maximum Number of Certificates Stored on Brother Machine
Self-signed Certificate or
Certificate Issued by a CA
6
CA Certificate 9
We recommend storing fewer certificates than allowed, reserving an empty spot in case of certificate expiration.
When a certificate expires, import a new certificate into the reserved spot, and then delete the expired certificate.
This ensures that you avoid configuration failure.
• When you use HTTPS/IPPS, IEEE 802.1x, or Signed PDF, you must select which certificate you are
using.
• When you use SSL for SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 communications (only available for certain models), you do
not have to choose the certificate. The necessary certificate will be chosen automatically.
Related Information
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
335
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Introduction to SSL/TLS
Introduction to SSL/TLS
Secure Socket Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) is an effective method of protecting data sent over
a local or wide area network (LAN or WAN). It works by encrypting data, such as a print job, sent over a network,
so anyone trying to capture it will not be able to read it.
SSL/TLS can be configured on both wired and wireless networks and will work with other forms of security such
as WPA keys and firewalls.
Related Information
• Use SSL/TLS
• Brief History of SSL/TLS
• Benefits of Using SSL/TLS
337
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Introduction to SSL/TLS > Brief History of SSL/TLS
Brief History of SSL/TLS
SSL/TLS was originally created to secure web traffic information, particularly data sent between web browsers
and servers. SSL is now used with additional applications, such as Telnet, printer, and FTP software, in order to
become a universal solution for online security. Its original design intentions are still being used today by many
online retailers and banks to secure sensitive data, such as credit card numbers, customer records, etc.
SSL/TLS uses extremely high levels of encryption and is trusted by banks all over the world.
Related Information
• Introduction to SSL/TLS
338
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Introduction to SSL/TLS > Benefits of Using SSL/TLS
Benefits of Using SSL/TLS
The primary benefit of using SSL/TLS is to guarantee secure printing over an IP network by restricting
unauthorized users from reading data sent to the machine. SSL's most important benefit is that it can be used to
print confidential data securely. For example, a Human Resource (HR) Department in a large company may be
printing wage slips on a regular basis. Without encryption, the data contained on these wages slips can be read
by other network users. However, with SSL/TLS, anyone trying to capture the data will see a page of code and
not the actual wage slip.
Related Information
• Introduction to SSL/TLS
339
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
• Configure a Certificate for SSL/TLS and Available Protocols
• Access Web Based Management Using SSL/TLS
• Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows Users as Administrators
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
340
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS > Configure a
Certificate for SSL/TLS and Available Protocols
Configure a Certificate for SSL/TLS and Available Protocols
Configure a certificate on your machine using Web Based Management before you use SSL/TLS
communication.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click HTTP Server Settings.
6. Select the certificate you want to configure from the Select the Certificate drop-down list.
7. Click Submit.
8. Click Yes to restart your print server.
Related Information
• Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
341
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS > Access
Web Based Management Using SSL/TLS
Access Web Based Management Using SSL/TLS
To manage your network machine securely, use Web Based Management with the HTTPS protocol.
• To use HTTPS protocol, HTTPS must be enabled on your machine. The HTTPS protocol is enabled by
default.
• You can change the HTTPS protocol settings using Web Based Management.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://Common Name" in your browser's address bar (where "Common Name" is the Common Name
that you assigned to the certificate; this could be your IP address, node name, or domain name).
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. You can now access the machine using HTTPS.
Related Information
• Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
342
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS > Install the
Self-signed Certificate for Windows Users as Administrators
Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows Users as Administrators
• The following steps are for Microsoft Edge. If you use another web browser, refer to your web browser's
documentation or online help for instructions on how to install certificates.
• Make sure you have created your self-signed certificate using Web Based Management.
1. Right-click the Microsoft Edge icon, and then click Run as administrator.
If the User Account Control screen appears, click Yes.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If your connection is not private, click the Advanced button, and then continue to the web page.
4. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
5. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
6. Click Export.
7. To encrypt the output file, type a password in the Enter password field. If the Enter password field is blank,
your output file will not be encrypted.
8. Type the password again in the Retype password field, and then click Submit.
9. Click the downloaded file to open.
10. When the Certificate Import Wizard appears, click Next.
11. Click Next.
12. If required, type a password, and then click Next.
13. Select Place all certificates in the following store, and then click Browse….
14. Select the Trusted Root Certification Authorities, and then click OK.
15. Click Next.
16. Click Finish.
17. Click Yes, if the fingerprint (thumbprint) is correct.
18. Click OK.
Related Information
• Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
343
Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS > Print Documents Using
IPPS
Print Documents Using IPPS
To print documents securely with IPP protocol, use the IPPS protocol.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Make sure the IPP checkbox is selected.
If the IPP checkbox is not selected, select the IPP checkbox, and then click Submit.
Restart your machine to activate the configuration.
After the machine restarts, return to the machine's web page, type the password, go to the navigation
menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
6. Click HTTP Server Settings.
7. Select the HTTPS checkbox in the IPP area, and then click Submit.
8. Restart your machine to activate the configuration.
Communication using IPPS cannot prevent unauthorized access to the print server.
Related Information
• Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
345
Home > Security > Use SNMPv3 > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SNMPv3
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SNMPv3
The Simple Network Management Protocol version 3 (SNMPv3) provides user authentication and data
encryption to manage network devices securely.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://Common Name" in your browser's address bar (where "Common Name" is the Common Name
that you assigned to the certificate; this could be your IP address, node name, or domain name).
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Make sure the SNMP setting is enabled, and then click Advanced Settings.
6. Configure the SNMP settings.
Option Description
SNMP v1/v2c
read-write
access
The print server uses version 1 and version 2c of the SNMP protocol. You can use all of
your machine's applications in this mode. However, it is not secure since it will not
authenticate the user and data will not be encrypted.
SNMPv3 read-
write access
and v1/v2c read-
only access
The print server uses the read-write access of version 3 and the read-only access of
version 1 and version 2c of the SNMP protocol.
When you use the SNMPv3 read-write access and v1/v2c read-only
access mode, some of your machine's applications that access the print
server do not work correctly since they authorize the read-only access of
version 1 and version 2c. If you want to use all applications, we recommend
using the SNMP v1/v2c read-write access mode.
SNMPv3 read-
write access
The print server uses version 3 of the SNMP protocol. If you want to manage the print
server securely, use this mode.
When you use the SNMPv3 read-write access mode, note the following:
Except for BRAdmin Professional, all applications that use SNMPv1/v2c will
be restricted. To allow the use of SNMPv1/v2c applications, use the SNMPv3
read-write access and v1/v2c read-only access or SNMP v1/v2c read-
write access mode.
7. Click Submit.
If your machine displays the protocol setting options, select the options you want.
8. Restart your machine to activate the configuration.
Related Information
• Use SNMPv3
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
347
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Introduction to IPsec
Introduction to IPsec
IPsec (Internet Protocol Security) is a security protocol that uses an optional Internet Protocol function to prevent
data manipulation and ensure the confidentiality of data transmitted as IP packets. IPsec encrypts data carried
over a network, such as print data sent from computers to a printer. Because the data is encrypted at the network
layer, applications that employ a higher-level protocol use IPsec even if the user is not aware of its use.
IPsec supports the following functions:
• IPsec transmissions
According to the IPsec setting conditions, a network-connected computer sends data to and receives data
from a specified device using IPsec. When devices start communicating using IPsec, keys are exchanged
using Internet Key Exchange (IKE) first, and then the encrypted data is transmitted using the keys.
In addition, IPsec has two operation modes: the Transport mode and Tunnel mode. The Transport mode is
used mainly for communication between devices and the Tunnel mode is used in environments such as a
Virtual Private Network (VPN).
For IPsec transmissions, the following conditions are necessary:
- A computer that can communicate using IPsec is connected to the network.
- Your machine is configured for IPsec communication.
- The computer connected to your machine is configured for IPsec connections.
• IPsec settings
The settings that are necessary for connections using IPsec. These settings can be configured using Web
Based Management.
To configure the IPsec settings, you must use the browser on a computer that is connected to the network.
Related Information
• Use IPsec
349
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management
Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management
The IPsec connection conditions comprise two Template types: Address and IPsec. You can configure up to 10
connection conditions.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > IPsec.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Configure the settings.
Option
Description
Status Enable or disable IPsec.
Negotiation Mode Select Negotiation Mode for IKE Phase 1. IKE is a protocol that is
used to exchange encryption keys in order to carry out encrypted
communication using IPsec.
In the Main mode, the processing speed is slow, but the security is
high. In the Aggressive mode, the processing speed is faster than in
the Main mode, but the security is lower.
All Non-IPsec Traffic Select the action to be taken for non-IPsec packets.
When using Web Services, you must select Allow for All Non-IPsec
Traffic. If you select Drop, Web Services cannot be used.
Broadcast/Multicast Bypass Select Enabled or Disabled.
Protocol Bypass Select the checkboxes for the option or options you want.
Rules Select the Enabled checkbox to activate the template. When you
select multiple checkboxes, the lower numbered checkboxes have
priority if the settings for the selected checkboxes conflict.
Click the corresponding drop-down list to select the Address
Template that is used for the IPsec connection conditions. To add an
Address Template, click Add Template.
Click the corresponding drop-down list to select the IPsec Template
that is used for the IPsec connection conditions. To add an IPsec
Template, click Add Template.
6. Click Submit.
If the machine must be restarted to activate the new settings, the restart confirmation screen will appear.
If there is a blank item in the template you enabled in the Rules table, an error message appears. Confirm
your choices and click Submit again.
Related Information
• Use IPsec
Related Topics:
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
350
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management
Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > IPsec Address Template.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click the Delete button to delete an Address Template. When an Address Template is in use, it cannot be
deleted.
6. Click the Address Template that you want to create. The IPsec Address Template appears.
7. Configure the settings.
Option
Description
Template Name Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
Local IP Address • IP Address
Specify the IP address. Select ALL IPv4 Address, ALL IPv6
Address, ALL Link Local IPv6, or Custom from the drop-down
list.
If you select Custom from the drop-down list, type the IP address
(IPv4 or IPv6) in the text box.
• IP Address Range
Type the starting and ending IP addresses for the IP address
range in the text boxes. If the starting and ending IP addresses
are not standardized to IPv4 or IPv6, or the ending IP address is
smaller than the starting address, an error will occur.
• IP Address / Prefix
Specify the IP address using CIDR notation.
For example: 192.168.1.1/24
Because the prefix is specified in the form of a 24-bit subnet mask
(255.255.255.0) for 192.168.1.1, the addresses 192.168.1.###
are valid.
Remote IP Address
• Any
If you select Any, all IP addresses are enabled.
• IP Address
Type the specified IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) in the text box.
• IP Address Range
Type the first and last IP addresses for the IP address range. If
the first and last IP addresses are not standardized to IPv4 or
IPv6, or the last IP address is smaller than the first address, an
error will occur.
• IP Address / Prefix
Specify the IP address using CIDR notation.
For example: 192.168.1.1/24
352
Option Description
Because the prefix is specified in the form of a 24-bit subnet mask
(255.255.255.0) for 192.168.1.1, the addresses 192.168.1.###
are valid.
8. Click Submit.
When you change the settings for the template currently in use, restart your machine to activate the
configuration.
Related Information
• Use IPsec
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
353
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > IPsec Template.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click the Delete button to delete an IPsec Template. When an IPsec Template is in use, it cannot be
deleted.
6. Click the IPsec Template that you want to create. The IPsec Template screen appears. The configuration
fields differ based on the Use Prefixed Template and Internet Key Exchange (IKE) settings you select.
7. In the Template Name field, type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
8. If you selected Custom in the Use Prefixed Template drop-down list, select the Internet Key Exchange
(IKE) options, and then change the settings if needed.
9. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Use IPsec
• IKEv1 Settings for an IPsec Template
• IKEv2 Settings for an IPsec Template
• Manual Settings for an IPsec Template
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
354
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management > IKEv1
Settings for an IPsec Template
IKEv1 Settings for an IPsec Template
Option Description
Template Name Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
Use Prefixed Template Select Custom, IKEv1 High Security or IKEv1 Medium Security. The
setting items are different depending on the selected template.
Internet Key Exchange (IKE) IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption
keys in order to carry out encrypted communication using IPsec. To
carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption
algorithm that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption
keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are exchanged using the
Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication
that is limited to IKE is carried out.
If you selected Custom in Use Prefixed Template, select IKEv1.
Authentication Type
• Diffie-Hellman Group
This key exchange method allows secret keys to be securely
exchanged over an unprotected network. The Diffie-Hellman key
exchange method uses a discrete logarithm problem, not the
secret key, to send and receive open information that was
generated using a random number and the secret key.
Select Group1, Group2, Group5, or Group14.
• Encryption
Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.
• Hash
Select MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384 or SHA512.
• SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
Encapsulating Security
• Protocol
Select ESP, AH, or AH+ESP.
- ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication
using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload (communicated
contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet
comprises the header and the encrypted payload, which
follows the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP
packet also includes information regarding the encryption
method and encryption key, the authentication data, and so
on.
- AH is part of the IPsec protocol that authenticates the
sender and prevents manipulation (ensures the
completeness) of the data. In the IP packet, the data is
inserted immediately after the header. In addition, the
packets include hash values, which are calculated using an
equation from the communicated contents, secret key, and
so on, in order to prevent the falsification of the sender and
manipulation of the data. Unlike ESP, the communicated
contents are not encrypted, and the data is sent and
received as plain text.
• Encryption (Not available for the AH option.)
Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.
• Hash
Select None, MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, or SHA512.
None can be selected only when ESP is selected for Protocol.
355
Option Description
• SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
• Encapsulation Mode
Select Transport or Tunnel.
• Remote Router IP-Address
Type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the remote router. Enter this
information only when the Tunnel mode is selected.
SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication
method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and shares
information, such as the encryption method and encryption key,
in order to establish a secure communication channel before
communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted
communication channel that has been established. The SA
used for IPsec establishes the encryption method, exchanges
the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the
IKE (Internet Key Exchange) standard procedure. In addition,
the SA is updated periodically.
Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS)
PFS does not derive keys from previous keys that were used to encrypt
messages. In addition, if a key that is used to encrypt a message was
derived from a parent key, that parent key is not used to derive other
keys. Therefore, even if a key is compromised, the damage will be
limited only to the messages that were encrypted using that key.
Select Enabled or Disabled.
Authentication Method Select the authentication method. Select Pre-Shared Key or
Certificates.
Pre-Shared Key When encrypting communication, the encryption key is exchanged and
shared beforehand using another channel.
If you selected Pre-Shared Key for the Authentication Method, type
the Pre-Shared Key (up to 32 characters).
• Local/ID Type/ID
Select the sender's ID type, and then type the ID.
Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or
Certificate for the type.
If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate
in the ID field.
• Remote/ID Type/ID
Select the recipient's ID type, and then type the ID.
Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or
Certificate for the type.
If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate
in the ID field.
Certificate
If you selected Certificates for Authentication Method, select the
certificate.
You can select only the certificates that were created using the
Certificate page of Web Based Management's Security
configuration screen.
Related Information
• Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
356
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management > IKEv2
Settings for an IPsec Template
IKEv2 Settings for an IPsec Template
Option Description
Template Name Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
Use Prefixed Template Select Custom, IKEv2 High Security, or IKEv2 Medium Security.
The setting items are different depending on the selected template.
Internet Key Exchange (IKE) IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption
keys in order to carry out encrypted communication using IPsec. To
carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption
algorithm that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption
keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are exchanged using the
Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication
that is limited to IKE is carried out.
If you selected Custom in Use Prefixed Template, select IKEv2.
Authentication Type
• Diffie-Hellman Group
This key exchange method allows secret keys to be securely
exchanged over an unprotected network. The Diffie-Hellman key
exchange method uses a discrete logarithm problem, not the
secret key, to send and receive open information that was
generated using a random number and the secret key.
Select Group1, Group2, Group5, or Group14.
• Encryption
Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.
• Hash
Select MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384 or SHA512.
• SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
Encapsulating Security
• Protocol
Select ESP.
ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication
using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload (communicated
contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet
comprises the header and the encrypted payload, which follows
the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP packet also
includes information regarding the encryption method and
encryption key, the authentication data, and so on.
• Encryption
Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.
• Hash
Select MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, or SHA512.
• SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
• Encapsulation Mode
Select Transport or Tunnel.
• Remote Router IP-Address
Type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the remote router. Enter this
information only when the Tunnel mode is selected.
357
Option Description
SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication
method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and shares
information, such as the encryption method and encryption key,
in order to establish a secure communication channel before
communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted
communication channel that has been established. The SA
used for IPsec establishes the encryption method, exchanges
the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the
IKE (Internet Key Exchange) standard procedure. In addition,
the SA is updated periodically.
Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS)
PFS does not derive keys from previous keys that were used to encrypt
messages. In addition, if a key that is used to encrypt a message was
derived from a parent key, that parent key is not used to derive other
keys. Therefore, even if a key is compromised, the damage will be
limited only to the messages that were encrypted using that key.
Select Enabled or Disabled.
Authentication Method Select the authentication method. Select Pre-Shared Key,
Certificates, EAP - MD5, or EAP - MS-CHAPv2.
EAP is an authentication protocol that is an extension of PPP.
By using EAP with IEEE802.1x, a different key is used for user
authentication during each session.
The following settings are necessary only when EAP - MD5 or
EAP - MS-CHAPv2 is selected in Authentication Method:
• Mode
Select Server-Mode or Client-Mode.
• Certificate
Select the certificate.
• User Name
Type the user name (up to 32 characters).
• Password
Type the password (up to 32 characters). The password
must be entered two times for confirmation.
Pre-Shared Key
When encrypting communication, the encryption key is exchanged and
shared beforehand using another channel.
If you selected Pre-Shared Key for the Authentication Method, type
the Pre-Shared Key (up to 32 characters).
• Local/ID Type/ID
Select the sender's ID type, and then type the ID.
Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or
Certificate for the type.
If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate
in the ID field.
• Remote/ID Type/ID
Select the recipient's ID type, and then type the ID.
Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or
Certificate for the type.
If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate
in the ID field.
Certificate
If you selected Certificates for Authentication Method, select the
certificate.
358
Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management > Manual
Settings for an IPsec Template
Manual Settings for an IPsec Template
Option Description
Template Name Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
Use Prefixed Template Select Custom.
Internet Key Exchange (IKE) IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption
keys in order to carry out encrypted communication using IPsec. To
carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption
algorithm that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption
keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are exchanged using the
Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication
that is limited to IKE is carried out.
Select Manual.
Authentication Key (ESP, AH)
Type the In/Out values.
These settings are necessary when Custom is selected for Use
Prefixed Template, Manual is selected for Internet Key Exchange
(IKE), and a setting other than None is selected for Hash for
Encapsulating Security section.
The number of characters you can set differs depending on the
setting you chose for Hash in the Encapsulating Security
section.
If the length of the specified authentication key is different than
the selected hash algorithm, an error will occur.
• MD5: 128 bits (16 bytes)
• SHA1: 160 bits (20 bytes)
• SHA256: 256 bits (32 bytes)
• SHA384: 384 bits (48 bytes)
• SHA512: 512 bits (64 bytes)
When you specify the key in ASCII Code, enclose the
characters in double quotation marks (").
Code key (ESP)
Type the In/Out values.
These settings are necessary when Custom is selected for Use
Prefixed Template, Manual is selected for Internet Key Exchange
(IKE), and ESP is selected for Protocol in Encapsulating Security.
The number of characters you can set differs depending on the
setting you chose for Encryption in the Encapsulating
Security section.
If the length of the specified code key is different than the
selected encryption algorithm, an error will occur.
• DES: 64 bits (8 bytes)
• 3DES: 192 bits (24 bytes)
• AES-CBC 128: 128 bits (16 bytes)
• AES-CBC 256: 256 bits (32 bytes)
When you specify the key in ASCII Code, enclose the
characters in double quotation marks (").
SPI
These parameters are used to identify security information. Generally, a
host has multiple Security Associations (SAs) for several types of IPsec
communication. Therefore, it is necessary to identify the applicable SA
when an IPsec packet is received. The SPI parameter, which identifies
the SA, is included in the Authentication Header (AH) and
Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) header.
360
Option Description
These settings are necessary when Custom is selected for Use
Prefixed Template, and Manual is selected for Internet Key
Exchange (IKE).
Enter the In/Out values. (3-10 characters)
Encapsulating Security • Protocol
Select ESP or AH.
- ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication
using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload (communicated
contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet
comprises the header and the encrypted payload, which
follows the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP
packet also includes information regarding the encryption
method and encryption key, the authentication data, and so
on.
- AH is part of the IPsec protocol that authenticates the
sender and prevents manipulation of the data (ensures the
completeness of the data). In the IP packet, the data is
inserted immediately after the header. In addition, the
packets include hash values, which are calculated using an
equation from the communicated contents, secret key, and
so on, in order to prevent the falsification of the sender and
manipulation of the data. Unlike ESP, the communicated
contents are not encrypted, and the data is sent and
received as plain text.
• Encryption (Not available for the AH option.)
Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.
• Hash
Select None, MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, or SHA512.
None can be selected only when ESP is selected for Protocol.
• SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
• Encapsulation Mode
Select Transport or Tunnel.
• Remote Router IP-Address
Type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the remote router. Enter this
information only when the Tunnel mode is selected.
SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication
method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and shares
information, such as the encryption method and encryption key,
in order to establish a secure communication channel before
communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted
communication channel that has been established. The SA
used for IPsec establishes the encryption method, exchanges
the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the
IKE (Internet Key Exchange) standard procedure. In addition,
the SA is updated periodically.
Related Information
• Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
361
Home > Security > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
• What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication?
• Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or Wireless Network Using Web Based
Management (Web Browser)
• IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods
362
Home > Security > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network > What Is IEEE
802.1x Authentication?
What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication?
IEEE 802.1x is an IEEE standard that limits access from unauthorized network devices. Your Brother machine
sends an authentication request to a RADIUS server (Authentication server) through your access point or hub.
After your request has been verified by the RADIUS server, your machine can access the network.
Related Information
• Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
363
Home > Security > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network > Configure IEEE
802.1x Authentication for a Wired or Wireless Network Using Web Based Management (Web Browser)
Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or Wireless Network
Using Web Based Management (Web Browser)
• If you configure your machine using EAP-TLS authentication, you must install the client certificate issued
by a CA before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the client certificate. If
you have installed more than one certificate, we recommend writing down the certificate name you want to
use.
• Before you verify the server certificate, you must import the CA certificate issued by the CA that signed the
server certificate. Contact your network administrator or your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to confirm
whether a CA certificate import is necessary.
You can also configure IEEE 802.1x authentication using the Wireless Setup Wizard from the control panel
(Wireless network).
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Do one of the following:
• For the wired network
Click Wired > Wired 802.1x Authentication.
• For the wireless network
Click Wireless > Wireless (Enterprise).
6. Configure the IEEE 802.1x authentication settings.
• To enable IEEE 802.1x authentication for wired networks, select Enabled for Wired 802.1x status on
the Wired 802.1x Authentication page.
• If you are using EAP-TLS authentication, you must select the client certificate installed (shown with
certificate name) for verification from the Client Certificate drop-down list.
• If you select EAP-FAST, PEAP, EAP-TTLS, or EAP-TLS authentication, select the verification method
from the Server Certificate Verification drop-down list. Verify the server certificate using the CA
certificate, imported to the machine in advance, issued by the CA that signed the server certificate.
364
Select one of the following verification methods from the Server Certificate Verification drop-down list:
Option Description
No Verification The server certificate can always be trusted. The verification is not performed.
CA Cert. The verification method to check the CA reliability of the server certificate, using the
CA certificate issued by the CA that signed the server certificate.
CA Cert. + ServerID The verification method to check the common name
1
value of the server certificate,
in addition to the CA reliability of the server certificate.
7. When finished with configuration, click Submit.
For wired networks: After configuring, connect your machine to the IEEE 802.1x supported network. After a
few minutes, print the Network Configuration Report to check the <Wired IEEE 802.1x> status.
Option Description
Success The wired IEEE 802.1x function is enabled and the authentication was successful.
Failed The wired IEEE 802.1x function is enabled; however, the authentication failed.
Off The wired IEEE 802.1x function is not available.
Related Information
• Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
Related Topics:
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
• Access Web Based Management
1 The common name verification compares the common name of the server certificate to the character string configured for the Server ID.
Before you use this method, contact your system administrator about the server certificate's common name and then configure Server ID.
365
Home > Security > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network > IEEE 802.1x
Authentication Methods
IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods
EAP-FAST
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Flexible Authentication via Secured Tunneling (EAP-FAST) has been
developed by Cisco Systems, Inc., which uses a user ID and password for authentication, and symmetric key
algorithms to achieve a tunneled authentication process.
Your Brother machine supports the following inner authentication methods:
• EAP-FAST/NONE
• EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2
• EAP-FAST/GTC
EAP-MD5 (Wired network)
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Message Digest Algorithm 5 (EAP-MD5) uses a user ID and password for
challenge-response authentication.
PEAP
Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP) is a version of EAP method developed by Cisco
Systems, Inc., Microsoft Corporation and RSA Security. PEAP creates an encrypted Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL)/Transport Layer Security (TLS) tunnel between a client and an authentication server, for sending a user
ID and password. PEAP provides mutual authentication between the server and the client.
Your Brother machine supports the following inner authentications:
• PEAP/MS-CHAPv2
• PEAP/GTC
EAP-TTLS
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Tunneled Transport Layer Security (EAP-TTLS) has been developed by
Funk Software and Certicom. EAP-TTLS creates a similar encrypted SSL tunnel to PEAP, between a client
and an authentication server, for sending a user ID and password. EAP-TTLS provides mutual authentication
between the server and the client.
Your Brother machine supports the following inner authentications:
• EAP-TTLS/CHAP
• EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAP
• EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAPv2
• EAP-TTLS/PAP
EAP-TLS
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Transport Layer Security (EAP-TLS) requires digital certificate
authentication both at a client and an authentication server.
Related Information
• Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
366
Home > Security > Use Active Directory Authentication
Use Active Directory Authentication
• Introduction to Active Directory Authentication
• Configure Active Directory Authentication Using Web Based Management
• Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (Active
Directory Authentication)
367
Home > Security > Use Active Directory Authentication > Introduction to Active Directory Authentication
Introduction to Active Directory Authentication
Active Directory Authentication restricts the use of your machine. If Active Directory Authentication is enabled,
the machine's control panel will be locked. You cannot change the machine's settings until you enter a User ID
and password.
Active Directory Authentication offers the following features:
• Stores incoming print data
• Stores incoming fax data (For MFC models)
• Obtains the email address from the Active Directory server based on your User ID, when sending scanned
data to an email server.
To use this feature, select the On option for the Get Mail Address setting and LDAP + kerberos or LDAP +
NTLMv2 authentication method. Your email address will be set as the sender when the machine sends
scanned data to an email server, or as the recipient if you want to send the scanned data to your email
address.
When Active Directory Authentication is enabled, your machine stores all incoming fax data. After you log on, the
machine prints the stored fax data. (For MFC models)
You can change the Active Directory Authentication settings using Web Based Management.
Related Information
• Use Active Directory Authentication
368
Home > Security > Use Active Directory Authentication > Configure Active Directory Authentication Using
Web Based Management
Configure Active Directory Authentication Using Web Based
Management
Active Directory authentication supports Kerberos authentication and NTLMv2 authentication. You must
configure the SNTP protocol (network time server) and DNS server configuration for authentication.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction
Management.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select Active Directory Authentication.
6. Click Submit.
7. Click Active Directory Authentication.
8. Configure the following settings:
Option Description
Storage Fax RX Data Select this option to store incoming fax data. You can print all incoming fax
data after you log on to the machine.
Remember User ID Select this option to save your User ID.
Active Directory Server
Address
Type the IP address or the server name (for example: ad.example.com) of
the Active Directory Server.
Active Directory Domain
Name
Type the Active Directory domain name.
Protocol & Authentication
Method
Select the protocol and authentication method.
SSL/TLS Select the SSL/TLS option.
LDAP Server Port Type the port number to connect the Active Directory server via LDAP
(available only for LDAP + kerberos or LDAP + NTLMv2 authentication
method).
LDAP Search Root Type the LDAP search root (available only for LDAP + kerberos or LDAP +
NTLMv2 authentication method).
Get Mail Address Select this option to obtain logged on user's email address from the Active
Directory server. (available only for LDAP + kerberos or LDAP + NTLMv2
authentication method)
369
Option Description
Get User's Home
Directory
Select this option to obtain your home directory as the Scan to Network
destination. (available only for LDAP + kerberos or LDAP + NTLMv2
authentication method)
9. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Use Active Directory Authentication
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
370
Home > Security > Use Active Directory Authentication > Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the
Machine's Control Panel (Active Directory Authentication)
Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control
Panel (Active Directory Authentication)
When Active Directory Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked until you enter
your User ID and password on the machine's control panel.
1. On the machine's control panel, enter your User ID.
2. Press [OK].
3. Enter your password.
4. Press [OK].
5. Press [OK] again.
6. When authentication is successful, the machine's control panel unlocks, and the LCD displays the Home
screen.
Related Information
• Use Active Directory Authentication
371
Home > Security > Use LDAP Authentication > Introduction to LDAP Authentication
Introduction to LDAP Authentication
LDAP Authentication restricts the use of your machine. If LDAP Authentication is enabled, the machine's control
panel will be locked. You cannot change the machine's settings until you enter a User ID and password.
LDAP Authentication offers the following features:
• Stores incoming print data
• Stores incoming fax data (For MFC models)
• Obtains the email address from the LDAP server based on your User ID, when sending scanned data to an
email server.
To use this feature, select the On option for the Get Mail Address setting. Your email address will be set as
the sender when the machine sends scanned data to an email server, or as the recipient if you want to send
the scanned data to your email address.
When LDAP Authentication is enabled, your machine stores all incoming fax data. After you log on, the machine
prints the stored fax data. (For MFC models)
You can change the LDAP Authentication settings using Web Based Management.
Related Information
• Use LDAP Authentication
373
Home > Security > Use LDAP Authentication > Configure LDAP Authentication Using Web Based
Management
Configure LDAP Authentication Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction
Management.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select LDAP Authentication.
6. Click Submit.
7. Click the LDAP Authentication menu.
8. Configure the following settings:
Option Description
Storage Fax RX Data Select this option to store incoming fax data. You can print all incoming fax
data after you log on to the machine.
Remember User ID Select this option to save your User ID.
LDAP Server Address Type the IP address or the server name (for example: ldap.example.com) of
the LDAP server.
SSL/TLS Select the SSL/TLS option to use LDAP over SSL/TLS.
LDAP Server Port Type the LDAP server port number.
LDAP Search Root Type the LDAP search root directory.
Attribute of Name (Search
Key)
Type the attribute you want to use as a search key.
Get Mail Address Select this option to obtain the logged user's email address from the LDAP
server.
Get User's Home
Directory
Select this option to obtain your home directory as the Scan to Network
destination.
9. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Use LDAP Authentication
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
374
Home > Security > Use LDAP Authentication > Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the
Machine's Control Panel (LDAP Authentication)
Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control
Panel (LDAP Authentication)
When LDAP Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked until you enter your User ID
and password on the machine's control panel.
1. On the machine's control panel, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Press [OK].
3. Enter your password.
4. Press [OK].
5. Press [OK] again.
6. When authentication is successful, the machine's control panel unlocks, and the LCD displays the Home
screen.
Related Information
• Use LDAP Authentication
375
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
Secure Function Lock 3.0 increases security by restricting the functions available on your machine.
• Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
• Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management
• Scan Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
• Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0
• Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features
• Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control Panel
376
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
Use Secure Function Lock to configure passwords, set specific user page limits, and grant access to some or all
of the functions listed here.
You can configure and change the following Secure Function Lock 3.0 settings using Web Based Management:
• Print
Print includes print jobs sent via AirPrint, Brother iPrint&Scan, and Brother Mobile Connect.
If you register user login names in advance, the users do not need to enter their passwords when they use
the print function.
• Color Print
• Copy
• Scan
Scan includes scan jobs sent via Brother iPrint&Scan and Brother Mobile Connect.
• Send (supported models only)
• Receive (supported models only)
• USB Direct Print (supported models only)
• Scan to USB (supported models only)
• Web Connect (supported models only)
• Apps (supported models only)
• Page Limits (*)
• Page Counters
• Card ID (NFC ID) (supported models only)
If you register user Card IDs in advance, registered users can activate the machine by touching their
registered cards to the machine's NFC symbol.
Touchscreen LCD models:
When Secure Function Lock is enabled, the machine automatically enters Public Mode and some of the
machine's functions become restricted to authorized users only. To access the restricted machine functions,
press
, select your user name, and enter your password.
Related Information
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
377
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based
Management
Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction
Management.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select Secure Function Lock.
6. Click Submit.
7. Click the Restricted Functions menu.
8. In the User List / Restricted Functions field, type a group name or user name.
9. In the Print and the other columns, select a checkbox to allow, or clear a checkbox to restrict, the function
listed.
10. To configure the maximum page count, select the On checkbox in the Page Limits column, and then type the
maximum number in the Max. Pages field.
11. Click Submit.
12. Click the User List menu.
13. In the User List field, type the user name.
14. In the Password field, type a password.
The number of characters you can set differs depending on your model.
15. In the E-mail Address field, type the user's email address.
16. To register the user's Card ID, type the card number in the Card ID (NFC ID) field (available for certain
models).
17. Select User List / Restricted Functions from the drop-down list for each user.
18. Click Submit.
You can also change the user list lockout settings in the Secure Function Lock menu.
Related Information
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
378
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Scan Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
Scan Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
Setting Scan restrictions (for administrators)
Secure Function Lock 3.0 allows an administrator to restrict which users are allowed to scan. When the Scan
feature is set to Off for the public user setting, only users who have the Scan checkbox selected will be able to
scan.
Using the Scan feature (for restricted users)
• To scan using the machine's control panel:
Restricted users must enter their passwords on the machine's control panel to access Scan mode.
• To scan from a computer:
Restricted users must enter their passwords on the machine's control panel before scanning from their
computers. If the password is not entered on the machine's control panel, an error message will appear on
the user's computer.
Related Information
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
379
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0
Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0
Use the Secure Function Lock screen to set up Public Mode, which limits the functions available to public users.
Public users will not need to enter a password to access the features made available through Public Mode
settings.
Public Mode includes print jobs sent via Brother iPrint&Scan and Brother Mobile Connect.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction
Management.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select Secure Function Lock.
6. Click Submit.
7. Click the Restricted Functions menu.
8. In the Public Mode row, select a checkbox to allow, or clear a checkbox to restrict, the function listed.
9. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
380
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features
Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features
Configure the following features in the Secure Function Lock screen:
All Counter Reset
Click All Counter Reset, in the Page Counters column, to reset the page counter.
Export to CSV file
Click Export to CSV file, to export the current and last page counter including User List / Restricted
Functions information as a CSV file.
Card ID (NFC ID) (supported models only)
Click the User List menu, and then type a user's Card ID in the Card ID (NFC ID) field. You can use your IC
card for authentication.
Last Counter Record
Click Last Counter Record if you want the machine to retain the page count after the counter has been reset.
Related Information
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
381
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control
Panel
Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control Panel
1. Touch the Near-Field Communication (NFC) symbol on the machine with a registered Integrated Circuit Card
(IC Card).
2. Touch your user ID on the machine.
3. Press [Register Card].
4. Touch a new IC Card to the NFC symbol.
The new IC Card's number is registered to the machine.
5. Press [OK].
Related Information
• Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
382
Home > Security > Send or Receive an Email Securely > Configure Email Sending or Receiving Using Web
Based Management
Configure Email Sending or Receiving Using Web Based Management
We recommend using Web Based Management to configure secured email sending with user authentication,
or email sending and receiving using SSL/TLS.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. In the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client field, click Advanced Settings and make sure the status of POP3/IMAP4/
SMTP Client is Enabled.
6. Configure the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client settings.
• Confirm that the email settings are correct after configuration by sending a test email.
• If you do not know the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP server settings, contact your network administrator or Internet
Service Provider (ISP).
7. When finished, click Submit.
The Test Send/Receive E-mail Configuration dialog box appears.
8. Follow the instructions in the dialog box to test the current settings.
Related Information
• Send or Receive an Email Securely
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
384
Home > Security > Send or Receive an Email Securely > Send an Email with User Authentication
Send an Email with User Authentication
Your machine supports the SMTP-AUTH method to send email via an email server that requires user
authentication. This method prevents unauthorized users from accessing the email server.
You can use the SMTP-AUTH method for email notification, email reports and I-Fax. (For MFC models)
We recommend using Web Based Management to configure the SMTP authentication.
Email Server Settings
You must configure your machine's SMTP authentication method to match the method used by your email server.
For details about your email server settings, contact your network administrator or Internet Service Provider
(ISP).
To enable SMTP server authentication: in the Web Based Management POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client screen,
under Server Authentication Method, you must select SMTP-AUTH.
Related Information
• Send or Receive an Email Securely
385
Home > Security > Send or Receive an Email Securely > Send or Receive an Email Securely Using
SSL/TLS
Send or Receive an Email Securely Using SSL/TLS
Your machine supports SSL/TLS communication methods. To use an email server that is using SSL/TLS
communication, you must configure the following settings.
We recommend using Web Based Management to configure SSL/TLS.
Verify Server Certificate
Under SSL/TLS, if you choose SSL or TLS, the Verify Server Certificate checkbox will be selected
automatically.
• Before you verify the server certificate, you must import the CA certificate issued by the CA that signed
the server certificate. Contact your network administrator or your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to
confirm if importing a CA certificate is necessary.
• If you do not need to verify the server certificate, clear the Verify Server Certificate checkbox.
Port Number
If you select SSL, or TLS, the Port value will be changed to match the protocol. To change the port number
manually, type the port number after you select SSL/TLS settings.
You must configure your machine's communication method to match the method used by your email server. For
details about your email server settings, contact your network administrator or your ISP.
In most cases, the secured webmail services require the following settings:
SMTP
Port 587
Server Authentication Method SMTP-AUTH
SSL/TLS TLS
POP3 Port 995
SSL/TLS SSL
IMAP4 Port 993
SSL/TLS SSL
Related Information
• Send or Receive an Email Securely
Related Topics:
• Configure Certificates for Device Security
386
Home > Security > Store Print Log to Network
Store Print Log to Network
• Store Print Log to Network Overview
• Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using Web Based Management
• Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection Setting
• Use Store Print Log to Network with Secure Function Lock 3.0
387
Home > Security > Store Print Log to Network > Store Print Log to Network Overview
Store Print Log to Network Overview
The Store Print Log to Network feature allows you to save the print log file from your machine to a network server
using the Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol. You can record the ID, type of print job, job name, user
name, date, time and the number of printed pages for every print job. CIFS is a protocol that runs over TCP/IP,
allowing computers on a network to share files over an intranet or the Internet.
The following print functions are recorded in the print log:
• Print jobs from your computer
• USB Direct Print (supported models only)
• Copy
• Received Fax (supported models only)
• Web Connect Print (supported models only)
• The Store Print Log to Network feature supports Kerberos authentication and NTLMv2 authentication.
You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server), or you must set the date, time and time
zone correctly on the control panel for authentication.
• You can set the file type to TXT or CSV when storing a file to the server.
Related Information
• Store Print Log to Network
388
Home > Security > Store Print Log to Network > Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using
Web Based Management
Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using Web Based
Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Store Print Log to Network.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. In the Print Log field, click On.
6. Configure the following settings:
Option Description
Network Folder
Path
Type the destination folder where your print log will be stored on the CIFS server (for
example: \\ComputerName\SharedFolder).
File Name Type the file name you want to use for the print log (up to 32 characters).
File Type Select the TXT or CSV option for the print log file type.
Time Source
for Log
Select the time source for the print log.
Auth. Method Select the authentication method required for access to the CIFS server: Auto,
Kerberos, or NTLMv2. Kerberos is an authentication protocol which allows devices or
individuals to securely prove their identity to network servers using a single sign-on.
NTLMv2 is the authentication method used by Windows to log into servers.
• Auto: If you select Auto, NTLMv2 will be used to the authentication method.
• Kerberos: Select the Kerberos option to use Kerberos authentication only.
• NTLMv2: Select the NTLMv2 option to use NTLMv2 authentication only.
• For the Kerberos and NTLMv2 authentication, you must also configure
the Date&Time settings or the SNTP protocol (network time server) and
DNS server.
• You can also configure the Date & Time settings from the machine's
control panel.
Username Type the user name for the authentication (up to 96 characters).
If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of the
following styles: user@domain or domain\user.
Password Type the password for the authentication (up to 32 characters).
389
Option Description
Kerberos
Server Address
(if needed)
Type the Key Distribution Center (KDC) host address (for example:
kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters) or the IP address (for example:
192.168.56.189).
Error Detection
Setting
Choose what action should be taken when the print log cannot be stored to the server
due to a network error.
7. In the Connection Status field, confirm the last log status.
You can also confirm the error status on the LCD of your machine.
8. Click Submit to display the Test Print Log to Network page.
To test your settings, click Yes and then go to the next step.
To skip the test, click No. Your settings will be submitted automatically.
9. The machine will test your settings.
10. If your settings are accepted, Test OK appears on the screen.
If Test Error appears, check all settings, and then click Submit to display the Test page again.
Related Information
• Store Print Log to Network
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
390
Home > Security > Store Print Log to Network > Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection
Setting
Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection Setting
Use Error Detection Settings to determine the action that is taken when the print log cannot be stored to the
server due to a network error.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Store Print Log to Network.
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. In the Error Detection Setting section, select the Cancel Print or Ignore Log & Print option.
Option Description
Cancel
Print
If you select the Cancel Print option, the print jobs are canceled when the print log cannot be
stored to the server.
Even if you select the Cancel Print option, your machine will print a received fax.
(For MFC models)
Ignore
Log &
Print
If you select the Ignore Log & Print option, the machine prints the documentation even if the
print log cannot be stored to the server.
When the Store Print Log function has recovered, the print log is recorded as follows:
a. If the log cannot be stored at the end of printing, the number of printed pages will not be
recorded.
b. If the print log cannot be stored at the beginning and the end of printing, the print log of the
job will not be recorded. When the function has recovered, the error is reflected in the log.
6. Click Submit to display the Test Print Log to Network page.
To test your settings, click Yes and then go to the next step.
To skip the test, click No. Your settings will be submitted automatically.
7. The machine will test your settings.
8. If your settings are accepted, Test OK appears on the screen.
If Test Error appears, check all settings, and then click Submit to display the Test page again.
391
Home > Security > Store Print Log to Network > Use Store Print Log to Network with Secure Function Lock
3.0
Use Store Print Log to Network with Secure Function Lock 3.0
When Secure Function Lock 3.0 is active, the names of the registered users for copy, Fax RX (for MFC models),
Web Connect Print and USB Direct Print (if available) are recorded in the Store Print Log to Network report.
When the Active Directory Authentication is enabled, user name will be recorded in the Store Print Log to
Network report:
Related Information
• Store Print Log to Network
393
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel
Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel
Before turning on the machine's Setting Lock, write down and save your password. If you forget the password,
you must reset all passwords stored in the machine by contacting your administrator or Brother Customer
Service.
• Setting Lock Overview
394
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Setting Lock Overview
Setting Lock Overview
Use the Setting Lock feature to block unauthorized access to machine settings.
When Setting Lock is set to On, you cannot access the machine settings without entering the password.
• Set the Setting Lock Password
• Change the Setting Lock Password
• Turn On Setting Lock
395
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Setting Lock Overview > Set the
Setting Lock Password
Set the Setting Lock Password
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Setting Lock].
2. Enter a four-digit number for the password.
3. Press [OK].
4. When the LCD displays [Verify:], re-enter the password.
5. Press [OK].
6. Press .
Related Information
• Setting Lock Overview
396
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Setting Lock Overview > Change
the Setting Lock Password
Change the Setting Lock Password
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Setting Lock] > [Set
Password].
2. Enter the current four-digit password.
3. Press [OK].
4. Enter a new four-digit password.
5. Press [OK].
6. When the LCD displays [Verify:], re-enter the password.
7. Press [OK].
8. Press
.
Related Information
• Setting Lock Overview
397
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Setting Lock Overview > Turn On
Setting Lock
Turn On Setting Lock
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Setting Lock] > [Lock
Off⇒On].
2. Enter the current four-digit password.
3. Press [OK].
To turn off Setting Lock, press on the LCD, enter the current four-digit password, and then press [OK].
Related Information
• Setting Lock Overview
398
Home > Security > Use Global Network Detection Features
Use Global Network Detection Features
When you use your machine on a private network, use the Global Network Detection feature to avoid a risk from
unexpected attacks from the global network.
• Enable Global IP Address Detection
• Block Communications from the Global Network
399
Home > Security > Use Global Network Detection Features > Enable Global IP Address Detection
Enable Global IP Address Detection
Use this feature to check your machine's IP address. When your machine is assigned to a global IP address, an
alert is displayed on the machine.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Global Detect] > [Allow Detect] >
[On].
2. Press .
Related Information
• Use Global Network Detection Features
400
Home > Security > Use Global Network Detection Features > Block Communications from the Global
Network
Block Communications from the Global Network
When you enable this feature, it limits receiving jobs from devices with global IP addresses
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Global Detect] > [Reject Access]
> [On].
2. Press
.
Related Information
• Use Global Network Detection Features
401
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect
Brother Web Connect
• Brother Web Connect Overview
• Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect
• Set Up Brother Web Connect
• Scan and Upload Documents Using Brother Web Connect
• Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect
• FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
403
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Brother Web Connect Overview
Brother Web Connect Overview
Certain websites provide services that allow users to upload and view images and files on the websites. Your
Brother machine can scan images and upload them to these services, and also download and print images that
are already uploaded to these services.
1. Printing
2. Scanning
3. Photos, images, documents, and other files
4. Web Service
To use Brother Web Connect, your Brother machine must be connected to a network that has access to the
Internet, through either a wired or wireless connection.
For network setups that use a proxy server, the machine must also be configured to use a proxy server. If you
are unsure of your network configuration, check with your network administrator.
A proxy server is a computer that serves as an intermediary between computers without a direct Internet
connection, and the Internet.
Related Information
• Brother Web Connect
• Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel
404
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Brother Web Connect Overview > Configure the
Proxy Server Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel
Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel
If your network uses a proxy server, the following proxy server information must be configured on the machine:
• Proxy server address
• Port number
• User Name
• Password
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Web Connect Settings] > [Proxy
Settings] > [Proxy Connection] > [On].
2. Press the option that you want to set, and then enter the proxy server information.
3. Press [OK].
4. Press .
Related Information
• Brother Web Connect Overview
Related Topics:
• Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management
405
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect
Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect
Use Brother Web Connect to access services from your Brother machine:
To use Brother Web Connect, you must have an account with the online service you want to use. If you do not
already have an account, use a computer to access the service's website and create an account.
If you already have an account, there is no need to create an additional account.
Google Drive
™
An online document storage, editing, sharing, and file synchronization service.
URL: drive.google.com
Evernote
®
An online file storage and management service.
URL: www.evernote.com
Dropbox
An online file storage, sharing, and synchronization service.
URL: www.dropbox.com
OneDrive
An online file storage, sharing, and managing service.
URL:
onedrive.live.com
Box
An online document editing and sharing service.
URL: www.box.com
OneNote
An online document editing and sharing service.
URL:
www.onenote.com
SharePoint Online
An online content storage, sharing, and managing service.
For more information about any of these services, refer to the respective service's website.
The following table describes which file types can be used with each Brother Web Connect feature:
Accessible Services
Google Drive
™
Evernote
®
Dropbox
OneDrive
Box
OneNote
SharePoint Online
Download and print images
1
JPEG
PDF
DOCX
XLSX
PPTX
Upload scanned images JPEG
PDF
2
DOCX
XLSX
406
Accessible Services
Google Drive
™
Evernote
®
Dropbox
OneDrive
Box
OneNote
SharePoint Online
PPTX
TIFF
XPS
FaxForward to the online
services
(available only for certain
models)
JPEG
PDF
TIFF
1
DOC/XLS/PPT formats are also available for downloading and printing images.
2
For uploading scanned images, PDF includes Searchable PDF, Signed PDF, Secure PDF, PDF/A and High Compression PDF.
(For Hong Kong, Taiwan and Korea)
Brother Web Connect supports only file names written in English. Files named in the local language will not
be downloaded.
Related Information
• Brother Web Connect
407
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect
Set Up Brother Web Connect
• Brother Web Connect Setup Overview
• Create an Account for Each Online Service Before Using Brother Web Connect
• Apply for Brother Web Connect Access
• Register an Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect
408
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Brother Web
Connect Setup Overview
Brother Web Connect Setup Overview
Configure the Brother Web Connect settings using the following procedure:
Step 1: Create an account with the service you want to use.
Access the service's website using a computer and create an account. (If you already have an account, there
is no need to create an additional account.)
1. User registration
2. Web Service
3. Obtain account
Step 2: Apply for Brother Web Connect access.
Start Brother Web Connect access using a computer and obtain a temporary ID.
1. Enter account information
2. Brother Web Connect application page
3. Obtain temporary ID
Step 3: Register your account information on your machine so you can access the service you want to
use.
Enter the temporary ID to enable the service on your machine. Specify the account name as you would like it
to be displayed on the machine, and enter a PIN if you would like to use one.
1. Enter temporary ID
2. Web Service
Your Brother machine can now use the service.
409
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Create an Account
for Each Online Service Before Using Brother Web Connect
Create an Account for Each Online Service Before Using Brother Web
Connect
To use Brother Web Connect to access an online service, you must have an account with that online service. If
you do not already have an account, use a computer to access the service's website and create an account.
After creating an account, log on and use the account once with a computer before using the Brother Web
Connect feature. Otherwise, you may not be able to access the service using Brother Web Connect.
If you already have an account, there is no need to create an additional account.
When you have created an account with the online service you want to use, apply for Brother Web Connect
access.
Related Information
• Set Up Brother Web Connect
411
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Apply for Brother
Web Connect Access
Apply for Brother Web Connect Access
To use Brother Web Connect to access online services, you must first apply for Brother Web Connect access
using a computer that has the Brother Software installed.
1. Access the Brother Web Connect application website:
Option Description
Windows Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name
(if not already selected).
Click Do More in the left navigation bar, and then click Brother Web Connect.
You can also access the website directly:
Type bwc.brother.com into your web browser's address bar.
Mac Type bwc.brother.com into your web browser's address bar.
The Brother Web Connect page launches.
2. Select the service you want to use.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions and apply for access.
When using SharePoint Online, follow the on-screen instructions to register a document library.
When finished, your temporary ID appears.
4. Make a note of your temporary ID as you will need it to register accounts to the machine. The temporary ID is
valid for 24 hours.
5. Close the web browser.
Now that you have a Brother Web Connect access ID, you must register this ID on your machine, and then use
your machine to access the web service you want to use.
Related Information
• Set Up Brother Web Connect
412
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Register an
Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect
Register an Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect
You must enter your Brother Web Connect account information and configure your machine so that it can use
Brother Web Connect to access the service you want.
• You must apply for Brother Web Connect access to register an account on your machine.
• Before you register an account, confirm that the correct date and time are set on the machine.
1. Swipe to display the [Web] option.
2. Press [Web].
• If the information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
3. If the information regarding license agreement appears, make your selection and follow the on-screen
instructions.
4. Select the service with which you want to register.
5. Press the service name.
6. If information regarding Brother Web Connect appears, press [OK].
7. Press [Register/Delete].
8. Press [Register Account].
The machine will prompt you to enter the temporary ID you received when you applied for Brother Web
Connect access.
9. Press [OK].
10. Enter the temporary ID using the LCD.
11. Press [OK].
An error message will appear on the LCD if the information you entered does not match the temporary ID
you received when you applied for access, or if the temporary ID has expired. Enter the temporary ID
correctly, or apply for access again to receive a new temporary ID.
The machine will prompt you to enter the account name that you want to be displayed on the LCD.
12. Press [OK].
13. Enter the name using the LCD.
14. Press [OK].
15. Do one of the following:
• To set a PIN for the account, press [Yes]. (A PIN prevents unauthorized access to the account.) Enter a
four-digit number, and then press [OK].
• If you do not want to set a PIN, press [No].
16. When the account information you entered appears, confirm that it is correct.
17. Press [Yes] to register your information as entered.
18. Press [OK].
19. Press .
Registration is complete and your machine can now access the service.
414
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Scan and Upload Documents Using Brother Web
Connect
Scan and Upload Documents Using Brother Web Connect
Upload your scanned photos and documents directly to a web service without using a computer.
Uploaded documents are saved in an album named From_BrotherDevice.
For information regarding restrictions, such as the size or number of documents that can be uploaded, refer to
the respective service's website.
If you are a restricted Web Connect user, due to the enabled Secure Function Lock feature (available for
certain models), you cannot upload the scanned data.
1. Load your document.
2. Swipe to display the [Web] option.
3. Press [Web].
• You can also press [Scan] > [to Web].
• If the information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
4. Select the service that hosts the account to which you want to upload.
5. Select your account name.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete this operation.
Related Information
• Brother Web Connect
416
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Download and Print Documents Using Brother
Web Connect
Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect
Documents that have been uploaded to your account can be downloaded directly to your machine and printed.
Documents that other users have uploaded to their own accounts for sharing can also be downloaded to your
machine and printed, as long as you have viewing privileges for those documents.
If you are a restricted user for Brother Web Connect due to the enabled Secure Function Lock feature (available
for certain models), you cannot download the data.
The Secure Function Lock Page Limit feature also applies to print jobs sent using Brother Web Connect.
For Hong Kong, Taiwan and Korea:
Brother Web Connect supports only file names written in English. Files named in the local language will not
be downloaded.
Related Information
• Brother Web Connect
• Download and Print Using Web Services
417
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Download and Print Documents Using Brother
Web Connect > Download and Print Using Web Services
Download and Print Using Web Services
1. Swipe to display the [Web] option.
2. Press [Web].
• If the information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
3. Select the service that hosts the document you want to download and print.
4. If the PIN entry screen appears, enter the four-digit PIN and press [OK].
Depending on the service, you may have to select the account name from a list.
5. Press [Download: Print].
6. Select the album you want. Some services do not require documents to be saved in albums. For documents
not saved in albums, select [See Unsorted Files] to select documents.
An album is a collection of images. The actual term may differ depending on the service you use. When
using Evernote
®
, you must select the notebook, and then select the note.
7. Select the thumbnail of the document you want to print. Confirm the document on the LCD and then press
[OK]. Select additional documents to print (you can select up to 10 documents).
8. When finished, press [OK].
9. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete this operation.
Related Information
• Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect
Related Topics:
• How to Enter Text on Your Machine
418
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
• Use the FaxForward to Cloud feature to automatically forward incoming faxes to your accounts with the
available online services.
1
1. Web Service
• Use the FaxForward to E-mail feature to automatically forward incoming faxes to an inbox as email
attachments.
Related Information
• Brother Web Connect
• Use FaxForward to Forward a Fax to the Cloud or an Email
• Stop Using FaxForward to Forward a Fax to an Email or a Cloud location
419
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail > Use FaxForward
to Forward a Fax to the Cloud or an Email
Use FaxForward to Forward a Fax to the Cloud or an Email
Turn on the FaxForward feature to automatically forward incoming faxes to either an online service or an inbox
as email attachments.
• If you are a restricted Apps or Fax Receive user, due to the enabled Secure Function Lock feature
(available for certain models), you cannot upload the incoming faxes.
• This feature is available only for black and white faxes.
• If you turn on the FaxForward to Cloud feature, you cannot use the following options:
- [Fax Forward]
- [Fax Storage]
- [PC Fax Receive]
- [Forward to Network]
1. Swipe to display the [Apps] option.
2. Press [Apps].
• If the information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
3. Select [FaxForward to Cloud/E-mail].
If the information regarding [FaxForward to Cloud/E-mail] appears, read it, and then press [OK].
4. Press [On].
5. Press [Forward to Cloud] or [Forward to E-mail].
• If you selected [Forward to Cloud], choose the online service you want to receive the faxes, and
then specify your account name.
• If you selected [Forward to E-mail], enter the email address you want to receive the faxes as email
attachments.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete this operation.
Related Information
• FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
420
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail > Stop Using
FaxForward to Forward a Fax to an Email or a Cloud location
Stop Using FaxForward to Forward a Fax to an Email or a Cloud
location
Turn off the FaxForward feature when you want to stop incoming faxes from automatically going to either an
online service or an inbox as email attachments.
If there are received faxes still in your machine's memory, you cannot turn off the FaxForward feature.
1. Swipe to display the [Apps] option.
2. Press [Apps].
• If the information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information
and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes].
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK].
3. Select [FaxForward to Cloud/E-mail].
If the information regarding [FaxForward to Cloud/E-mail] appears, read it, and then press [OK].
4. Press [Off].
5. Press [OK].
Related Information
• FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
421
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > AirPrint Overview
AirPrint Overview
AirPrint is a printing solution for Apple operating systems that allows you
to wirelessly print photos, email, web pages, and documents from your
iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, and Mac computer without the need to install a
driver.
AirPrint also allows you to send faxes directly from your Mac computer
without having to print them and allows you to scan documents to your
Mac computer.
For more information, visit Apple’s website.
Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been
designed to work specifically with the technology identified in the badge
and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance
standards.
Related Information
• AirPrint
Related Topics:
• AirPrint Problems
423
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Before Using AirPrint (macOS)
Before Using AirPrint (macOS)
Before printing using macOS, add your machine to the printer list on your Mac computer.
1. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu.
2. Click Printers & Scanners.
3. Click the + icon below the Printers pane on the left.
The Add Printer screen appears.
4. Do one of the following:
• macOS v12
Select your machine, and then select your model's name from the Use pop-up menu.
• macOS v11
Select your machine, and then select AirPrint from the Use pop-up menu.
5. Click Add.
Related Information
• AirPrint
424
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Print Using AirPrint > Print from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch
Print from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch
The procedure used to print may vary by application. Safari is used in the example below.
1. Make sure your machine is turned on.
2. Load the paper in the paper tray and change the paper tray settings on your machine.
3. Use Safari to open the page that you want to print.
4. Tap
or .
5. Tap Print.
6. Make sure your machine is selected.
7. If a different machine (or no machine) is selected, tap Printer.
A list of available machines appears.
8. Tap your machine's name in the list.
9. Select the options you want, such as the number of pages to print and 2-sided printing (if supported by your
machine).
10. Tap Print.
Related Information
• Print Using AirPrint
426
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Print Using AirPrint > Print Using AirPrint (macOS)
Print Using AirPrint (macOS)
The procedure used to print may vary by application. Safari is used in the example below. Before printing,
make sure your machine is in the printer list on your Mac computer.
1. Make sure your machine is turned on.
2. Load the paper in the paper tray and change the paper tray settings on your machine.
3. On your Mac computer, use Safari to open the page that you want to print.
4. Click the File menu, and then select Print.
5. Make sure your machine is selected. If a different machine (or no machine) is selected, click the Printer pop-
up menu, and then select your machine.
6. Select the desired options, such as the number of pages to print and 2-sided printing (if supported by your
machine).
7. Click Print.
Related Information
• Print Using AirPrint
Related Topics:
• Before Using AirPrint (macOS)
427
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Scan Using AirPrint (macOS)
Scan Using AirPrint (macOS)
Before scanning, make sure your machine is in the scanner list on your Mac computer.
1. Load your document.
2. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu.
3. Click Printers & Scanners.
4. Select your machine from the scanner list.
5. Click the Scan tab, and then click the Open Scanner… button.
The Scanner screen appears.
6. If you place the document in the ADF, select Use Document Feeder checkbox, and then select the size of
your document from the scan size setting pop-up menu.
7. Select the destination folder or destination application from the destination setting pop-up menu.
8. Click Show Details to change the scanning settings if needed.
You can crop the image manually by dragging the mouse pointer over the portion you want to scan when
scanning from the scanner glass.
9. Click Scan.
Related Information
• AirPrint
Related Topics:
• Before Using AirPrint (macOS)
428
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Send a Fax Using AirPrint (macOS)
Send a Fax Using AirPrint (macOS)
Make sure your machine is in the printer list on your Mac computer. Apple TextEdit is used in the example
below.
AirPrint supports only black and white fax documents.
1. Make sure your machine is turned on.
2. On your Mac computer, open the file that you want to send as a fax.
3. Click the File menu, and then select Print.
4. Click the Printer pop-up menu, and then select your model with Fax in the name.
5. Type the fax recipient information.
6. Click Fax.
Related Information
• AirPrint
Related Topics:
• Before Using AirPrint (macOS)
429
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Mopria
™
Print Service and Mopria
™
Scan
Mopria
™
Print Service and Mopria
™
Scan
Mopria
™
Print Service is a print feature and Mopria
™
Scan is a scan feature on
Android
™
mobile devices developed by the Mopria Alliance
™
. With this service,
you can connect to the same network as your machine to print and scan without
additional setup.
1
2
3
1. Android
™
Mobile Device
2. Wi-Fi
®
Connection
3. Your Machine
You must download the Mopria
™
Print Service or Mopria
™
Scan from Google Play
™
and install it on your
Android
™
device. Before using these Mopria
™
features, make sure you enable them on your mobile device.
Related Information
• Mobile/Web Connect
430
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Mobile Connect
Brother Mobile Connect
Use Brother Mobile Connect to print and scan from your mobile device.
• For Android
™
devices:
Brother Mobile Connect allows you to use your Brother machine's features directly from your Android
™
device.
Download and install Brother Mobile Connect from Google Play
™
.
• For all iOS or iPadOS supported devices including iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch:
Brother Mobile Connect allows you to use your Brother machine's features directly from your iOS or iPadOS
device.
Download and install Brother Mobile Connect from the App Store.
Related Information
• Mobile/Web Connect
Related Topics:
• Brother iPrint&Scan
• Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
431
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Register an External IC Card Reader
Register an External IC Card Reader
When you connect an external IC card reader, use Web Based Management to register the card reader. Your
machine supports HID class driver supported external IC card readers.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > External Card Reader.
If the left navigation bar is not visible, start navigating from .
5. Enter the necessary information.
6. Click Submit.
7. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
Related Information
• Mobile/Web Connect
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
432
Home > Brother iPrint&Scan > Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
Use Brother iPrint&Scan for Windows and Mac to print and scan from your computer.
The following screen shows an example of Brother iPrint&Scan for Windows. The actual screen may differ
depending on the version of the application.
• For Windows
Go to your model's Downloads page at
support.brother.com/downloads to download the latest application.
• For Mac
Download and install Brother iPrint&Scan from the App Store.
If prompted, install the driver and software necessary to use your machine. Download the installer from
your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
Related Information
• Brother iPrint&Scan
Related Topics:
• Brother Mobile Connect
• Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
434
Home > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Use this section to resolve typical problems you may encounter when using your machine. You can correct most
problems yourself.
IMPORTANT
For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be made from within
that country.
If you need additional help, visit support.brother.com.
First, check the following:
• The machine's power cord is connected correctly and the machine's power is on. See the Quick Setup Guide.
• All of the protective materials have been removed. See the Quick Setup Guide.
• Paper is loaded correctly in the paper tray.
• The interface cables are securely connected to the machine and the computer, or the wireless connection is
set up on both the machine and your computer.
• Error and maintenance messages
If you did not solve the problem with the checks, identify the problem and then see Related Information.
Related Information
• Error and Maintenance Messages
• Error Messages When Using the Brother Web Connect Feature
• Document Jams
• Paper Jams
• Printing Problems
• Improve the Print Quality
• Telephone and Fax Problems
• Network Problems
• AirPrint Problems
• Other Problems
• Check the Machine Information
• Reset Your Machine
435
Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages
Error and Maintenance Messages
As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur and supply items may have to be replaced. If this
happens, your machine identifies the error or required routine maintenance and shows the appropriate message.
The most common error and maintenance messages are shown in the table.
Follow the instructions in the Action column to solve the error and remove the message.
You can correct most errors and perform routine maintenance by yourself. If you need more tips: Visit
support.brother.com/faqs.
Error Message Cause Action
2-sided Disabled
The back cover of the machine
is not closed completely.
Close the back cover of the machine until it locks
in the closed position.
The 2-sided tray is not installed
completely.
Install the 2-sided tray firmly in the machine.
Access Denied
The function you want to use is
restricted by Secure Function
Lock 3.0.
Ask your administrator to check your Secure
Function Lock Settings.
Calibration
Calibration failed.
• Press and hold down to turn off the
machine. Wait a few seconds, and then turn it
on again. Perform the color correction again
using the LCD.
• Install a new belt unit.
• If the problem continues, contact Brother
Customer Service or your local Brother dealer.
Cannot Detect
Your machine cannot detect the
toner cartridge.
Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit
assembly for the color that is indicated on the
LCD. Take out the toner cartridge, and put it back
into the drum unit again. Re-install the toner
cartridge and drum unit assembly back in the
machine.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner
Cartridge.
Cannot Print ##
The machine has a mechanical
problem.
• Press and hold to turn off the machine,
wait a few minutes, and then turn it on again.
• If the problem continues, contact Brother
Customer Service or your local Brother dealer.
Contact Brother Customer Service at:
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in USA)
www.brother.ca/support (in Canada)
or to locate a Brother Authorized Service
Center, visit:
www.brother-usa.com/support.
Cannot Scan
The document is too long for
2‑sided scanning.
Press . For 2-sided scanning, use Letter,
Legal, Mexico Legal, India Legal, or Folio size
paper. Other paper must be within the following
size:
Length: 5.8 to 14.0 in. (147.3 to 355.6 mm)
Width: 4.1 in. to 8.5 in. (105 mm to 215.9 mm)
436
Error Message Cause Action
Cannot Scan ## The machine has a mechanical
problem.
• Press and hold to turn off the machine,
and then turn it on again.
• If the problem continues, contact Brother
Customer Service or your local Brother dealer.
Contact Brother Customer Service at:
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in USA)
www.brother.ca/support (in Canada)
or to locate a Brother Authorized Service
Center, visit:
www.brother-usa.com/support
Cartridge Error
The toner cartridge is not
installed correctly.
Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit
assembly for the color that is indicated on the
LCD. Take out the toner cartridge, and put it back
into the drum unit again. Install the toner cartridge
and drum unit assembly back in the machine.
If the problem continues, contact Brother
Customer Service or your local Brother dealer.
Comm.Error
Poor telephone line quality
caused a communication error.
Send the fax again or connect the machine to
another telephone line. If the problem continues,
contact the telephone company and ask them to
check your telephone line.
Condensation
Condensation may have formed
inside the machine after a room
temperature change.
Leave the machine turned on. Wait for 30 minutes
with the top cover in the open position. Then turn
off the machine and close the cover. Turn it on
again.
Cooling Down
The temperature inside the
machine is too high. The
machine pauses its current print
job and goes into cooling down
mode.
Wait until the machine has finished cooling down.
Make sure all vents on the machine are clear of
obstructions.
When the machine has cooled down, it will
resume printing.
Cover is Open
The top cover is not completely
closed.
Open and then firmly close the top cover of the
machine.
The fuser cover is not
completely closed.
Close the fuser cover located under the back
cover of the machine.
Cover is Open.
The ADF cover is not
completely closed.
Close the ADF cover.
Disconnected
The other person or other
person's fax machine stopped
the call.
Try to send or receive again.
If calls are stopped repeatedly and you are using
a VoIP (Voice over IP) system, try changing the
Compatibility to Basic (for VoIP).
Document Jam
The document was not inserted
or fed correctly, or the
document scanned from the
ADF was too long.
Remove the jammed paper from the ADF unit.
Clear any debris or scraps of paper from the ADF
unit paper path.
Press .
DR Mode in Use
The machine is set to
Distinctive Ring mode. You
cannot change the Receive
Mode from Manual to another
mode.
Set Distinctive Ring to Off.
437
Error Message Cause Action
Drum !
The corona wires on the drum
unit must be cleaned.
Clean the corona wires on the drum unit.
See Related Information: Clean the Corona
Wires.
If the problem continues, replace the drum unit
with a new one.
Drum Stop
It is time to replace the drum
unit.
Replace the drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
Jam 2-sided
The paper is jammed in the 2-
sided tray or inside the back
cover.
Remove the 2-sided tray and open the back cover
to pull out all jammed paper.
Jam Inside
The paper is jammed inside the
machine.
Open the top cover, remove the toner cartridge
and drum unit assemblies, and gently remove the
jammed paper. Reinstall the toner cartridge and
drum unit assemblies into the machine. Close the
top cover.
Jam MP Tray
The paper is jammed in the MP
tray.
Gently remove the jammed paper from in and
around the MP tray. Reload the paper and press
Retry.
Jam Rear
The paper is jammed in the
back of the machine.
Open the fuser cover and gently remove the
jammed paper. Close the fuser cover. If the error
message remains, press Retry.
Jam Tray 1
Jam Tray 2
The paper is jammed in the
indicated paper tray.
Pull out the paper tray and gently remove all
jammed paper as shown in the animation on the
LCD.
Limit Exceeded
The print limit set in Secure
Function Lock 3.0 was reached.
Ask your administrator to check your Secure
Function Lock Settings.
Media Type Mismatch
The media type specified in the
printer driver differs from the
paper type specified in the
machine's menu.
Load the correct type of paper in the tray
indicated on the LCD, and then select the correct
media type in the Paper Type setting on the
machine.
No Belt Unit
The belt unit is not installed or
not installed correctly.
Reinstall the belt unit.
No Drum Unit
The drum unit is not installed
correctly.
Reinstall the toner cartridge and drum unit
assembly.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
No HUB Support
A USB hub device is connected
to the USB host connector.
Disconnect the USB hub device from the USB
host connector.
No Paper
The machine is out of paper, or
paper is not loaded correctly in
the paper tray.
• Refill paper in the paper tray. Make sure the
paper guides are set to the correct size.
• If paper is in the tray, remove it and load it
again. Make sure the paper guides are set to
the correct size.
• Do not overfill the paper tray.
438
Error Message Cause Action
No Paper MP Tray
The MP tray is out of paper, or
paper is not loaded correctly in
the MP tray.
Do one of the following:
• Refill paper in the MP tray. Make sure the
paper guides are set to the correct size.
• If paper is in the MP tray, remove it and load it
again. Make sure the paper guides are set to
the correct size.
No Paper Tray1
No Paper Tray2
The machine failed to feed
paper from the indicated paper
tray.
Do one of the following:
• Refill paper in the paper tray indicated on the
LCD. Make sure the paper guides are set to
the correct size.
• If paper is in the tray, remove it and load it
again. Make sure the paper guides are set to
the correct size.
• Do not overfill the paper tray.
No Toner
The toner cartridge is not
installed or not installed
correctly.
Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit
assembly. Remove the toner cartridge from the
drum unit, and reinstall the toner cartridge back
into the drum unit. Reinstall the toner cartridge
and drum unit assembly back in the machine. If
the problem continues, replace the toner
cartridge.
No Tray T1
No Tray T2
The paper tray is not installed
or not installed correctly.
Reinstall the paper tray indicated on the LCD.
No Waste Toner
The waste toner box is not
installed or not installed
correctly.
Reinstall the waste toner box.
Out of Fax Memory
The machine's fax memory is
full.
If you are using the Fax Preview function, delete
unwanted received fax data.
If you are using the Memory Receive function and
are not using the Fax Preview function, print
received fax data.
See Related Information: Print a Fax Stored in the
Machine's Memory.
Out of Memory
The machine's memory is full. If a fax-sending or copy operation is in
progress, do one of the following:
• Press Send Now to send the pages scanned
so far.
• Press Partial Print to copy the pages
scanned so far.
• Press Quit or and wait until the other
operations that are in progress finish, and then
try again.
If a scan operation is in progress, do one of
the following:
• Split the document into multiple parts.
• Reduce the Resolution.
• Reduce the File Size.
• Select the high compression PDF file type.
• Clear faxes from the memory.
If a print operation is in progress, press
and
reduce the print resolution.
Print Data Full
The machine’s memory is full.
Press and delete the previously stored
secure print data.
439
Error Message Cause Action
Registration
Registration failed.
• Press and hold down to turn off the
machine. Wait a few seconds, and then turn it
on again. Perform the color correction again
using the LCD.
• Install a new belt unit.
• If the problem continues, contact Brother
Customer Service or your local Brother dealer.
Replace Toner
The toner cartridge is at the end
of its life. The machine stops all
print operations.
While memory is available,
faxes are stored in the memory.
Replace the toner cartridge for the color indicated
on the LCD.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner
Cartridge.
Replace WT Box
It is time to replace the waste
toner box.
Replace the waste toner box with a new one.
See Related Information: Replace the Waste
Toner Box.
Self-Diagnostic
The temperature of the fuser
unit does not rise to a specified
temperature within the specified
time.
Press and hold to turn off the machine, wait a
few seconds, and then turn it on again. Leave the
machine idle for 15 minutes with the power on.
The fuser unit is too hot.
Size Error
The paper size defined in the
printer driver is not supported
by the defined tray.
Choose a paper size supported by the defined
tray.
Size Error 2-sided
The paper size specified in the
machine's paper size setting is
not available for automatic 2-
sided printing.
Press (if required).
Load the correct size of paper in the tray and set
the tray for that paper size.
Choose a paper size supported by 2-sided
printing.
Paper sizes available for automatic 2-sided
printing are Letter, Legal, Mexico Legal, India
Legal, and Folio.
The paper in the tray is not the
correct size and is not available
for automatic 2-sided printing.
Size Mismatch
The paper in the tray is not the
correct size.
Load the correct size of paper in the tray and set
the size of paper for the tray.
Storage Full
The machine's memory does
not have enough free space to
store secure print data.
Press and delete the previously stored
secure print data.
Supplies
Belt End Soon
The belt unit is near the end of
its life.
Order a new belt unit before the LCD displays
Replace Belt.
Supplies
Drum End Soon
The drum unit is near the end of
its life.
Order a new drum unit before the LCD displays
Replace Drum.
Supplies
Replace Belt
It is time to replace the belt unit. Replace the belt unit with a new one.
See Related Information: Replace the Belt Unit.
Supplies
Replace Drum
It is time to replace the drum
unit.
Replace the drum unit for the color indicated on
the LCD.
If this message is displayed
even after replacing the drum
unit with new one, the drum unit
counter was not reset.
Reset the drum unit counter.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
440
Error Message Cause Action
Supplies
Toner Low X
(X indicates the toner cartridge
or drum unit color that is near
the end of its life. BK=Black,
C=Cyan, M=Magenta,
Y=Yellow.)
If the LCD displays this
message, you can still print.
The toner cartridge is near the
end of its life.
Order a new toner cartridge before the LCD
displays Replace Toner.
Supplies
WT Box End Soon
The waste toner box is almost
full.
Order a new waste toner box before the LCD
displays Replace WT Box.
Toner Error
One or more toner cartridges
are not installed or not installed
correctly.
Pull out the drum units. Remove all the toner
cartridges, and then put them back into the drum
units.
Too Many Trays
The number of installed
Optional Trays exceeds the
maximum number.
Reduce the number of Optional Trays.
Touchscreen
Initialization Failed
The touchscreen was pressed
before the power on
initialization was completed.
Make sure nothing is touching the touchscreen.
Debris may be stuck between
the lower part of the
touchscreen and its frame.
Insert a piece of stiff paper between the lower part
of the touchscreen and its frame and slide it back
and forth to push out any debris.
Unusable Device
An unsupported USB device
has been connected to the USB
host connector.
Unplug the device from the USB host connector.
Unusable Device
Remove the Device. Turn
the power off and back
on again.
A defective USB device or a
high power consumption USB
device has been connected to
the USB direct interface.
• Unplug the device from the USB direct
interface.
• Press and hold to turn off the machine,
and then turn it on again.
Wrong Paper Size MP
Wrong Paper Size T1
Wrong Paper Size T2
The specified tray ran out of
paper during copying and the
machine could not feed the
same size paper from the next
priority tray.
Refill the paper in the paper tray.
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
• Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes
Related Topics:
• Load and Print Using the Paper Tray
• Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
• Replace Supplies
• Replace the Toner Cartridge
• Replace the Drum Unit
• Replace the Belt Unit
• Replace the Waste Toner Box
• Clean the Corona Wires
• Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory
441
Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages > Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your
Faxes
Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes
If the LCD displays:
• [Cannot Print] ##
• [Cannot Scan] ##
We recommend transferring your faxes to another fax machine or to your computer.
You can also transfer the Fax Journal report to see if there are any faxes you must transfer.
If there is an error message on the LCD after you transfer the faxes, disconnect your Brother machine from
the power source for several minutes, and then reconnect it.
Related Information
• Error and Maintenance Messages
• Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine
• Transfer Faxes to Your Computer
• Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine
442
Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages > Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your
Faxes > Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine
Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine
You must set up your Station ID before transferring faxes to another fax machine.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Service] > [Data Transfer] > [Fax Transfer].
2. Do one of the following:
• If the LCD displays [No Data], there are no faxes left in the machine’s memory. Press [Close]. Press
.
• Enter the fax number to which faxes will be forwarded.
3. Press [Fax Start].
Related Information
• Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes
Related Topics:
• Set Your Station ID
443
Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages > Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your
Faxes > Transfer Faxes to Your Computer
Transfer Faxes to Your Computer
1. Make sure you have installed the software and drivers on your computer.
2. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Receive.
The PC-FAX Receive window appears.
3. Make sure you have set [PC Fax Receive] on the machine.
If faxes are in the machine’s memory when you set up PC-Fax Receive, the LCD displays [Send Fax to
PC?].
4. Do one of the following:
• To transfer all faxes to your computer, press [Yes].
• To exit and leave the faxes in the memory, press [No].
5. Press .
Related Information
• Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes
Related Topics:
• Run the Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
• Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer Received Faxes to Your Computer (Windows only)
444
Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages > Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your
Faxes > Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine
Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine
You must set up your Station ID before transferring the Fax Journal report to another fax machine.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Service] > [Data Transfer] > [Report
Transfer].
2. Enter the fax number to which the Fax Journal report will be forwarded.
3. Press [Fax Start].
Related Information
• Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes
Related Topics:
• Set Your Station ID
445
Home > Troubleshooting > Error Messages When Using the Brother Web Connect Feature
Error Messages When Using the Brother Web Connect Feature
Your machine displays an error message if an error occurs. The most common error messages are shown in the
table.
You can correct most errors yourself. If, after reading this table, you still need help, see the latest troubleshooting
tips at support.brother.com/faqs.
Connection Error
Error Messages
Cause Action
Connection Error 02
Network connection failed.
Verify that the network
connection is good.
The machine is not connected to a
network.
• Make sure the eligible IP address
is assigned to your machine.
• Check your access point/router is
active and the Internet connection
is established.
• Make sure the wireless router/
access point is on.
• If the Web button was pressed
soon after the machine was turned
on, the network connection may
not have been established yet.
Wait and try again.
Connection Error 03
Connection failed to server.
Check network settings.
• Network or server settings are
incorrect.
• There is a problem with the
network or server.
• Confirm that network settings are
correct, or wait and try again later.
• If the Web button was pressed
soon after the machine was turned
on, the network connection may
not have been established yet.
Wait and try again.
See Related Information: Configure
Date and Time Using Web Based
Management.
Connection Error 07
Connection failed to server.
Wrong Date & Time.
Date and time settings are incorrect. Set the date and time correctly. Note
that if the machine's power cord is
disconnected, the date and time
settings may have reset to factory
settings.
Authentication Error
Error Messages
Cause Action
Authentication Error 01
Incorrect PIN code. Enter
PIN correctly.
The PIN you entered to access the
account is incorrect. The PIN is the
four-digit number that was entered
when registering the account to the
machine.
Enter the correct PIN.
Authentication Error 02
Incorrect or expired ID, or
this temporary ID is already
used. Enter correctly or
reissue temporary ID.
Temporary ID is valid for 24
hours after it is issued.
The temporary ID that was entered is
incorrect.
Enter the correct temporary ID.
The temporary ID that was entered
has expired. A temporary ID is valid
for 24 hours.
Apply for Brother Web Connect
access again and receive a new
temporary ID, and then use the new
ID to register the account to the
machine.
Authentication Error 03
The name you entered as the display
name has already been registered to
another service user.
Enter a different display name.
446
Error Messages Cause Action
Display name has already
been registered. Enter
another display name.
Server Error
Error Messages
Cause Action
Server Error 01
Authentication failed. Do
the following: 1. Go to
http://bwc.brother.com to
get a new temporary ID. 2.
Press OK and enter your new
temporary ID in the next
screen.
The machine's authentication
information (needed to access the
service) has expired or is invalid.
Apply for Brother Web Connect
access again to receive a new
temporary ID, and then use the new
ID to register the account to the
machine.
Server Error 03
Failed to upload.
Unsupported file or corrupt
data. Confirm data of file.
The file you are trying to upload may
have one of the following problems:
• The file exceeds the service's limit
on number of pixels, file size, etc.
• The file type is not supported.
• The file is corrupted.
• Check the service's size or format
restrictions.
• Save the file as a different type.
• If possible, get a new, uncorrupted
version of the file.
Server Error 13
Service temporarily
unavailable. Try again
later.
There is a problem with the service
and it cannot be used now.
Wait and try again. If you get the
message again, access the service
from a computer to confirm if it is
unavailable.
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
Related Topics:
• Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
447
Home > Troubleshooting > Document Jams > Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit
Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit
1. Remove any paper from the ADF that is not jammed.
2. Open the ADF cover.
3. Pull the jammed document out to the left. If the document rips or tears, be sure you remove any debris or
scraps to prevent future jams.
4. Close the ADF cover.
5. Press
.
Related Information
• Document Jams
449
Home > Troubleshooting > Document Jams > Document is Jammed under the Document Cover
Document is Jammed under the Document Cover
1. Remove any paper from the ADF that is not jammed.
2. Lift the document cover.
3. Pull the jammed document out to the right. If the document rips or tears, be sure you remove any debris or
scraps to prevent future jams.
4. Close the document cover.
5. Press .
Related Information
• Document Jams
450
Home > Troubleshooting > Document Jams > Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF
Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF
1. Lift the document cover.
2. Insert a piece of stiff paper, such as cardstock, into the ADF to push any small paper scraps through.
3. Close the document cover.
4. Press .
Related Information
• Document Jams
451
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams
Paper Jams
Always remove the remaining paper from the paper tray, fan and straighten the stack when you are adding new
paper. This helps prevent paper jams.
• Clear Paper Jams
• Paper is Jammed in the MP tray
• Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray
• Paper is Jammed in the Output Paper Tray
• Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine
• Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine
• Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray
452
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Clear Paper Jams
Clear Paper Jams
If paper is jammed or multiple sheets of paper are fed together frequently, do the following:
• Clean the paper pick-up rollers and the separator pad of paper trays.
See Related Information: Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers.
• Load paper correctly in the tray.
See Related Information: Load Paper.
• Set the correct paper size and paper type on your machine.
See Related Information: Paper Settings.
• Set the correct paper size and paper type on your computer.
See Related Information: Print a Document (Windows).
See Related Information: Print Using AirPrint.
• Use the recommended paper.
See Related Information: Using Special Paper.
See Related Information: Recommended Print Media.
Related Information
• Paper Jams
Related Topics:
• Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
• Load Paper
• Paper Settings
• Print a Document (Windows)
• Print Using AirPrint
• Using Special Paper
• Recommended Print Media
453
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the MP tray
Paper is Jammed in the MP tray
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the machine's MP tray, follow
these steps:
1. Remove the paper from the MP tray.
2. Remove any jammed paper from in and around the MP tray.
3. Fan the paper stack, and then put it back in the MP tray.
4. Reload paper in the MP tray and make sure the paper stays under the maximum paper height guides (1) on
both sides of the tray.
1
5. Follow the instructions on the machine's LCD.
Related Information
• Paper Jams
454
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray
Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the paper tray, follow these
steps:
1. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
2. Slowly pull out the jammed paper.
Pulling the jammed paper downward using both hands allows you to remove the paper more easily.
3. Fan the stack of paper to prevent further jams, and slide the paper guides to fit the paper size. Load paper in
the paper tray.
4. Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (b b b).
455
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the Output Paper Tray
Paper is Jammed in the Output Paper Tray
When the paper is jammed in the output paper tray, follow these steps:
1. Use both hands to open the scanner.
2. Remove the paper.
3. Push the scanner down with both hands to close it.
Related Information
• Paper Jams
457
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine
Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the back of the machine (Jam
Rear), do the following:
1. Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes for the internal fan to cool the extremely hot parts inside the
machine.
2. Open the back cover.
3. Pull the green tabs at the left and right sides toward you to release the fuser cover.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
If the gray envelope levers inside the back cover are pulled down to the envelope position, lift these levers
to the original position before pulling the green tabs down.
458
4. Use both hands to gently pull the jammed paper out of the fuser unit.
5. Close the fuser cover.
If you print on envelopes, pull down the gray envelope levers to the envelope position again before printing.
6. Close the back cover until it locks in the closed position.
Related Information
• Paper Jams
459
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine
Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam inside the machine, follow these
steps:
1. Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes for the internal fan to cool the extremely hot parts inside the
machine.
2. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
3. Remove all of the toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies.
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with
disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the
illustration.
460
4. Gently remove the jammed paper slowly.
5. Reinsert each toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner
cartridge color to the same color label on the machine for all four toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies.
BK
C
M
Y
6. Close the machine's top cover.
Related Information
• Paper Jams
461
Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray
Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the 2-sided paper tray, follow
these steps:
1. Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes for the internal fan to cool the extremely hot parts inside the
machine.
2. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
3. At the back of the machine, pull the 2‑sided tray completely out of the machine.
4. Pull the jammed paper out of the machine or out of the 2‑sided tray.
462
5. Remove paper that may have jammed under the machine due to static electricity.
6. If paper is not caught inside the 2-sided tray, open the back cover.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
7. Use both hands to gently pull the jammed paper out of the back of the machine.
8. Close the back cover until it locks in the closed position.
9. Put the 2-sided tray firmly back in the rear of the machine.
10. Put the paper tray firmly back in the front of the machine.
Related Information
• Paper Jams
463
Home > Troubleshooting > Printing Problems
Printing Problems
If, after reading the information in this table, you still need help, see the latest troubleshooting tips at
support.brother.com/faqs.
Difficulties Suggestions
No printout Check the machine is not in Power Off mode.
If the machine is in Power Off mode, press
, and then
send the print data again.
Check that the correct printer driver has been installed
and selected.
Check to see if the Status Monitor or the machine's
control panel displays an error.
Check that the machine is online:
• Windows 11
Click
> All apps > Windows Tools > Control
Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View
devices and printers. Right-click your model's icon,
and click See what’s printing. If printer driver options
appear, select your printer driver. Click Printer in the
menu bar and make sure Use Printer Offline is not
selected.
• Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server
2019, and Windows Server 2022
Click
> Windows System > Control Panel. In
the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click
View devices and printers. Right-click your model's
name. Click See what’s printing. If printer driver
options appear, select your printer driver. Click Printer
in the menu bar and make sure that Use Printer
Offline is not selected.
• Windows Server 2012 R2
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the
Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
Right-click your model's name. Click See what’s
printing. If printer driver options appear, select your
printer driver. Click Printer in the menu bar and make
sure Use Printer Offline is not selected.
• Windows Server 2012
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your
desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings
> Control Panel. In the Hardware group, click View
devices and printers. Right-click your model's name.
Click See what's printing. If printer driver options
appear, select your printer driver. Click Printer in the
menu bar and make sure that Use Printer Offline is
not selected.
The machine is not printing or has stopped printing.
Cancel the print job and clear it from the machine's
memory. The printout may be incomplete. Send the print
data again.
See Related Information:Cancel a Print Job.
The headers or footers appear when the document
displays on the screen but they do not show up when it is
printed.
There is an unprintable area on the top and bottom of the
page. Adjust the top and bottom margins in your
document to allow for this.
464
Difficulties Suggestions
The machine prints unexpectedly or it prints garbage. Cancel the print job and clear it from the machine's
memory. The printout may be incomplete. Send the print
data again.
See Related Information:Cancel a Print Job.
Check the settings in your application to make sure they
are set up to work with your machine.
Confirm that the Brother printer driver is selected in your
application's Print window.
The machine prints the first couple of pages correctly,
then some pages have missing text.
Check the settings in your application to make sure they
are set up to work with your machine.
Your machine is not receiving all of the data sent from the
computer. Make sure you connected the interface cable
correctly.
The machine does not print on both sides of the paper
even though the printer driver setting is 2-sided and the
machine supports automatic 2-sided printing.
Check the paper size setting in the printer driver. You
must select Letter, Legal, Folio, Mexico Legal, or India
Legal paper. Supported paper weight is 16 to 28 lb (60 to
105 g/m²).
Print speed is too slow. Reduce the resolution in the printer driver.
If you have enabled Quiet Mode, disable it in the printer
driver or the machine's menu.
When printing continuously, the printing speed may be
automatically reduced to lower the temperature inside the
machine.
The machine does not feed paper. If there is paper in the paper tray, make sure it is straight.
If the paper is curled, straighten it. Sometimes it is helpful
to remove the paper, turn the stack over and place it back
in the paper tray.
Fan the stack of paper well and place it back to the paper
tray.
Reduce the amount of paper in the paper tray, and then
try again.
(For models with MP Tray) Make sure MP Tray is not
selected for Paper Source in the printer driver.
Clean the paper pick-up rollers.
The machine does not feed paper from the MP tray.
(For models with MP Tray)
Fan the paper well and place it back in the MP tray.
Make sure MP Tray is selected as the Paper Source in
the printer driver.
The machine does not feed envelopes. Load envelopes in the MP tray. Your application must be
set to print the envelope size you are using. This is
usually done in the Page Setup or Document Setup menu
of your application.
Print position is misaligned with the preprinted objects. Adjust the print position using the Print Position setting for
each paper tray.
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
Related Topics:
• Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows)
• Load and Print Using the Paper Tray
• Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
• Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)
465
Home > Troubleshooting > Improve the Print Quality
Improve the Print Quality
If you have a print quality problem, print a test page first. If the printout looks good, the problem is probably not
the machine. Check the interface cable connections and try printing a different document. If the printout or test
page printed from the machine has a quality problem, check the examples of poor print quality and follow the
recommendations in the table.
1. To get the best print quality, we suggest using recommended print media. Make sure you use paper that
meets our specifications. See Related Information: Recommended Print Media.
2. Check that the toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies are installed correctly.
Examples of poor print quality
Recommendation
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGH
abcdefghijk
ABCD
abcde
01234
Printed pages are compressed, horizontal stripes appear,
or characters in the top, bottom, left, or right margins are
cut off
Adjust the print margins in your document's application
and reprint the job.
Colored letters and thin letters in the original document
are light or faint in the copy
• Choose Text or Receipt in the copy quality setting.
• Adjust the copy density and contrast.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Colors are light or faint on the whole page
• Use the machine's LCD to perform calibration.See
Related Information: Correct Color Printing.
• Adjust the copy density and contrast if you are
copying.
• Make sure Toner Save mode is off on the LCD or in
the printer driver.
See Related Information: Reduce Toner Consumption.
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver
matches the type of paper you are using.
• Shake all four toner cartridges gently.
• Wipe the windows of all four LED heads with a dry,
soft lint-free cloth.
See Related Information: Clean the LED Heads.
467
Examples of poor print quality Recommendation
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Vertical white streaks or bands appear on the page
• Wipe the windows of all four LED heads with a dry,
soft lint-free cloth.
• Wipe the scanner glass strip with a dry lint free soft
cloth.
• Make sure foreign material such as a torn piece of
paper, sticky notes, or dust is not inside the machine
or around the toner cartridge and drum unit
assemblies.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Vertical colored streaks or bands appear on the page
• Wipe the scanner glass strip with a dry lint free soft
cloth.
• Clean all four corona wires (one for each color) inside
the drum unit by sliding the green tab. Make sure the
green tab of the corona wire is in the home position
(1).
1
• Replace the toner cartridge that matches the color of
the streak or band.
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit
support.brother.com/faqs and view the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page for your model.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner Cartridge.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Horizontal colored lines appear on the page
• Identify the color causing the problem and replace the
toner cartridge that matches the color of the line.
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit
support.brother.com/faqs to see the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner Cartridge.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
468
Examples of poor print quality Recommendation
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
White spots
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver
matches the type of paper you are using.
• Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as
high humidity and high temperatures may cause this
print quality problem.
• If the problem is not solved after printing a few pages,
the drum may have foreign material, such as glue
from a label, stuck on the drum surface. Clean the
drum unit.
See Related Information: Clean the Drum Unit.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Blank page or some missing colors
• Identify the color causing the problem and install a
new toner cartridge.
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit
support.brother.com/faqs to see the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner Cartridge.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Colored spots at 3.0 in. (75 mm)
• If the problem is not solved after printing a few pages,
the drum may have foreign material, such as glue
from a label, stuck on the drum surface. Clean the
drum unit.
See Related Information: Clean the Drum Unit.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
Colored spots at 1.1 in. (29 mm)
Identify the color causing the problem and install a new
toner cartridge.
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit
support.brother.com/faqs to see the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner Cartridge.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Toner scatter or toner stain
• Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as
high humidity and high temperatures may cause this
print quality problem.
• Identify the color causing the problem and put in a
new toner cartridge.
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit
support.brother.com/faqs to see the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner Cartridge.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
The color of your printouts is not what you expected
• To improve the color density, perform the color
correction using the LCD.
• To adjust the print position of colors for sharper edges,
perform the color registration using the LCD.
469
Examples of poor print quality Recommendation
• Adjust the copy density and contrast if you are
copying.
• Make sure Toner Save mode is off on the LCD or in
the printer driver.
• If the print quality of the black portion is not what you
expected, select the Enhance Black Printing
checkbox in the printer driver.
• Clear the Improve Gray Color checkbox in the printer
driver.
• Identify the color causing the problem and put in a
new toner cartridge.
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit
support.brother.com/faqs to see the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner Cartridge.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Color offset
• Make sure the machine is on a solid level surface.
• Perform the color correction using the LCD.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
• Install a new belt unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Belt Unit.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Uneven color density across the page
• Perform the color correction using the LCD.
• Adjust the copy density and contrast if you are
copying.
• Clear the Improve Gray Color checkbox in the printer
driver.
• Identify the color causing the problem and put in a
new toner cartridge.
To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit
support.brother.com/faqs to see the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information: Replace the Toner Cartridge.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
A
B
C
D
E
W X Y Z
Missing thin lines in images
• Make sure Toner Save mode is off on the LCD or in
the printer driver.
• Change the print resolution.
• If you use a Windows printer driver, select Improve
Pattern Printing in Print Setting of the Basic tab.
470
Examples of poor print quality Recommendation
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Wrinkled printout
• Check the paper type and quality.
• Make sure the back cover is closed correctly.
• Make sure the two gray levers inside the back cover
are in the up position.
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver
matches the type of paper you are using.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Ghosting images
• Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as
low humidity and low temperatures may cause this
print quality problem.
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver
matches the type of paper you are using.
• Make sure the two gray levers inside the back cover
are in the up position.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Toner smears easily
• Make sure the two gray levers inside the back cover
are in the up position.
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver
matches the type of paper you are using.
• Select Improve Toner Fixing mode in the printer
driver.
If this selection does not provide enough
improvement, change the printer driver setting in
Media Type to a thick setting. If you are printing an
envelope, select Env. Thick in the media type setting.
Curled or wavy image
• Select Reduce Paper Curl mode in the printer driver.
If the problem is not solved, select Plain Paper in the
media type setting.
• If you are printing an envelope, select Env. Thin in the
Media Type Setting of the printer driver.
• If you do not use the machine often, the paper may
have been in the paper tray too long. Turn over the
stack of paper in the paper tray. Also, fan the paper
stack and then rotate the paper 180° in the paper tray.
• Store the paper where it will not be exposed to high
temperatures and high humidity.
• Open the back cover (Face up output tray) to let the
printed paper exit onto the Face up output tray.
Envelope creases
• Make sure the envelope levers inside the back cover
are pulled down to the envelope position when you
print envelopes.
NOTE
When you have finished printing, open the back
cover and reset the two gray levers back to
their original position (1) by lifting them up until
they stop.
471
Examples of poor print quality Recommendation
1
1
• (For models with MP Tray) If creases occur with the
envelope levers in the envelope position, print with the
back cover open and feed one envelope at a time
from the MP tray.
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
Related Topics:
• Correct Color Printing
• Clean the Drum Unit
• Reduce Toner Consumption
• Replace the Toner Cartridge
• Replace the Drum Unit
• Replace the Belt Unit
• Clean the Scanner
• Clean the LED Heads
• Recommended Print Media
• Test Print
472
Home > Troubleshooting > Telephone and Fax Problems
Telephone and Fax Problems
Telephone Line or Connections
Difficulties Suggestions
Dialing does not work.
(No dial tone)
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the
telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine. Make sure your machine has a dial
tone by pressing the Hook button in Fax mode. If you subscribe to DSL, VoIP or magicJack
services, call your service provider for connection instructions.
(Available only for some countries.)
Change the Tone/Pulse setting.
Send a manual fax by pressing Hook button, and dialing the number. Wait to hear fax-
receiving tones before pressing Start button.
If there is no dial tone, connect a known working telephone and telephone line cord to the
jack. Then lift the external telephone’s handset and listen for a dial tone. If there is still no
dial tone, ask your telephone company to check the line and/or wall jack.
The machine does not
answer when called.
Make sure the machine is in the correct receive mode for your setup.
Check for a dial tone. If possible, call your machine to hear it answer. If there is still no
answer, check that the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone wall jack and the
LINE jack of the machine. Make sure your machine has a dial tone by pressing the Hook
button in Fax mode. If there is no ringing when you call your machine, ask your telephone
company to check the line.
Handling Incoming Calls
Difficulties
Suggestions
Sending a Fax
Call to the
machine.
If you answered on an extension telephone, press your Fax Receive Code (the factory setting is
*51). If you answered on the external telephone (connected to the EXT. jack), press the Start
button to receive the fax.
When your machine answers, hang up.
Custom features
on a single line.
If you have Call Waiting, Voice Mail, an answering machine, an alarm system or other custom
feature on a single telephone line with your machine, it may create a problem sending or
receiving faxes.
For Example: If you subscribe to Call Waiting or some other custom service and its signal comes
through the line while your machine is sending or receiving a fax, the signal can temporarily
interrupt or disrupt the faxes. Brother’s ECM (Error Correction Mode) feature should help
overcome this problem. This condition is related to the telephone system industry and is common
to all devices that send and receive information on a single, shared line with custom features. If
avoiding a slight interruption is crucial to your business, we recommend using a separate
telephone line with no custom features.
Receiving Faxes
Difficulties
Suggestions
Cannot receive
a fax.
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone
wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL, VoIP, or magicJack services,
call your service provider for connection instructions. If you are using a VoIP system, try changing
the VoIP setting to Basic (for VoIP). This will lower modem speed and turn off Error Correction
Mode (ECM).
Make sure your machine has a dial tone by pressing the Hook button in Fax mode. If you hear
static or interference on your fax line, contact your local telephone provider.
473
Difficulties Suggestions
Cannot receive
a fax.
Make sure the machine is in the correct Receive Mode. This is determined by the external devices
and telephone subscriber services you have on the same line as the Brother machine.
• If you have a dedicated fax line and want your Brother machine to automatically answer all
incoming faxes, you should select Fax Only mode.
• If your Brother machine shares a line with an external answering machine, you should select the
External TAD mode. In External TAD mode, your Brother machine will receive incoming faxes
automatically and voice callers will be able to leave a message on your answering machine.
• If your Brother machine shares the line with a Voice Mail subscriber service, see Related
Information: Voice Mail.
• If your Brother machine is on a line with the Distinctive Ring subscriber service, see Related
Information: Distinctive Ring.
• If your Brother machine shares a line with other telephones and you want it to automatically
answer all incoming faxes, you should select the Fax/Tel mode. In Fax/Tel mode, your Brother
machine will receive faxes automatically and produce a pseudo/double-ring to alert you to
answer voice calls.
• If you do not want your Brother machine to answer any incoming faxes automatically, you should
select the Manual mode. In Manual mode, you must answer every incoming call and activate the
machine to receive faxes.
Another device or service at your location may be answering the call before your Brother machine
answers. To test this, lower the Ring Delay setting:
• If the Receive Mode is set to Fax Only or Fax/Tel, reduce the Ring Delay to the minimum value
(excluding “0”).
See Related Information: Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay).
• If the Receive Mode is set to External TAD, reduce the number of rings programmed on your
answering machine to two.
• If the Receive Mode is set to Manual, DO NOT adjust the Ring Delay setting.
Have someone send you a test fax:
• If you received the test fax successfully, your machine is operating correctly. Remember to reset
your Ring Delay or answering machine setting back to your original setting. If receiving
problems recur after resetting the Ring Delay, then a person, device, or subscriber service is
answering the fax call before the machine has a chance to answer.
• If you were not able to receive the fax, then another device or subscriber service may be
interfering with your fax reception or there may be a problem with your fax line.
If you are using a telephone answering machine (External TAD mode) on the same line as the
Brother machine, make sure your answering machine is set up correctly.
1. Plug the telephone line cord directly from the wall telephone jack to your machine’s LINE jack.
2. Remove the protective cap from your machine’s EXT. jack, and then plug the telephone line cord
from your answering machine into the EXT. jack.
3. Set your answering machine to answer within 4 rings.
If you are having problems receiving faxes or voice messages, set your answering machine to
answer within 2 or 3 rings.
4. Record the outgoing message on your answering machine.
• Record five seconds of silence at the beginning of your outgoing message.
• Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.
• End your outgoing message with your Fax Receive Code for people sending manual faxes.
For example: “After the beep, leave a message or press *51 and Start to send a fax.”
5. Set your answering machine to answer calls.
6. Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to External TAD.
See Related Information: Choose the Correct Receive Mode.
Make sure your Brother machine’s Easy Receive feature is turned On. Easy Receive is a feature
that allows you to receive a fax even if you answered the call on an external or extension
telephone.
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone line or if you are
using a VoIP system, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic (for VoIP).
474
Difficulties Suggestions
Cannot receive
a fax.
Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock settings.
Sending Faxes
Difficulties Suggestions
Cannot send a fax. Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the
telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine. Make sure your machine has a dial
tone by pressing the Hook button in Fax mode. If you subscribe to DSL, VoIP, or
magicJack services, call your service provider for connection instructions.
Make sure you pressed Fax and the machine is in Fax mode.
Print the Transmission Verification Report and check for an error.
Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock settings.
Ask the other party to check that the receiving machine has paper.
Poor quality of sent
faxes.
Try changing your resolution to Fine or S.Fine. Make a copy to check your machine’s
scanner operation. If the copy quality is poor, clean the scanner.
Transmission Verification
Report says RESULT:NG.
There is probably temporary noise or static on the line. Try sending the fax again. If you
are sending a PC-Fax message and get RESULT:NG on the Transmission Verification
Report, your machine may be out of memory. To free up extra memory, you can turn off
Fax Storage, print fax messages in memory or cancel a delayed fax. If the problem
continues, ask the telephone company to check your telephone line.
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone line or if
you are using a VoIP system, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic (for VoIP).
Sent faxes are blank. Make sure you are loading the document correctly. When using the ADF, the document
should be face up. When using the scanner glass, the document should be face down.
Vertical black lines when
sending a fax.
Black vertical lines on faxes you send are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid on the
glass strip. Clean the glass strip.
Printing received faxes
Difficulties
Suggestions
• Condensed print
• Horizontal streaks
• Top and bottom sentences are
cut off
• Missing lines
This is usually caused by a poor telephone connection. Do a test copy; if your
copy looks good, you probably had a bad connection, with static or interference
on the telephone line. Ask the other party to send the fax again.
Vertical black lines when receiving The corona wires for printing may be dirty.Clean the corona wires in the drum
unit.
The sender’s scanner may be dirty. Ask the sender to make a copy to see if the
problem is with the sending machine. Try receiving from another fax machine.
Received faxes appear as split or
blank pages.
Left and right margins are cut off or a single page is printed on two pages.
If the received faxes are divided and printed on two pages or if you get an extra
blank page, your paper size setting may not be correct for the paper you are
using.
Turn on Auto Reduction.
475
Home > Troubleshooting > Telephone and Fax Problems > Set Dial Tone Detection
Set Dial Tone Detection
Setting the Dial Tone to [Detection] shortens the Dial Tone detect pause.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Dial Tone].
2. Press [Detection] or [No Detection].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Telephone and Fax Problems
477
Home > Troubleshooting > Telephone and Fax Problems > Set Telephone Line Compatibility for
Interference and VoIP Systems
Set Telephone Line Compatibility for Interference and VoIP Systems
Problems sending and receiving faxes due to possible interference on the telephone line may be solved by
reducing the modem speed to minimize errors in fax transmission. If you are using a Voice over IP (VoIP)
service, we recommend changing the compatibility to Basic (for VoIP).
• VoIP is a type of phone system that uses an Internet connection, rather than a traditional phone line.
• Telephone providers frequently bundle VoIP together with Internet and cable services.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Compatibility].
2. Press the option you want.
• Select [High] to set the modem speed to 33600 bps.
• Select [Normal] to set the modem speed to 14400 bps.
• Select [Basic(for VoIP)] to reduce the modem speed to 9600 bps and turn off Error Correction
Mode (ECM). Unless interference is a recurring problem on your telephone line, you may prefer to use
this option only when needed.
3. Press
.
Related Information
• Telephone and Fax Problems
478
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > Error Messages
Error Messages
The most common error messages are shown in the table.
Error Messages Cause Action
The maximum
number of devices
are already
connected using
Wi-Fi Direct.
The maximum number of
mobile devices are already
connected to the Wi-Fi Direct
network when the Brother
machine is the Group Owner.
After the current connection between your Brother
machine and another mobile device has shut down, try to
configure the Wi-Fi Direct settings again. You can confirm
the connection status by printing the Network
Configuration Report.
Authentication
Error, contact
your
administrator.
Your authentication setting for
the Store Print Log to Network
feature is not correct.
• Make sure the Username and Password in
Authentication Setting are correct. If the username is
part of a domain, enter the username in one of the
following styles: user@domain or domain\user.
• Make sure the time of the log file server matches the
time from the SNTP server, or the Date&Time settings.
• Make sure the SNTP time server settings are
configured correctly so the time matches the time used
for authentication by Kerberos or NTLMv2. If there is
no SNTP server, make sure the Date&Time and Time
Zone settings are set correctly using Web Based
Management or the control panel so the machine
matches the time being used by the server providing
the authentication.
Check User ID and
Password.
The Kerberos Authentication
error.
Make sure you have entered a correct user name and a
password for the Kerberos server. For more information on
the Kerberos server settings, contact your network
administrator.
The date, time and time zone
settings of the Brother machine
are not correct.
Confirm your machine's date, time, and time zone settings.
The DNS server configuration
is not correct.
Contact your network administrator for the information on
the DNS server settings.
The Brother machine cannot
connect to the Kerberos
server.
Contact your network administrator for the information on
the Kerberos server settings.
Connection Error
Other devices are trying to
connect to the Wi-Fi Direct
network at the same time.
Make sure there are no other devices trying to connect to
the Wi-Fi Direct network, and then try to configure the Wi-
Fi Direct settings again.
Connection Failed
The Brother machine and your
mobile device cannot
communicate during the Wi-Fi
Direct network configuration.
• Move the mobile device closer to your Brother
machine.
• Move your Brother machine and the mobile device to
an obstruction-free area.
• If you are using the PIN Method of WPS, make sure
you have entered the correct PIN.
File Access
Error, contact
your
administrator.
The Brother machine cannot
access the destination folder
for the Store Print Log to
Network feature.
• Make sure the destination folder name is correct.
• Make sure the destination folder is write-enabled.
• Make sure the print log file is not locked. If it is, contact
your network administrator.
Log Access Error
In Web Based Management,
you have selected the Cancel
Print option in the Error
Detection Setting section of
the Store Print Log to
Network feature.
Wait for about 60 seconds until this message disappears
from the LCD.
480
Error Messages Cause Action
No Device
When configuring the Wi-Fi
Direct network, the Brother
machine cannot find your
mobile device.
• Make sure your machine and mobile device are in the
Wi-Fi Direct mode.
• Move the mobile device closer to your Brother
machine.
• Move your Brother machine and the mobile device to
an obstruction-free area.
• If you are manually configuring the Wi-Fi Direct
network, make sure you have entered the correct
password.
• If your mobile device has a configuration page for
obtaining an IP address, make sure your mobile
device's IP address has been configured via DHCP.
Server Timeout,
contact your
administrator.
The Brother machine cannot
connect to the server for the
Store Print Log to Network
feature.
• Make sure your server address is correct.
• Make sure your server is connected to the network.
• Make sure the machine is connected to the network.
Server Timeout
The Brother machine cannot
connect to the LDAP server.
• Make sure your server address is correct.
• Make sure your server is connected to the network.
• Make sure the machine is connected to the network.
The Brother machine cannot
connect to the Active Directory
server.
• Make sure your server address is correct.
• Make sure your server is connected to the network.
• Make sure the machine is connected to the network.
Wrong Date &
Time, contact
your
administrator.
The Brother machine does not
obtain the time from the SNTP
time server or you have not
configured the Date&Time for
the machine.
• Make sure the settings to access the SNTP time server
are configured correctly in Web Based Management.
• Confirm the Date&Time settings of your machine are
correct in Web Based Management.
Internal Error
The Brother machine's LDAP
protocol is disabled.
Confirm your authentication method, and then enable the
necessary protocol setting in Web Based Management.
The Brother machine's CIFS
protocol is disabled.
Related Information
• Network Problems
481
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
Use the Network Connection Repair Tool to fix the Brother machine's network settings. It will assign the correct
IP address and Subnet Mask.
Make sure your machine is turned on and is connected to the same network as your computer.
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Network Connection Repair Tool.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
4. Check the diagnosis by printing the Network Configuration Report or the Printer Settings page.
The Network Connection Repair Tool will start automatically if you select the Enable Connection Repair
Tool option in the Status Monitor. Right-click the Status Monitor screen, and then click Other Settings >
Enable Connection Repair Tool. This is not recommended when your network administrator has set the
IP address to Static, since it will automatically change the IP address.
If the correct IP address and the Subnet Mask are still not assigned even after using the Network Connection
Repair Tool, ask your network administrator for this information.
Related Information
• Network Problems
Related Topics:
• Print the Network Configuration Report
• My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network
• I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
482
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
If you think there is a problem with your machine's network environment, check the following topics. You can
correct most problems yourself.
If you need additional help, visit support.brother.com/faqs.
• I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration
• My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network
• I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
484
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network > I
Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration
I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration
Turn your wireless router off and back on. Then, try to configure the wireless settings again. If you are unable to
resolve the problem, follow the instructions below:
Investigate the problem using the WLAN Report.
Cause
Action Interface
Your security settings (SSID/
Network Key) are not
correct.
Confirm the security settings using Wireless Setup Helper
(Windows). For more information and to download the utility, go to
your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads.
Select and confirm that you are using the correct security settings.
- See the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access
point/router for information on how to find the security settings.
- The manufacturer's name or model number of the wireless LAN
access point/router may be used as the default security settings.
- Consult with the access point/router manufacturer, your Internet
provider, or network administrator.
Wireless
Your Brother machine's MAC
address is not allowed.
Confirm that the Brother machine's MAC Address is allowed in the
filter.
You can find the MAC Address on your Brother machine's control
panel.
Wireless
Your wireless LAN access
point/router is in Stealth
mode (not broadcasting the
SSID).
• Enter the correct SSID or Network Key manually.
• Check the SSID or the Network Key in the instructions supplied
with your wireless LAN access point/router and reconfigure the
wireless network setup.
Wireless
Your machine is trying to
connect to a 5 GHz Wi-Fi
network. The current
channel set on your wireless
LAN access point/router is
not supported.
Change the channel on your wireless LAN access point/router to a
channel supported by your machine.
1. Confirm the channels supported by your machine.
USA, Canada, Mexico and Caribbean countries: See Related
Information: 5 GHz Wi-Fi Network Channels Supported by Your
Machine (USA, Canada, Mexico and Caribbean countries only).
All other countries: Go to
support.brother.com/g/d/a5m6/, select
your model, and then click Download for more information.
2. Check your wireless LAN access point/router‘s channel setting.
Make sure it is set to one of the channels supported by your
machine, and not set to "Auto" or "Automatic". For more
information about changing the channel setting, see the
instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/router.
3. Try to connect your machine to your Wi-Fi network again.
Wireless
Your security settings (SSID/
password) are not correct.
Confirm the SSID and password.
When you are configuring the network manually, the SSID and
password are displayed on your Brother machine. If your mobile
device supports the manual configuration, the SSID and password
will be displayed on your mobile device’s screen.
Wi-Fi Direct
You are using Android
™
4.0.
If your mobile device disconnects (approximately six minutes after
using Wi-Fi Direct), try the one-push configuration using WPS
(recommended) and set the Brother machine as a Group Owner.
Wi-Fi Direct
Your Brother machine is
placed too far from your
mobile device.
Move your Brother machine within about 3.3 feet (1 meter) of the
mobile device when you configure the Wi-Fi Direct network settings.
Wi-Fi Direct
There are some obstructions
(walls or furniture, for
example) between your
Move your Brother machine to an obstruction-free area. Wi-Fi Direct
485
Cause Action Interface
machine and the mobile
device.
There is a wireless
computer, Bluetooth
®
-
supported device,
microwave oven, or digital
cordless phone near the
Brother machine or your
mobile device.
Move other devices away from the Brother machine or your mobile
device.
Wi-Fi Direct
You have checked and tried
all of the above, but your
Brother machine still cannot
complete the Wi-Fi Direct
configuration.
• Turn your Brother machine off and back on. Then, try to
configure the Wi-Fi Direct settings again.
• If you are using your Brother machine as a client, confirm how
many devices are allowed on the current Wi-Fi Direct network,
and then check how many devices are connected.
Wi-Fi Direct
For Windows
If your wireless connection has been interrupted, and you have checked and tried all of the above, we
recommend using the Network Connection Repair Tool.
Related Information
• If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
Related Topics:
• Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
• Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
• 5 GHz Wi-Fi Network Channels Supported by Your Machine (USA, Canada, Mexico and Caribbean
countries only)
486
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's
Network > My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network
My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function
over the Network
Cause Action Interface
Your security software
blocks your machine's
access to the network.
(The network scanning
feature does not work. )
• Windows
Configure the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow
network scanning. To add port 54925 for network scanning, type
the information below:
- In Name:
Type any description, for example Brother NetScan.
- In Port number:
Type 54925.
- In Protocol:
UDP is selected.
See the instruction manual that came with your third-party
Security/Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.
• Mac
(Brother iPrint&Scan)
In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications, and then double-
click the Brother iPrint&Scan icon. The Brother iPrint&Scan
window appears. Click the Select your Machine button, and then
follow the on-screen instructions to reselect your network machine.
Wired/Wireless
Your security software
blocks your machine's
access to the network.
(The network PC-Fax
Receive feature does not
work.)
(Windows)
Set the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow PC-FAX Rx. To
add port 54926 for Network PC-FAX Rx, type the information below:
• In Name:
Type any description, for example Brother PC-FAX Rx.
• In Port number:
Type 54926.
• In Protocol:
UDP is selected.
See the instruction manual that came with your third-party Security/
Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.
Wired/Wireless
Your security software
blocks your machine's
access to the network.
Some security software might block access without showing a security
alert dialog box even after successful installation.
To allow access, see the instructions for your security software or ask
the software manufacturer.
Wired/Wireless
Your Brother machine was
not assigned an available
IP address.
• Confirm the IP address and the Subnet Mask.
Verify that both the IP addresses and Subnet Masks of your
computer and the Brother machine are correct and located on the
same network.
For more information about how to verify the IP address and the
Subnet Mask, ask your network administrator.
• Windows
Confirm the IP address and the Subnet Mask using the Network
Connection Repair Tool.
Wired/Wireless
A failed print job is still in
your computer's print
queue.
• If a failed print job is still in your computer's print queue, delete it.
• Otherwise, double-click the printer icon in the following folder and
cancel all documents:
- Windows 11
Wired/Wireless
487
Cause Action Interface
Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In
the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and
printers.
- Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019,
and Windows Server 2022
Click > Windows System > Control Panel. In the
Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click View devices
and printers.
- Windows Server 2012 R2
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware
group, click View devices and printers.
- Windows Server 2012
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop.
When the menu bar appears, click Settings > Control Panel.
In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers >
Printers.
- Mac
Click System Preferences > Printers & Scanners.
Your machine is not
connected to the wireless
network.
Print the WLAN Report to check the error code on the printed report.
See Related Information: Print the WLAN Report.
Wireless
If you have checked and tried all of the above, but you are still having problems, uninstall the drivers (Windows)
and the software and reinstall the latest ones.
Related Information
• If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
Related Topics:
• Print the WLAN Report
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
• Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
• I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
488
Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network > I
Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
Check Action Interface
Check that your Brother
machine, access point/
router, or network hub is
turned on.
Check the following:
• The power cord is connected correctly and the Brother machine is
turned on.
• The access point/router or hub is turned on and its link LED is
blinking.
• All protective packaging has been removed from the machine.
• The toner cartridge and drum unit assembly is installed correctly.
• The machine's cover is fully closed.
• Paper is loaded correctly in the paper tray.
• (For wired networks) A network cable is securely connected to the
Brother machine and to the router or hub.
Wired/Wireless
Check the Link Status
on the Network
Configuration Report or
the Printer Settings
page.
Print the Network Configuration Report and check that Ethernet Link
Status or Wireless Link Status is Link OK.
Wired/Wireless
Check that you can
"ping" the Brother
machine from your
computer.
Ping the Brother machine from your computer using the IP address or
the node name in the Windows command prompt or Mac Terminal
application:
ping <ipaddress> or <nodename>.
• Successful: Your Brother machine is working correctly and
connected to the same network as your computer.
• Unsuccessful: Your Brother machine is not connected to the same
network as your computer.
Windows:
Ask your administrator about the IP address and the subnet mask, and
then use the Network Connection Repair Tool.
Mac:
Confirm that the IP address and the Subnet Mask are set correctly.
Wired/Wireless
Check that your Brother
machine is connected to
the wireless network.
Print the WLAN Report to check the error code on the printed report.
See Related Information: Print the WLAN Report.
Wireless
If you have checked and tried all of the above but you are still having problems, see the instructions supplied with
your wireless access point/router to find the SSID (Network Name) and the Network Key (Password) information
and set them correctly.
Related Information
• If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
Related Topics:
• Print the Network Configuration Report
• Print the WLAN Report
• Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
• Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
• My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network
489
Home > Troubleshooting > AirPrint Problems
AirPrint Problems
Difficulties Suggestions
My machine is not displayed in the printer list. Make sure your machine is turned on.
Make sure your machine and your mobile device or Mac
are connected to the same network.
Move your mobile device closer to the wireless access
point/router, or to your machine.
I cannot print. Make sure your machine is turned on.
Make sure your machine and your mobile device or Mac
are connected to the same network.
I am trying to print a multi-page document from an iOS
device, but ONLY the first page is printing.
Make sure you are running the latest OS version.
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
Related Topics:
• AirPrint Overview
490
Home > Troubleshooting > Other Problems
Other Problems
Difficulties Suggestions
The machine will not turn on. Adverse conditions on the power connection (such as
lightning or a power surge) may have triggered the
machine’s internal safety mechanisms. Unplug the power
cord. Wait for ten minutes, then plug in the power cord
and press to turn on the machine.
If the problem is not solved, press and hold
to turn off
the machine. If you are using a backup battery or surge
suppressor device, disconnect it to make sure it is not the
problem. Plug the machine’s power cord directly into a
different known working wall outlet and press to turn
on the machine.
The machine cannot print EPS data that includes binary
with the BR-Script3 printer driver.
(Windows)
To print EPS data, do the following:
1. Windows 11:
Click
> All apps > Windows Tools > Control
Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View
devices and printers.
For Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows
Server 2019, and Windows Server 2022:
Click
> Windows System > Control Panel. In
the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click
View devices and printers.
For Windows Server 2012:
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your
desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings
> Control Panel. In the Hardware group, click View
devices and printers.
For Windows Server 2012 R2:
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the
Hardware group, click View devices and printers.
2. Right-click your model's icon with BR-Script3 in the
name, select Printer properties.
If your model with
BR-Script3 in the name does
not appear, right-click your model's icon, select
Printer properties, and then select your model
with BR-Script3 in the name.
3. From the Device Settings tab, choose TBCP (Tagged
Binary Communication Protocol) in Output Protocol.
The Brother software cannot be installed.
(Windows)
If the Security Software warning appears on the computer
screen during the installation, change the Security
Software settings to permit the Brother product setup
program or other program to run.
(Mac)
If you are using a firewall function of anti-spyware or
antivirus security software, temporarily disable it and then
install the Brother software.
Copying difficulties
491
Difficulties Suggestions
Cannot make a copy. Make sure you pressed Copy and the machine is in Copy
mode.
Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function
Lock settings.
Vertical black line appears in copies. Black vertical lines on copies are typically caused by dirt
or correction fluid on the glass strip, or the corona wires
are dirty. Clean the glass strip and scanner glass and the
white bar and white plastic above them.
Copies are blank. Make sure you are loading the document correctly.
Scanning difficulties
Difficulties
Suggestions
TWAIN or WIA errors appear when starting to scan.
(Windows)
Make sure the Brother TWAIN or WIA driver is selected
as the primary source in your scanning application. For
example, in Nuance
™
PaperPort
™
14SE, click Desktop >
Scan Settings > Select to select the Brother TWAIN/WIA
driver.
OCR does not work. Try increasing the scanning resolution.
Cannot scan. Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function
Lock settings.
Software difficulties
Difficulties
Suggestions
Cannot install software or print. (Windows)
Run the install program again. This program will repair
and reinstall the software.
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
492
Home > Troubleshooting > Check the Machine Information
Check the Machine Information
Follow these instructions to check your machine's serial number and firmware version.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Machine Info.].
2. Press one of the following options:
Option Description
Serial No.
Check your machine's serial number.
Firmware Version
Check your machine's firmware version.
Firmware Update
Update your machine to the latest firmware.
Firmware Auto Check
View firmware information on the Main Home screen.
Page Counter
Check the total number of pages the machine has printed.
Parts Life
Check the percentage of the supplies' life that remains available.
3. Press .
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
493
Home > Troubleshooting > Reset Your Machine
Reset Your Machine
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Reset].
2. Press the reset function you want to use.
• The network settings, the security settings and address book data will not be reset by the [Machine
Reset].
• If you discard or dispose the machine, we recommend performing a [Factory Reset] to erase the
personal data in the machine.
3. [Machine will reboot after resetting. Press [OK] for 2 seconds to confirm.]
appears. Press [OK] for two seconds to confirm.
You can also reset the network settings by pressing [Settings] > [All Settings] >
[Network] > [Network Reset].
The machine will restart.
Related Information
• Troubleshooting
• Reset Functions Overview
Related Topics:
• Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings
494
Home > Troubleshooting > Reset Your Machine > Reset Functions Overview
Reset Functions Overview
The following reset functions are available:
Unplug the interface cable before you choose Network Settings Reset function, All Settings Reset function
or Factory Reset function.
1. Machine Reset
Reset all the machine’s settings that you have changed, such as Date and Time and Ring Delay.
The Address Book, fax reports, and Call history will remain. (For models with facsimile function)
2. Network Settings Reset (For Network Models)
Reset the print server back to its default factory settings (includes Password and IP Address information).
3. Address Book and Fax Settings Reset
This function resets the following settings:
The following settings, with the exception of the Address Book and the Setting Lock password, apply to
models with facsimile function.
• Address Book
(Addresses and Groups)
• Programmed fax jobs in the memory
(Delayed Fax)
• Station ID
(name and number)
• Coverpage Message
• Fax receive settings
(Remote Access Code, Fax Storage, Fax Forwarding, and PC-Fax Receive (Windows only))
• Report
(Transmission Verification Report / Tel Index List / Fax Journal)
• Setting Lock password
4. All Settings Reset
Reset all the machine's settings back to the settings that were set at the factory.
All Settings Reset takes less time than Factory Reset.
5. Factory Reset
Use the Settings Reset function to reset all of the machine's settings to the settings originally set at the
factory.
Factory Reset takes more time than All Settings Reset.
We strongly recommend you perform this operation when you dispose of the machine.
Related Information
• Reset Your Machine
495
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies
Replace Supplies
You must replace supplies when the machine indicates that the life of the supply is over.
The toner cartridge and drum unit are two separate supplies. Make sure both are installed as an assembly. The
order number of supplies may vary depending on the country.
IMPORTANT
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
Toner Cartridge
Drum Unit
Belt Unit
497
Waste Toner Box
NOTE
• Be sure to seal the used supplies tightly in a bag so that toner powder does not spill out of the cartridge.
• Brother is committed to minimizing the environmental impact due to waste. For more information on
recycling options, contact your local recycling office or visit:
- In USA:
www.brother-usa.com/Environment
- In Canada: www.brother.ca/en/environment
• We recommend placing both the new and the used supplies on a piece of paper to prevent accidentally
spilling or scattering the contents.
• Using paper that is not a direct equivalent for a recommended print media may reduce the life of supplies
and machine parts.
• The projected life for each of the toner cartridges is based on ISO/IEC 19798. Frequency of replacement
will vary depending on the print volume, percentage of coverage, types of media used, and powering
on/off the machine.
• Frequency of replacing supplies except toner cartridges will vary depending on the print volume, types of
media used, and powering on/off the machine.
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If toner scatters on your hands or clothes, immediately wipe or wash
it off with cold water.
Related Information
• Routine Maintenance
• Replace the Toner Cartridge
• Replace the Drum Unit
• Replace the Belt Unit
• Replace the Waste Toner Box
Related Topics:
• Error and Maintenance Messages
498
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies > Replace the Toner Cartridge
Replace the Toner Cartridge
Before starting the replacement procedure, see Related Information: Replace Supplies.
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
499
3. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly for the color shown on the LCD.
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with
disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the
illustration.
500
4. Push down the green lock lever and remove the toner cartridge from the drum unit.
5. Unpack the new toner cartridge.
6. Remove the protective materials.
1
2
3
The shape of the toner cartridge will vary depending on your country and region.
7. Insert the new toner cartridge firmly into the drum unit until you hear it lock into place.
2
1
Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit.
501
8. Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit by gently sliding the green tab from left to right and right to left
several times.
Be sure to return the green tab to the Home position (a). The arrow on the tab must be aligned with the
arrow on the drum unit. If it is not, printed pages may have a vertical stripe.
9. Slide the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner
cartridge color to the same color label on the machine.
BK
C
M
Y
10. Close the machine's top cover.
• After replacing a toner cartridge, DO NOT turn off the machine or open the top cover until the machine's
display returns to Ready Mode.
• The toner cartridge that comes with your Brother machine is a Starter toner cartridge.
• We recommend keeping a new toner cartridge ready for use when you see the Toner Low warning.
• DO NOT unpack the new toner cartridge until you are ready to install it.
• If a toner cartridge is left unpacked for a long time, the toner life will be shortened.
• We recommend using genuine Brother supplies to ensure stable print quality and performance.
Although not all non-genuine supplies may cause quality issues, it is possible that some may adversely
affect print quality or cause machine malfunction. Brother may charge for repairing your machine if it is
proven that non-genuine supplies caused the damage, even if the machine is still covered by the
warranty.
Related Information
• Replace Supplies
Related Topics:
• Error and Maintenance Messages
• Improve the Print Quality
502
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies > Replace the Drum Unit
Replace the Drum Unit
Before starting the replacement procedure, see Related Information: Replace Supplies.
>> Replace the Drum Unit
>> Reset the Drum Counter
Replace the Drum Unit
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
503
3. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly for the color shown on the LCD.
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with
disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the
illustration.
504
4. Push down the green lock lever and remove the toner cartridge from the drum unit.
5. Unpack the new drum unit.
6. Remove the protective cover.
1
2
3
7. Reinsert the toner cartridge firmly into the new drum unit until you hear it lock into place.
2
1
Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit.
8. Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit by gently sliding the green tab from left to right and right to left
several times.
505
Be sure to return the green tab to the Home position (a). The arrow on the tab must be aligned with the
arrow on the drum unit. If it is not, printed pages may have a vertical stripe.
9. Slide the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner
cartridge color to the same color label on the machine.
BK
C
M
Y
10. Close the machine's top cover.
11. Reset the drum counter by following the next section.
NOTE
• Drum wear and tear occurs due to use and rotation of the drum and interaction with paper, toner and
other materials in the paper path. When a drum reaches the factory-established rotation limit
corresponding to the rated page yield, the product’s LCD will advise you to replace the drum. The product
will continue to function; however, print quality may not be optimal.
• If an unpacked drum unit is placed in direct sunlight (or artificial light for long periods of time), the unit
may be damaged.
• There are many factors that determine the actual drum life, such as the temperature, humidity, type of
paper, type of toner used and so on. Under ideal conditions, the average drum life is estimated at
approximately 20,000 pages based on one page per job (A4/Letter single-sided pages). The number of
pages may be affected due to a variety of factors including but not limited to media type and media size.
Because we have no control over the many factors that determine the actual drum life, we cannot
guarantee a minimum number of pages that will be printed by your drum.
• The machine should be used only in a clean, dust-free environment with adequate ventilation.
• We recommend using genuine Brother supplies to ensure stable print quality and performance. Although
not all non-genuine supplies may cause quality issues, it is possible that some may adversely affect print
quality or cause machine malfunction. Brother may charge for repairing your machine if it is proven that
non-genuine supplies caused the damage, even if the machine is still covered by the warranty.
IMPORTANT
• To avoid print quality issues or damage to the machine, DO NOT reset the drum counter unless you are
replacing the drum unit.
• If you reset the drum counter without replacing the drum unit, the machine will not be able to correctly
calculate the remaining drum life.
Reset the Drum Counter
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Press and hold
for about five seconds.
3. Press [Drum].
506
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies > Replace the Belt Unit
Replace the Belt Unit
Before starting the replacement procedure, see Related Information: Replace Supplies.
>> Replace the Belt Unit
>> Reset the Belt Unit Counter
Replace the Belt Unit
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
508
3. Remove all of the toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies.
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with
disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the
illustration.
509
4. Hold the green handle of the belt unit and lift the belt unit up, and then pull it out without letting it touch the
machine.
5. Unpack the new belt unit and insert it into the machine.
NOTE
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
510
6. Reinsert each toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner
cartridge color to the same color label on the machine for all four toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies.
BK
C
M
Y
7. Close the machine's top cover.
8. Reset the belt unit counter by following the next section.
IMPORTANT
To avoid print quality issues or damage to the machine, DO NOT reset the belt unit counter unless you are
replacing the belt unit.
Reset the Belt Unit Counter
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Press and hold
for about five seconds.
3. Press [Belt].
4. Press [Yes].
Related Information
• Replace Supplies
Related Topics:
• Error and Maintenance Messages
• Improve the Print Quality
511
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies > Replace the Waste Toner Box
Replace the Waste Toner Box
Before starting the replacement procedure, see Related Information: Replace Supplies.
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
512
3. Remove all of the toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies.
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with
disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the
illustration.
513
4. Hold the green handle of the belt unit and lift the belt unit up, and then pull it out without letting it touch the
machine.
NOTE
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
5. Remove the orange packing material and discard it.
This step is only necessary when you are replacing the waste toner box for the first time, and is not
required for the replacement waste toner box. The orange packing pieces are installed at the factory to
protect your machine during shipment.
514
6. Hold the green handle of the waste toner box and remove the waste toner box from the machine.
DO NOT reuse the waste toner box.
7. Unpack the new waste toner box and install the new waste toner box in the machine. Make sure the waste
toner box is level and fits firmly into place.
NOTE
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
515
8. Reinsert the belt unit into the machine.
9. Reinsert each toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner
cartridge color to the same color label on the machine for all four toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies.
BK
C
M
Y
10. Close the machine's top cover.
Related Information
• Replace Supplies
Related Topics:
• Error and Maintenance Messages
516
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine
Clean the Machine
Clean the outside and inside of the machine regularly with a dry, lint-free cloth.
When you replace the toner cartridge or the drum unit, make sure you clean the inside of the machine. If printed
pages are stained with toner, clean the inside of the machine with a dry, lint-free cloth.
WARNING
DO NOT use flammable substances, any type of spray, or an organic solvent/liquid containing alcohol or
ammonia to clean the inside or outside of the product. Doing so could cause a fire. Instead, use only a dry,
lint-free cloth.
IMPORTANT
• DO NOT use isopropyl alcohol to remove dirt from the control panel. It may crack the panel.
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
Toner Cartridge
Drum Unit
517
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Scanner
Clean the Scanner
Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information: Clean the Machine.
1. Press and hold to turn off the machine.
2. Lift the document cover (1). Clean the white plastic surface (2) and scanner glass (3) underneath it with a soft
lint-free cloth moistened with water.
1
2
3
3. In the ADF unit, clean the white bar (1) and the scanner glass strip (2) underneath it with a soft lint-free cloth
moistened with water.
1
2
4. Open the scanner glass cover (1), and then clean the other white bar (2) and scanner glass strip (3)
(supported models only).
1
2
3
5. Close the document cover.
6. Press to turn on the machine.
519
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the LED Heads
Clean the LED Heads
Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information: Clean the Machine.
If there is a problem with the print quality, such as light or faded colors, white streaks, or bands that run down the
page, clean the LED heads as follows:
1. Press and hold
to turn off the machine.
2. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
3. Wipe each LED head window (1) with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth. Do not touch the windows with your fingers.
1
1
4. Close the machine's top cover.
5. Press to turn on the machine.
Related Information
• Clean the Machine
521
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Touchscreen LCD
Clean the Touchscreen LCD
Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information: Clean the Machine.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT use any type of liquid cleaners (including ethanol).
1. Press and hold to turn off the machine.
2. Clean the touchscreen with a dry, soft lint-free cloth.
3. Press to turn on the machine.
Related Information
• Clean the Machine
522
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Corona Wires
Clean the Corona Wires
Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information: Clean the Machine.
1. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
2. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly.
523
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with
disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the
illustration.
3. Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit by gently sliding the green tab from left to right and right to left
several times.
Be sure to return the green tab to the Home position (a). The arrow on the tab must be aligned with the
arrow on the drum unit. If it is not, printed pages may have a vertical stripe.
524
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Drum Unit
Clean the Drum Unit
• If your printout has black or white dots or other repeating marks at 3.0 in. (75 mm) intervals, the drum may
have foreign material, such as glue from a label, stuck on the drum surface.
• Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information: Clean the Machine.
1. Make sure the machine is in Ready Mode.
2. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] > [Drum Dot Print].
3. Press [Yes].
The machine prints the Drum Dot Check Sheet.
4. Press and hold to turn off the machine.
5. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching
them.
526
6. The color of printed dots on the Drum Dot Check Sheet is the color of the drum you should clean. Remove
the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly that matches the color causing the problem.
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with
disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the
illustration.
527
7. Push down the green lock lever and remove the toner cartridge from the drum unit.
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch any surface of the drum unit except the drum unit gear.
8. Lift the drum unit frame by the handle and rotate it counterclockwise, as shown.
9. Loosen your grip so the frame drops forward, and then use your right hand to locate the drum unit gear inside
the right side of the frame.
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch any surface of the drum unit except the drum unit gear.
528
10. Tilt your left hand up to lift the frame so the numbered grid is visible, as shown. Use your right hand to rotate
the drum while you look for marks or debris on the drum surface.
Use the column numbers next to the drum roller to find the mark. For example, a dot in column 2 on the
Drum Dot Check Sheet would mean that there is a mark in the “2” region of the drum.
11. Wipe the surface of the drum gently with a dry cotton swab until the mark on the surface comes off.
NOTE
DO NOT clean the surface of the photosensitive drum with a sharp object or any liquids.
529
12. Reinsert the toner cartridge firmly into the drum unit until you hear it lock into place.
2
1
Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit.
13. Slide the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner
cartridge color to the same color label on the machine.
BK
C
M
Y
14. Close the machine's top cover.
15. Press to turn on the machine.
Related Information
• Clean the Machine
Related Topics:
• Improve the Print Quality
530
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers periodically may prevent paper jams by ensuring that paper feeds correctly.
Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information: Clean the Machine.
If you have paper feed problems, clean the pick-up rollers as follows:
1. Press and hold to turn off the machine.
2. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
3. If paper is loaded or something is stuck inside in the paper tray, remove it.
4. Tightly wring out a lint-free cloth soaked in lukewarm water, and then wipe the separator pad on the paper
tray to remove dust.
5. Wipe the two pick-up rollers inside the machine to remove dust.
6. Reload the paper and put the paper tray firmly back in the machine.
7. Press to turn on the machine.
Related Information
• Clean the Machine
531
Home > Routine Maintenance > Correct Color Printing
Correct Color Printing
If the color print quality is poor, calibrate the output density of each color, and then perform the color alignment.
To perform the calibrations of each color's output density and color alignment in sequence, set the Auto
Correction function to On.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Color Correction] > [Correction
Start].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Yes].
The Color correction starts automatically, and will take a few minutes.
3. Press .
Related Information
• Routine Maintenance
• Set the Auto Correction Function
• Reset the Machine's Color Correction Settings
Related Topics:
• Improve the Print Quality
533
Home > Routine Maintenance > Correct Color Printing > Set the Auto Correction Function
Set the Auto Correction Function
If you want your machine to automatically perform color alignment after calibrating colors, turn on the Auto
Correction function.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Color Correction] > [Auto
Correction] > [On].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press .
Related Information
• Correct Color Printing
534
Home > Routine Maintenance > Correct Color Printing > Reset the Machine's Color Correction Settings
Reset the Machine's Color Correction Settings
If the output color differs from what you see on your screen, try resetting your machine's color correction settings.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Color Correction] > [Reset].
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Yes].
3. Press .
Related Information
• Correct Color Printing
535
Home > Routine Maintenance > Check the Remaining Part Life
Check the Remaining Part Life
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Machine Info.] > [Parts Life].
2. Press the machine part you want to check.
The LCD displays the approximate remaining part life.
3. Press
.
To display the approximate remaining life of the toner cartridge, press on the LCD.
Related Information
• Routine Maintenance
536
Home > Routine Maintenance > Pack and Ship Your Machine
Pack and Ship Your Machine
WARNING
• To prevent possible injuries, at least two people should lift the product by holding it at the front and back.
• If the machine has Optional Tray(s) installed, remove the Optional Tray(s) BEFORE moving the machine.
Attempting to move the machine without removing the Optional Tray(s) may cause injury to you or
damage to the machine.
• Pack the Optional Tray(s) separately in the original carton with original packing material.
• If for any reason you must ship your machine, carefully repack the machine in the original packaging to
avoid any damage during transit. The machine should be adequately insured with the carrier.
• Unless you are returning the machine as part of the Brother Exchange Service, leave the toner
cartridges and the drum unit inside the machine when you pack and ship it.
• The components included in the box may differ depending on your country.
1. Press and hold to turn off the machine. Leave the machine off for at least 10 minutes to cool down.
2. Disconnect all the cables, and then unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
3. Put the machine into the bag it originally came in.
4. Pack the machine, the printed materials, and the AC power cord (if applicable) in the original carton with the
original packing material as shown. (The original packing material may differ depending on your country.) If
you are returning your machine to Brother as part of the Exchange Service, pack only the machine.
537
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts
Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts
Replace the following parts regularly to maintain print quality. The parts listed below must be replaced after
printing approximately 50,000 pages
1
based on two pages per job and 100,000
1
pages based on five pages per
job for the Fuser Unit and approximately 50,000 pages
1
for the PF Kit MP.
Contact Brother Customer Service or a Brother Authorized Service Center when the following messages appear
on the LCD:
LCD Message Description
Maintenance
Replace Fuser
2
Replace the Fuser Unit.
Maintenance
Replace PF Kit MP
2 3
Replace the Paper Feeding Kit for the Multi-purpose Tray.
Related Information
• Routine Maintenance
1
Letter or A4 size single-sided pages
2
The replacement frequency depends on the complexity of printed pages, percentage of coverage, and the type of media used.
3
The kit includes the roller holder assembly, separation pad, and separation pad spring for the MP Tray.
539
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > In the Event of Power
Failure (Memory Storage)
In the Event of Power Failure (Memory Storage)
Your menu settings are stored permanently, and in the event of a power failure will not be lost.Temporary settings
(for example, Contrast, Overseas Mode) are lost.
• During a power failure, the machine will retain the date and time and programmed fax timer jobs (for
example, Delayed Fax) for approximately 60 hours. Other fax jobs in the machine's memory will not be lost.
• During a power failure, the machine will retain the date and time and programmed fax timer jobs (for
example, Delayed Fax) for approximately 55 hours. Other fax jobs in the machine's memory will not be lost.
Related Information
• Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
542
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings
General Settings
• Adjust the Machine's Volume
• Change for Daylight Saving Time Automatically
• Set Sleep Mode Countdown
• About Deep Sleep Mode
• Set Auto Power Off Mode
• Set the Date and Time
• Set the Time Zone
• Adjust the LCD Backlight Brightness
• Change How Long the LCD Backlight Stays On
• Set Your Station ID
• Set Tone or Pulse Dialing Mode (For Canada)
• Reduce Toner Consumption
• Add a Prefix to Every Fax Number
• Prevent Dialing a Wrong Number (Dial Restriction)
• Reduce Printing Noise
• Change the Language on the LCD
543
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Adjust
the Machine's Volume
Adjust the Machine's Volume
1. Do one of the following:
• For MFC models:
Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Volume].
• For DCP models:
Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Volume] > [Beep].
2. Press one of the following options (MFC models):
(The options will vary depending on your machine.)
• [Ring]
Adjust the ring volume.
• [Beep]
Adjust the volume of the beep you hear when you press a button, make a mistake, or after you send or
receive a fax.
• [Speaker]
Adjust the speaker volume.
3. Select the [Off], [Low], [Med] or [High] option, and then press the option you want.
4. Press
.
Related Information
• General Settings
544
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Change
for Daylight Saving Time Automatically
Change for Daylight Saving Time Automatically
You can program the machine to change automatically to Daylight Saving Time.
It will reset itself forward one hour in the spring, and back one hour in the fall. Make sure you have set the correct
date and time in the Date & Time setting.
This feature is available only in some countries.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Date & Time] > [Auto
Daylight].
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
545
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set
Sleep Mode Countdown
Set Sleep Mode Countdown
The Sleep Mode (or Power Save Mode) setting can reduce power consumption. When the machine is in Sleep
Mode, it acts as though it is turned off. The machine will wake up and start printing when it receives a print job or
a fax. Use these instructions to set a time delay (countdown) before the machine enters Sleep Mode.
• You can choose how long the machine must be idle before it goes into Sleep Mode.
• The timer will restart if any operation is carried out on the machine, such as receiving a print job.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Sleep Time].
2. Enter the length of time (maximum 50 minutes) the machine will remain idle before entering Sleep Mode, and
then press [OK].
3. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
546
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > About
Deep Sleep Mode
About Deep Sleep Mode
If the machine is in Sleep Mode and does not receive any jobs for a certain length of time, the machine will
automatically enter Deep Sleep Mode. The length of time is based on your specific model and settings.
Deep Sleep Mode uses less power than Sleep Mode.
The Deep Sleep Mode setting cannot be disabled due to environmental considerations.
Applicable Models Machine's Control Panel in Deep
Sleep Mode
Conditions That Will Wake the
Machine
MFC-L8395CDW The LCD backlight turns off and the
Power LED brightens and dims.
• The machine receives a job.
• Someone presses
, , or the
touchscreen LCD.
Related Information
• General Settings
547
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set
Auto Power Off Mode
Set Auto Power Off Mode
If the machine is in Deep Sleep Mode for certain length of time, based on your model and settings, the machine
will go into Power Off Mode automatically. The machine does not go into Power Off Mode when the machine is
connected to a network or a telephone line, or has secure print data in the memory(available for certain models).
To start printing, press on the control panel and then send a print job.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Auto Power
Off].
2. Press the [Off], [1 hour], [2 hours], [4 hours] or [8 hours] option you want.
3. Press
.
Related Information
• General Settings
548
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set the
Date and Time
Set the Date and Time
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Date & Time] > [Date].
2. Enter the last two digits of the year using the LCD, and then press [OK].
3. Enter the two digits for the month using the LCD, and then press [OK].
4. Enter the two digits for the day using the LCD, and then press [OK].
5. Press [Clock Type].
6. Press [12h Clock] or [24h Clock].
7. Press [Time].
8. To enter the time, do one of the following:
• If you selected [12h Clock] as the format in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time (in 12-hour
format) using the LCD.
Press
to select [AM] or [PM].
Press [OK].
• If you selected [24h Clock] as the format in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time (in 24-hour
format) using the LCD.
Press [OK].
(For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
9. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
549
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set the
Time Zone
Set the Time Zone
Set the time zone for your location on the machine.
For example, the time zone for Eastern Time in the USA and Canada is UTC-05:00. Pacific Time in the USA and
Canada is UTC-08:00.
Time Zone Standard Time
Hawaii-Aleutian Time Zone UTC - 10:00
Alaska Time Zone UTC - 9:00
Pacific Time Zone UTC - 8:00
Mountain Time Zone UTC - 7:00
Central Time Zone UTC - 6:00
Eastern Time Zone UTC - 5:00
Atlantic Time Zone UTC - 4:00
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Date & Time] > [Time Zone].
2. Enter your time zone.
3. Press [OK].
4. Press
.
Related Information
• General Settings
550
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Adjust
the LCD Backlight Brightness
Adjust the LCD Backlight Brightness
If you are having difficulty reading the LCD, changing the brightness setting may help.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [LCD Settings] >
[Backlight].
2. Press the [Light], [Med] or [Dark] option.
3. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
551
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Change
How Long the LCD Backlight Stays On
Change How Long the LCD Backlight Stays On
Set how long the LCD backlight stays on.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [LCD Settings] > [Dim
Timer].
2. Press the option you want:
• [10 Secs]
• [20 Secs]
• [30 Secs]
3. Press
.
Related Information
• General Settings
552
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set
Your Station ID
Set Your Station ID
Set the machine to print your Station ID and the fax's date and time at the top of each fax you send.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Station ID] > [Fax].
2. Enter your fax number (up to 20 digits) using the LCD, and then press [OK].
3. Press [Tel].
4. Enter your telephone number (up to 20 digits) using the LCD, and then press [OK].
5. Press [Name].
6. Enter your name (up to 20 characters) using the LCD, and then press [OK].
• Press to cycle between letters, numbers and special characters. (The characters available
may differ depending on your country.)
• If you enter an incorrect character, press d or c to move the cursor to it and press . Press the
correct character.
• To enter a space, press [Space] or c.
• For more detailed information, see Related Information.
7. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
Related Topics:
• How to Enter Text on Your Machine
553
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set
Tone or Pulse Dialing Mode (For Canada)
Set Tone or Pulse Dialing Mode (For Canada)
Your machine is set for a Tone dialing service. If you have a Pulse dialing (rotary) service, you must change the
dialing mode.
This feature is not available in some countries.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Tone/Pulse].
2. Press [Tone] or [Pulse].
3. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
554
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Reduce
Toner Consumption
Reduce Toner Consumption
Using the Toner Save feature may reduce toner consumption. When Toner Save is set to on, the print on your
documents appears lighter.
We DO NOT recommend using the Toner Save feature for printing photo or grayscale images.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Toner Save].
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
Related Topics:
• Improve the Print Quality
555
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Add a
Prefix to Every Fax Number
Add a Prefix to Every Fax Number
The Dial Prefix setting will automatically dial a predefined number before every fax number you dial. For
example: If your telephone system requires a 9 to dial an outside number, use this setting to automatically dial 9
for every fax you send.
• Use the numbers and symbols from 0 to 9, #, and *. (You cannot use ! with any other numbers or
symbols.)
• If your telephone system requires a time break recall (hookflash), press ! on the LCD.
• (Canada only) If pulse dialing mode is on, # and * are not available to use.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Dial Prefix].
2. Press [On] or [Off].
Option Description
On
To activate the prefix number setting, select On.
If you selected On, go to the next step to set a prefix number.
Off
To deactivate the prefix number setting, select Off.
If you selected Off, press to exit.
3. Press [Dial Prefix].
4. Enter a prefix number (up to five digits) using the LCD, and then press [OK].
To change the prefix number, press d or c to position the cursor under the digit to be deleted and press
. Then press the correct digit.
Repeat until the prefix number is correct, and then press [OK].
5. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
556
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Prevent
Dialing a Wrong Number (Dial Restriction)
Prevent Dialing a Wrong Number (Dial Restriction)
This feature prevents users from sending a fax or call to the wrong number by mistake. You can set the machine
to restrict dialing when you use the dial pad, Address Book, Shortcuts and LDAP search.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Dial Restriction].
2. Press one of the following options:
• [Dial Pad]
• [Address Book]
If you combine Address Book numbers when dialing, the numbers will be recognized as dial pad input and
will not be restricted.
• [Shortcuts]
• [LDAP Server]
3. Press one of the following options:
Option Description
Enter #
Twice
The machine prompts you to re-enter the number, and then if you re-enter the same
number correctly, the machine will start dialing. If you re-enter the wrong number, the LCD
will display an error message.
On
The machine restricts all fax sending and outbound calls for that dialing method.
Off
The machine does not restrict the dialing method.
• The [Enter # Twice] setting will not work if you use an external phone or press [Hook] before
entering the number. You will not be asked to re-enter the number.
• If you choose [On] or [Enter # Twice], you cannot use the Broadcasting feature.
4. Press .
Related Information
• General Settings
557
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Reduce
Printing Noise
Reduce Printing Noise
The Quiet Mode setting can reduce printing noise. When Quiet Mode is turned on, the print speed becomes
slower. The factory setting is off.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Quiet Mode].
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press
.
Related Information
• General Settings
558
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Change
the Language on the LCD
Change the Language on the LCD
Change the LCD language if needed.
This feature is not available in some countries.
1. Press
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Local Language].
2. Press your language.
3. Press
.
Related Information
• General Settings
559
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Save Your Favorite
Settings as a Shortcut > Add Shortcuts
Add Shortcuts
You can add the Fax, Copy, Scan, Web Connect and Apps settings you use most frequently by saving them as
your Shortcuts. Later you can press the Shortcut to apply these settings instead of manually re-entering them.
Some Shortcut menus are not available depending on your model.
These instructions describe how to add a Copy Shortcut. The steps for adding a Fax, Scan, Web Connect, or
Apps Shortcut are very similar.
1. Press [Shortcuts]. (If [Shortcuts] is displayed.)
2. Press a tab.
3. Press any
to add a new Shortcut.
4. Press [Copy].
5. Press the copy preset you want.
6. Press [Options].
7. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the available settings, and then press the setting you want to
change.
8. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the available options for the setting, and then press the option
you want.
Repeat these two steps until you have selected all the settings and options you want.
9. When you have finished changing settings, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
10. Press [OK].
11. Read and confirm the displayed list of settings you have selected, and then press [OK].
12. Enter a name for the Shortcut using the LCD, and then press [OK].
Related Information
• Save Your Favorite Settings as a Shortcut
561
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Save Your Favorite
Settings as a Shortcut > Change or Delete Shortcuts
Change or Delete Shortcuts
You cannot change a Web Connect Shortcut or Apps Shortcut. If you need to change them, delete them,
and then add a new Shortcut.
1. Press [Shortcuts]. (If [Shortcuts] is displayed.)
2. Press a tab to display the Shortcut you want to change.
3. Press the Shortcut you want to change.
The settings for the Shortcut you selected appear.
To delete the Shortcut or edit the name, press and hold the Shortcut until the options appear, and then
follow the on-screen menus.
4. Press [Options].
5. Change the settings for the Shortcut if needed.
6. Press [OK] (if needed).
7. When finished, press [Save as Shortcut].
8. Read and confirm the displayed list of settings you have selected, and then press [OK].
9. Do one of the following:
• To overwrite the Shortcut, press [Yes].
• If you do not want to overwrite the Shortcut, press [No] to enter a new Shortcut name.
Press any
to add a new Shortcut.
Enter a new name using the LCD, and then press [OK].
To edit the name, hold down to delete the current name.
Related Information
• Save Your Favorite Settings as a Shortcut
562
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Save Your Favorite
Settings as a Shortcut > Assign a Shortcut to an ID Card
Assign a Shortcut to an ID Card
You can assign one machine Shortcut to your ID card. When you touch your ID card to the machine's NFC
symbol, your personal Shortcut will automatically appear on the touchscreen.
• You cannot use the same ID card for different Shortcuts.
• To use the ID card for another Shortcut, unregister the card first, and then register it with the new
Shortcut.
1. If the Home screen appears, press [Shortcuts].
2. Press the tab that contains the Shortcut you want to assign to your IC card.
3. Press and hold the Shortcut until the options appear.
4. Press a or b to display the [Register Card/NFC] option, and then press it.
5. Touch the IC card to the NFC symbol.
6. Press [Register].
The Shortcut is assigned to the ID Card.
Related Information
• Save Your Favorite Settings as a Shortcut
563
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Print Reports > Reports
Reports
The following reports are available:
Transmission (For models with facsimile function)
The Transmission report prints a Transmission Verification Report of your last transmission.
Address Book (For models with facsimile function)
The Address Book report prints a list of names and numbers stored in the Address Book memory.
Fax Journal (For models with facsimile function)
The Fax Journal prints a list of information about your last 200 incoming and outgoing faxes. (TX means
Transmit, RX means Receive.)
User Settings
The User Settings report prints a list of your current settings.
Printer Settings
The Printer Settings report prints a list of your current printer settings.
Network Configuration (Models with network functionality)
The Network Configuration report prints a list of your current network settings.
Print File List
The Print File List prints a list of the fonts and print macro/stream setting stored in the machine.
Drum Dot Print
The Drum Dot Print prints the drum dot sheet, which helps when it is time to clean the drum unit.
WLAN Report (Models with wireless network functionality)
The WLAN Report prints the wireless LAN connectivity diagnosis.
Related Information
• Print Reports
565
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Print Reports > Print a
Report
Print a Report
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports].
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the report you want to print, and then press it.
3. Do one of the following:
• If you choose [Transmission], do one of the following:
- To view the Transmission Verification Report, press [View on LCD].
- To print the Transmission Verification Report, press [Print Report].
• If you choose other reports, go to next step.
4. Press [Yes].
5. Press .
Related Information
• Print Reports
566
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features
Tables > Settings Tables
Settings Tables
>> [Settings]
>> [General Setup]
>> [Shortcut Settings]
>> [Fax]
>> [Printer]
>> [Network]
>> [Print Reports]
>> [Machine Info.]
>> [Initial Setup]
[Settings]
[Settings]
Level 1
Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions
(Date &
Time)
- - Access the Date and Time setting menus.
Toner Toner Life
- View the approximate remaining toner life for each
color.
Test Print
- Print a test page.
Color
Correction
Correction
Start
Initiate color calibration to check and correct colors.
Reset
Reset the calibration parameters to the default
settings.
Toner Cartridge
Check
Black
Magenta
Cyan
Yellow
View the installed toner cartridge information on the
LCD, for example, if the toner cartridge is genuine.
Network Wired LAN
- Access the Wired LAN setting menus.
WLAN(Wi-Fi)
- Access the WLAN setting menus.
Tray Setting
- - Access the tray setting menus.
Fax Preview
- - View received faxes on the LCD.
Eco Mode
- - Turn on the following machine settings at the same
time:
• 2-sided Print: Long Edge
1
• Sleep Time: 0Min
• Dim Timer: 10Secs
• Quiet Mode:On
1
• Toner Save:On
1
All Settings
- - Configure the detailed settings.
1
Changing this setting is possible only after you change certain other machine settings in Web Based Management.
568
[General Setup]
[All Settings] > [General Setup]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Tray
Setting
Paper Type MP Tray
- Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
MP tray.
Tray 1
- Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
standard paper tray.
Tray 2
1
- Select the paper type that matches the paper in the
Optional Tray (Tray 2).
Paper Size MP Tray
- Select the paper size you loaded in the MP tray.
Tray 1
- Select the paper size you loaded in the standard
paper tray.
Tray 2
1
- Select the paper size you loaded in the Optional
Tray (Tray 2).
Tray Use: Copy
- - Select the tray you want to use for making a Copy.
Tray Use: Fax
- - Select the tray you want to use for printing a Fax.
Tray Use:
Print
- - Select the tray you want to use to Print.
Print Position MP Tray X Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the MP tray horizontally from -500 (left) to +500
(right) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Y Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the MP tray vertically from -500 (up) to +500
(down) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Tray 1 X Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the standard paper tray horizontally from -500 (left)
to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Y Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the standard paper tray vertically from -500 (up) to
+500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Tray 2
1
X Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the Optional tray (Tray 2) horizontally from -500
(left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Y Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper
left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in
the Optional tray (Tray 2) vertically from -500 (up)
to +500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Skip Tray
1
- - Select a specific tray to skip if you know it is loaded
with the wrong size paper.
Separator Tray
1
- - Select the tray that contains the paper used as the
separator paper, which is inserted between each
print job.
Check Paper
- - Select whether or not to display a message
indicating you must check the paper type and
paper size.
Volume Ring
- - Adjust the ring volume.
Beep
- - Adjust the beeper volume.
569
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Volume Speaker
- - Adjust the speaker volume.
LCD
Settings
Backlight
- - Adjust the brightness of the LCD backlight.
Dim Timer
- - Set how long the LCD backlight stays on after you
go back to your Main Home screen and other
functions.
Screen
Settings
Home Screen
- - Set the Main Home screen.
Scan Screen
- - Set the default Scan screen.
Display
Information
IP Address
- Select whether or not to display your machine's IP
Address on the Home screens.
Notice
Settings
Scan
Result(Skip
Blank Page)
- - Displays the total scanned pages and skipped
pages after scanning is completed.
Ecology Eco Mode
- - Turn on the following machine settings at the same
time:
• 2-sided Print: Long Edge
2
• Sleep Time: 0Min
• Dim Timer: 10Secs
• Quiet Mode:On
2
• Toner Save:On
2
Toner Save
- - Increase the page yield of the toner cartridge.
Sleep Time
- - Set how much time should pass before the
machine enters Power Saving mode.
Quiet Mode
- - Decrease printing noise.
Auto Power Off
- - Set the number of hours that the machine will
remain in Deep Sleep mode before going into
Power Off mode.
Setting
Lock
- - - Restrict unauthorized users from changing the
machine’s settings.
Delete
Storage
Macro ID
- - Delete the registered Macro data.
Stream ID
- - Delete the registered Stream data.
Font ID
- - Delete the registered Font data.
Delete All
- - Restore your machine's Macro/Stream and Font
data to the factory settings.
1
Available if the Optional Tray is installed.
2
Changing this setting is possible only after you change certain other machine settings in Web Based Management.
[Shortcut Settings]
[All Settings] > [Shortcut Settings]
Level 3
Level 4 Descriptions
(Select a Shortcut)
Rename
Change the shortcut name.
Edit
Change the shortcut settings.
Delete
Delete the shortcut.
Register Card/NFC
Assign a shortcut to an ID card.
Delete Card/NFC
Remove a shortcut from an ID card.
570
[Fax]
[All Settings] > [Fax]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Setup Receive Ring Delay
- Set the number of rings before the machine
answers in Fax or Fax/Tel mode.
Receive Mode
- Select the Receive Mode that best suits your
needs.
F/T Ring Time
- Set the length of the pseudo/double-ring time in
Fax/Tel mode.
Fax Preview
- View received faxes on the LCD.
Easy Receive
- Receive fax messages automatically when you
answer a call and hear fax tones.
Remote Codes Remote Codes
Answer calls at an extension or external telephone
and use codes to turn on or off the Remote Codes.
You can personalize the codes.
Fax Receive
Code
Tel Answer
Auto Reduction
- Reduce the size of incoming faxes.
PC Fax Receive On
Set the machine to send faxes to your computer.
You can turn on the Backup Print safety feature.
Off
Memory Receive Off
-
Fax Forward
Set the machine to forward fax messages or to
store incoming faxes in the memory (so you can
retrieve them while you are away from your
machine).
If you select Fax Forward or Fax Storage, you can
turn on the Backup Print safety feature.
Fax Storage
Forward to
Cloud
Forward incoming faxes to the online service.
Forward to
Network
Forward incoming faxes to a network destination.
Fax Rx Stamp
- Print the received time and date on the top of
incoming faxes.
2-sided
- Print incoming faxes on both sides of the paper.
Setup Send Batch TX
- Combine delayed faxes to the same fax number at
the same time of day into one transmission.
Coverpage
Message
- Set up one or two custom cover page messages to
print on outgoing faxes.
Auto Redial
- Set the machine to redial the last fax number after
five minutes, if the fax did not go through because
the line was busy.
Destination
- Set the machine to display the destination
information on the LCD during fax dialing.
Report Setting Transmission
- Select the initial setup for the Transmission
Verification Report.
Journal Period Journal
Period
Set the interval for automatic printing of the Fax
Journal.
Time
If you select an option other than Off and Every 50
Faxes, you can set the time for the option.
571
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Report Setting Journal Period Day
If you select Every 7 Days, you can set the day of
the week.
Print Fax
- - Print incoming faxes stored in the machine's
memory.
Remote Access
- - Set your own code for Remote Retrieval.
Dial Restriction Dial Pad
- Restrict the dialing when using the dial pad.
Address Book
- Restrict the dialing when using the Address Book.
Shortcuts
- Restrict the dialing when using a Shortcut.
LDAP Server
- Restrict the dialing of LDAP server numbers.
Remaining Jobs
- - Check which scheduled jobs are in the machine's
memory and cancel selected jobs.
Miscellaneous Distinctive Distinctive
Turn on the telephone company's Distinctive Ring
subscriber service to register your new ring pattern
on the machine.
Ring Pattern
Register your new ring pattern on the machine.
[Printer]
[All Settings] > [Printer]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Emulation
- - Select the emulation mode.
Quality
- - Select the print quality.
Print Options Font List HP LaserJet
Print a list of the machine’s internal fonts.
BR-Script 3
Test Print
- Print a test page.
2-sided 2-sided Print
- Enable or disable 2-sided printing and choose long
edge or short edge.
Single Image
- For a print job where the last page is a 1-sided
image, select the 1-sided Feed option to reduce
printing time.
When you use preprinted paper, you must select the
2-sided Feed option. If you select 1-sided
Feed for preprinted paper, the last page will be
printed on the reverse side.
Auto Continue
- - Select if you want the machine to clear paper size
errors or media type errors automatically, and use
paper from other trays.
Output Color
- - Set the output color.
Paper Type
- - Set the paper type.
Paper Size
- - Set the paper size.
Copies
- - Set the number of printed pages.
Orientation
- - Set pages to print in either portrait or landscape
orientation.
Edge Emphasis
- - Make the text appear sharper.
Print Position
- - Access the Print Position setting menus.
Auto FF
- - Allow the machine to print any remaining data
automatically.
572
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
HP LaserJet Font No. Font No.
Set the font number.
This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your
Brother machine.
Soft Font No.
Set the soft font number.
This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your
Brother machine.
Font Pitch
- Set the font pitch.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Font Point
- Set the font size.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Symbol Set
- Select the symbol or character set.
Table Print
- Print the code table.
Auto LF
- ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR
Auto CR
- ON: LF -> LF+CR, FF -> FF+CR, or VT -> VT+CR
OFF: LF -> LF, FF -> FF, or VT -> VT
Auto WRAP
- Select whether you want a line feed and carriage
return when the carriage position reaches the right
margin.
Auto SKIP
- Select whether you want a line feed and carriage
return when the carriage position reaches the bottom
margin.
Left Margin
- Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1
cpi.
Right Margin
- Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1
cpi.
Top Margin
- Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the
paper.
Bottom Margin
- Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom
edge of the paper.
Lines
- Set the number of lines on each page.
Tray Command
- Select this setting if a tray mismatch appears when
you use the HP drivers.
BR-Script 3 Error Print
- Choose whether the machine prints the error
information when errors occur.
CAPT
- Use CAPT (Color Advanced Printing Technology) for
optimal print quality when printing a PS file created
by a non-Brother PS driver.
Colors and photos appear clearer and more
accurate. Print speed will be slower.
PDF Multiple Page
- Set the page layout when printing multiple pages.
PDF Print
Options
- Set the PDF Print setting to print either comments
(Markup) or stamps in the PDF file, along with the
text.
PDF Fit to
Page
- Select if the machine scales or resizes the pages in
the PDF file to fit the selected paper size.
Carbon Menu Carbon Copy
- Enable or disable the Carbon Copy function.
Copies
- Set the number of printed pages.
Copy1 Tray
- Select the tray you use for Copy1.
Copy1 Stream
- Select a stream for Copy1.
573
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Carbon Menu Copy2 Tray
...
Copy8 Tray
- Select the tray you use for Copy2 to Copy8.
Copy2 Stream
...
Copy8 Stream
- Select a stream for Copy2 to 8.
Color Correction Correction
Start
- Perform color calibration to check and correct colors,
and then perform registration to align the print
position of each color.
Reset
- Reset the calibration parameters to the default
settings.
Auto
Correction
- Set the machine to perform Color Calibration and
Registration automatically.
Color Settings Setting Mode
Select whether to apply the color print settings of the
machine or the printer driver.
Color Mode
Select the color mode.
Improve Gray
Color
Turn on or off to improve the image quality of shaded
areas.
Enhance Black
Printing
Turn on or off if a black graphic does not print
correctly.
Brightness
Adjust the brightness.
Contrast
Adjust the contrast.
Red
Adjust the red color.
Green
Adjust the green color.
Blue
Adjust the blue color.
Reset Printer
- - Restore the machine settings to the factory settings.
[Network]
[All Settings] > [Network]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Wired LAN TCP/IP Boot Method
- Select the Boot method that best
suits your needs.
IP Address
- Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask
- Enter the Subnet mask.
Gateway
- Enter the Gateway address.
Node Name
- Enter the Node name.
(up to 32 characters)
WINS
Configuration
- Select the WINS configuration
mode.
WINS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the
primary WINS server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the
secondary WINS server.
DNS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the
primary DNS server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the
secondary DNS server.
574
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Wired LAN TCP/IP APIPA
- Set the machine to allocate the IP
address from the link-local
address range automatically.
IPv6
- Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off.
Ethernet
- - Select the Ethernet link mode.
Wired Status
- - View the current wired status.
MAC Address
- - View the machine's MAC address.
Set to Default
- - Restore the wired network
settings to the factory settings.
Wired Enable
- - Turn the Wired LAN interface on
or off manually.
WLAN(Wi-Fi) Find Wi-Fi
Network
- - Configure your wireless network
settings manually.
TCP/IP Boot Method
- Select the Boot method that best
suits your needs.
IP Address
- Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask
- Enter the Subnet mask.
Gateway
- Enter the Gateway address.
Node Name
- Enter the Node name.
(up to 32 characters)
WINS
Configuration
- Select the WINS configuration
mode.
WINS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the
primary WINS server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the
secondary WINS server.
DNS Server Primary
Specify the IP address of the
primary DNS server.
Secondary
Specify the IP address of the
secondary DNS server.
APIPA
- Set the machine to allocate the IP
address from the link-local
address range automatically.
IPv6
- Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off.
WPS/Push
Button
- - Configure your wireless network
settings using the one-button
push method.
WPS/PIN Code
- - Configure your wireless network
settings using WPS with a PIN.
WLAN Status Status
- View the current wireless network
status.
Signal
- View the current wireless network
signal strength.
SSID
- View the current SSID.
Comm. Mode
- View the current Communication
mode.
MAC Address
- - View the machine's MAC address.
Set to Default
- - Restore the wireless network
settings to the factory settings.
575
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
WLAN(Wi-Fi) WLAN Enable
- - Turns the wireless interface on or
off.
Wi-Fi Direct Manual
- - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct
network settings manually.
Group Owner
- - Set your machine as the Group
Owner.
Push Button
- - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct
network settings using the one-
button push method.
PIN Code
- - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct
network settings using WPS with
a PIN code.
Device
Information
Device Name
- View your machine's device
name.
SSID
- View the Group Owner's SSID.
When the machine is not
connected, the LCD displays Not
Connected.
IP Address
- View your machine's current IP
Address.
Status
Information
Status
- View the current Wi-Fi Direct
network status.
Signal
- View the current Wi-Fi Direct
network signal strength.
When your machine acts as
Group Owner, the LCD always
indicates a strong signal.
I/F Enable
- - Turn the Wi-Fi Direct connection
on or off.
NFC
- - - Turn the NFC function on or off.
E-mail/IFAX Mail Address
- - Enter the email address.
Setup Server SMTP Server
Enter the SMTP server name and
address.
Port
Enter the SMTP port number.
Auth. for
SMTP
Select the Security method for
email notification.
SSL/TLS
Send or receive an email via an
email server that requires secure
SSL/TLS communication.
Verify Cert.
Verify the SMTP Server Certificate
automatically.
POP3/IMAP4 Protocol
Select the protocol for receiving
an email from the server.
Server
Enter the server name and
address.
Port
Enter the port number.
Mailbox Name
Enter the mailbox name.
(Up to 255 characters)
Mailbox
Password
Enter the password to login to the
server.
(Up to 128 characters)
576
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
E-mail/IFAX Setup Server POP3/IMAP4 Select Folder
Select the specified folder in the
mailbox using the IMAP4 protocol.
SSL/TLS
Send or receive an email via an
email server that requires secure
SSL/TLS communication.
Verify Cert.
Verify the SMTP Server Certificate
automatically.
APOP
Turn APOP on or off.
Setup Mail RX Auto Polling Auto Polling
Check the server for new
messages automatically.
Poll
Frequency
Set the interval for checking new
messages on the server.
Header
- Select the contents of the email
header to be printed.
Del/Read Error
Mail
- The POP3 server deletes error
emails automatically. The IMAP4
server deletes error emails
automatically after you read them.
Notification
- Receive notification messages.
Setup Mail TX Sender Subject
- View the subject.
Size Limit Size Limit
Limit the size of email documents.
Maximum
Size(MB)
Notification
- Send notification messages.
Setup Relay Relay Broadcast
- Relay a document to another fax
machine.
Relay Domain
Relay ## Register the Domain name.
Relay Report
- Print the relay Broadcast Report.
Report Setting E-mail Transmission
Select the initial setup for the
Transmission Verification Report.
IFAX Transmission
Manual Receive
- - Check the POP3 or IMAP4 server
for new messages manually.
Web Connect
Settings
Proxy Settings Proxy
Connection
- Change the Web connection
settings.
Address
-
Port
-
User Name
-
Password
-
Web Based
Mgmt
- - - Enable or disable Web Based
Management.
If you enable this function, make
sure you specify the connection
method to use Web Based
Management.
Fax to
Server
Fax to Server
- - Select the network connection
type.
Prefix
- -
Suffix
- -
IPsec
- - - IPsec is an optional security
feature of the IP protocol that
577
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
provides authentication and
encryption services. We
recommend contacting your
network administrator before
changing this setting.
Global
Detect
Allow Detect
- - Enable or disable Global Detect, a
function that detects and notifies
the user when the user
unintentionally connects to a
global network.
Reject Access
- - Disable connections to the global
network.
Network
Reset
- - - Restore all network settings back
to the factory settings.
[Print Reports]
[All Settings] > [Print Reports]
Level 3
Level 4 Descriptions
Transmission View on LCD
Display Transmission Verification Reports about sent faxes.
Print Report
Print a Transmission Verification Report of your last transmission.
Address Book
- Print a list of names and numbers stored in the Address Book.
Fax Journal
- Print a list of information about your last 200 incoming and outgoing
faxes.
(TX means Transmit. RX means Receive.)
User Settings
- Print a list of your User settings.
Printer Settings
- Print a list of your Printer settings.
Network Configuration
- Print a list of your Network settings.
Print File List
- Print a list of data saved in the machine's memory.
Drum Dot Print
- Print the Drum Dot Check Sheet.
WLAN Report
- Print the wireless LAN connection results.
[Machine Info.]
[All Settings] > [Machine Info.]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Serial No.
- - Check your machine's serial number.
Firmware Version Main Version
- Check your machine's firmware version.
Security
Version
-
Firmware Update
- - Update your machine to the latest firmware.
Firmware Auto
Check
- - View firmware information on the Main Home
screen.
Page Counter Total Color
Check the total number of pages the machine has
printed.
Black and
White
Fax
-
Copy Color
578
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Page Counter Copy Black and
White
Check the total number of pages the machine has
printed.
Print Color
Black and
White
Other Color
Black and
White
Parts Life
1
Drum Black(BK)
Display the remaining life of each drum unit.
Cyan(C)
Magenta(M)
Yellow(Y)
Belt
- Display the remaining life of the belt unit.
Fuser
- Display the remaining life of the fuser unit.
PF Kit MP
- Display the remaining life of the PF Kit MP.
1
The parts life is approximate and may vary by type of use.
[Initial Setup]
[All Settings] > [Initial Setup]
Level 3
Level 4 Descriptions
Date & Time Date
Add the date and time on the screen and in the headings of the
faxes you send.
Time
Clock Type
Select the time format (12-hour or 24-hour).
Auto Daylight
(Available only for
certain countries)
Set the machine to change automatically for Daylight Saving Time.
Time Zone
Set your time zone.
Station ID Fax
Enter your name and fax number so it appears on each page you
fax.
Tel
Name
Tone/Pulse
(Available only for certain
countries)
- Select the dialing mode.
Dial Tone
- Shorten the dial tone detection pause.
Dial Prefix
- Set a prefix number to be added before the fax number every time
you dial.
Compatibility
- Adjust the equalization for transmission difficulties.
VoIP service providers offer fax support using various standards. If
you regularly experience fax transmission errors, select Basic (for
VoIP).
Reset Machine Reset
Restore the machine settings that you have changed.
Network Reset
Restore all network settings back to the factory settings.
Address Book
& Fax
Erase all stored phone numbers and fax settings.
579
Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
Reset All Settings
Restore all the machine's settings back to the factory settings and
delete the personal data in the memory. You cannot see the data on
the machine.
Factory Reset
Restore all the machine settings back to the factory settings and
delete the personal data in the machine's memory. We recommend
using this menu option if you want to delete all the data from the
machine.
Local Language
(Available only for certain
countries)
- Change your LCD language.
Related Information
• Settings and Features Tables
580
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features
Tables > Feature Tables
Feature Tables
>> Wi-Fi Setup
>> [Toner]
>> [Fax] (When Fax Preview is Off)
>> [Fax] (When Fax Preview is On)
>> [Copy]
>> [Scan]
>> [Shortcuts]
>> [Secure Print]
>> [Web]
>> [Apps]
>> [USB]
>> [2 in 1 ID Copy]
Wi-Fi Setup
(Wi-Fi Setup)
Level 2
Level 3 Descriptions
(Wi-Fi Setup)
Find Wi-Fi Network
Configure your wireless network settings manually.
TCP/IP
1
Change the TCP/IP settings.
WPS/Push Button
Configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push
method.
WPS/PIN Code
1
Configure the wireless network settings using WPS with a PIN code.
WLAN Status
1
Display the wireless network connection status.
MAC Address
1
Display your machine's MAC address.
Set to Default
1
Restore your machine's wireless network settings to the factory
settings.
WLAN Enable
1
Turn the wireless interface on or off.
1
Available after a Wi-Fi
®
connection has been configured.
[Toner]
[Toner]
Level 2
Level 3 Descriptions
Toner Life
- View the approximate remaining toner life for each color.
Test Print
- Print a test page.
Color Correction Correction Start
Initiate color calibration to check and correct colors.
Reset
Reset the calibration parameters to the default settings.
Toner Cartridge
Check
Black
Magenta
Cyan
Yellow
View the installed toner cartridge information on the LCD, for
example, if the toner cartridge is genuine.
581
[Fax] (When Fax Preview is Off)
[Fax] (When Fax Preview is Off)
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Hook
- - - Press before dialing if you want to listen to
make sure a fax machine has answered,
and then press Fax Start.
Address Book
(Search:)
- - Search within the Address Book.
Edit Add New
Address
Name
Store Address Book numbers, set up Group
numbers for Broadcasting, change and
delete Address Book numbers.
Address
Setup Groups Name
Add/
Delete
Change
(Select
Address
Book)
Delete
(Select
Address
Book)
(Select Address
Book)
Apply
- Start sending a fax using the Address Book.
Call History Redial
- - Redial the last number you dialed.
Outgoing Call
(Select
Outgoing Call)
Apply
Select a number from the Outgoing Call
history, and then send a fax to it, add it to
the Address Book, or delete it.
Edit
Fax Start
- - - Send a fax.
Options
Fax Resolution
- - Set the resolution for outgoing faxes.
Contrast
- - Adjust the contrast.
2-sided Fax
- - Set the 2-sided scanning format.
Glass Scan Size
- - Adjust the scan area of the scanner glass to
the size of the document.
Broadcasting Add Number Add
Number
Send the same fax message to more than
one fax number.
Add from
Address
book
Search in
Address
book
Preview
- - Preview a fax message before you send it.
Delayed Fax Delayed Fax
- Set the time of day the delayed faxes will
be sent.
Set Time
-
Real Time TX
- - Send a fax without using the memory.
Coverpage Setup Coverpage
Setup
- Set the machine to automatically send a
pre-programmed cover page.
Coverpage
Message
-
582
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
Options
Coverpage Setup Total Pages
Set the machine to automatically send a
pre-programmed cover page.
-
Overseas Mode
- - Set to On if you have difficulty sending
faxes overseas.
Call History
- - Select a number from the Outgoing Call
history, and then send a fax to it, add it to
the Address Book, or delete it.
Address Book
- - Select the address of the recipient from the
address book.
Set New Default
- - Save your settings as the default.
Factory Reset
- - Restore all settings back to the factory
settings.
Save as
Shortcut
- - - Save the current settings as a shortcut.
[Fax] (When Fax Preview is On)
[Fax] (When Fax Preview is On)
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Sending Faxes Hook
- Press before dialing if you want to listen to make sure a
fax machine has answered, and then press Fax Start.
Address Book
- Select the address of the recipient from the address
book.
Call History
- Select a number from the Outgoing Call history, and then
send a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or delete it.
Fax Start
- Send a fax.
Options
- Select your settings.
Save as
Shortcut
- Save the current settings as a shortcut.
Received Faxes Print/Delete Print
All(New
Faxes)
Print the new received faxes.
Print
All(Old
Faxes)
Print the old received faxes.
Delete
All(New
Faxes)
Delete the new received faxes.
Delete
All(Old
Faxes)
Delete the old received faxes.
Address Book
- - Select the address of the recipient from the address
book.
Call History
- - Select a number from the Outgoing Call history, and then
send a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or delete it.
583
[Copy]
[Copy]
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
Black Start
- - Make a black and white or grayscale copy.
Color Start
- - Make a color copy.
ID
- - Make a copy of your ID card.
Options
Quality
- Select the Copy resolution for your document
type.
Tray Use
- Select the paper tray you want to use.
Enlarge/Reduce 100%
-
Enlarge
Select an enlargement ratio for the next copy.
Reduce
Select a reduction ratio for the next copy.
Custom(25-400%)
Enter an enlargement or reduction ratio.
Density
- Adjust the density.
Remove
Background Color
- Change the amount of background color that is
removed.
2-sided Copy Layout
Turn off or turn on 2-sided copying and select
flip on long edge or flip on short edge.
2-sided Copy
Page Layout
- Select a page layout option when you make 2-
sided N in 1 copies from a 2-sided document.
Contrast
- Adjust the contrast.
Stack/Sort
- Select to stack or sort multiple copies.
2in1/1in1
- If you select 2 in 1 (ID), you can select the
layout options.
Page Layout
- Make N in 1 copies.
Auto Deskew
- Set the machine to correct document skewing
automatically.
Color Adjust Red
Adjust the color for copies.
Green
Blue
Save as Shortcut
- - Save the current settings as a shortcut.
[Scan]
[Scan]
Level 3
Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
to USB Other Scan
to Actions
- - Scan documents to a USB flash
drive.
Options
2-sided Scan
-
Color Setting
-
Resolution
-
File Type
-
Document Size
-
584
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
to USB
Options
Brightness
Scan documents to a USB flash
drive.
-
Contrast
-
File Name
-
File Name Style
-
File Size
-
Auto Crop
-
Auto Deskew
-
Skip Blank Page
Skip Blank Page
Sensitivity
-
Remove
Background
Color
-
Margin Settings
-
Document
Separation
Document
Separation
Copies
Number of
Pages
B&W TIFF
Compression
-
Set New Default
-
Factory Reset
-
Save as
Shortcut
- -
Start
- -
to My E-mail
- - - Scan a black and white or a color
document to your email address.
to My Folder
- - - Send scanned data to your folder
in the CIFS server on your local
network or on the Internet.
to PC to File Other Scan to
Actions
- Scan documents and save them to
a folder on your computer.
(Select USB or PC)
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to OCR Other Scan to
Actions
- Convert your scanned document to
an editable text file.
(Select USB or PC)
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to Image Other Scan to
Actions
- Scan photos or graphics into your
graphics applications.
(Select USB or PC)
Options
585
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions
to PC to Image
(Select USB or PC)
Save as
Shortcut
Scan photos or graphics into your
graphics applications.
Start
to E-mail Other Scan to
Actions
- Send a scanned document as an
email attachment.
(Select USB or PC)
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to E-mail Server Other Scan
to Actions
- - Scan a black and white or a color
document to the email address you
want.
Manual
- -
Address Book
(Search:)
-
Edit
-
(Select Address
Book)
-
to FTP/SFTP Other Scan
to Actions
- - Send scanned data via FTP/SFTP.
(Select Profile
name)
Options
-
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start
-
to Network Other Scan
to Actions
- - Send scanned data to a CIFS
server on your local network or on
the Internet.
(Select Profile
name)
Options
-
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start
-
to SharePoint Other Scan
to Actions
- - Send scanned data via a
SharePoint server.
(Select Profile
name)
Options
-
Save as
Shortcut
-
Start
-
to Web
- - - Upload the scanned data to an
Internet service.
WS Scan
(Appears when you
install a Web
Services Scanner,
which is displayed in
your computer's
Network explorer.)
Other Scan
to Actions
- - Scan data using the Web Service
protocol.
Scan
- -
Scan for E-
mail
- -
Scan for Fax
- -
Scan for
Print
- -
586
[Shortcuts]
[Shortcuts]
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions
Add Shortcut
Copy
- Select the settings you want.
Fax
- Select the settings you want.
Scan to File
Scan a black and white or a color document
to your computer.
to OCR
Convert your scanned document to an
editable text file.
to Image
Scan a color picture into your graphics
application.
to USB
Scan documents to a USB flash drive.
to E-mail
Scan a black and white or a color document
into your email application.
to E-mail
Server
Scan a black and white or a color document
to the email address you want.
to Network
Send scanned data to a CIFS server on your
local network or on the Internet.
to FTP/SFTP
Send scanned data via FTP/SFTP.
to SharePoint
Send scanned data via a SharePoint server.
Web
- Connect the Brother machine to an Internet
service.
Web services may have been added and
service names may have been changed by
the provider since this document was
published.
Apps
- Connect the Brother machine to the Brother
Apps service.
These lists appears when
each Shortcut name is
pressed for two seconds.
Rename
- Change the shortcut name.
Edit
- Change the shortcut settings.
Delete
- Delete the shortcut.
Register
Card/NFC
- Assign a shortcut to an ID card.
Delete
Card/NFC
- Remove a shortcut from an ID card.
Edit/ Delete
(Select shortcut
button.)
Rename
Change the shortcut name.
Edit
Change the shortcut settings.
Delete
Delete the shortcut.
Register
Card/NFC
Assign a shortcut to an ID card.
Delete Card/NFC
Remove a shortcut from an ID card.
587
[Secure Print]
[Secure Print]
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions
Secure
Print
(Select User) (Select Secure
Print Job)
You can print data saved in the machine's memory when you
enter your four-digit password.
Active only when the machine has secure print data.
[Web]
[Web]
Level 1
Descriptions
Web
Connect the Brother machine to an Internet service.
[Apps]
[Apps]
Level 1
Descriptions
Apps
Connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps service.
[USB]
[USB]
Level 1
Level 2 Descriptions
USB Scan to USB
Scan documents to a USB flash drive.
Direct Print
Print the data directly from the USB flash drive.
[2 in 1 ID Copy]
[2 in 1 ID Copy]
Level 1
Descriptions
2 in 1 ID Copy
Copy both sides of an identification card onto one page.
Related Information
• Settings and Features Tables
588
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
Web Based Management is a utility that uses a standard web browser to manage your machine using the Hyper
Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) or Hyper Text Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS).
• What is Web Based Management?
• Access Web Based Management
• Set or Change a Login Password for Web Based Management
• Set Up Your Machine's Address Book Using Web Based Management
589
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management > What is Web
Based Management?
What is Web Based Management?
Web Based Management is a utility that uses a standard web browser to manage your machine using the Hyper
Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) or Hyper Text Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS).
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
•
Make sure your machine is On and connected to the same network as your computer, and that your
network supports the TCP/IP protocol.
The actual screen may differ from the screen shown above.
590
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management > Access Web
Based Management
Access Web Based Management
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
- Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Windows
- Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome
™
for Mac
- Google Chrome
™
for Android
™
- Safari and Google Chrome
™
for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
• We recommend using the HTTPS security protocol when configuring settings using Web Based
Management.
• When you use HTTPS for Web Based Management configuration, your browser will display a warning
dialog box. To avoid displaying the warning dialog box, you can install a self-signed certificate to use
SSL/TLS communication. For more information, see Related Information.
• The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd". We recommend immediately changing the default password to protect your machine from
unauthorized access.
>> Access Web Based Management from your Web Browser
>> Access Web Based Management from Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
>> Access Web Based Management from Brother Utilities (Windows)
Access Web Based Management from your Web Browser
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. If you want to pin the navigation menu on the left side of the screen, click and then click .
You can now change the machine's settings.
Access Web Based Management from Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
1. Start Brother iPrint&Scan.
• Windows
Launch
(Brother iPrint&Scan).
• Mac
592
In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications, and then double-click the iPrint&Scan icon.
The Brother iPrint&Scan screen appears.
2. If your Brother machine is not selected, click the Select your Machine button, and then select your model
name from the list. Click OK.
3. Click
(Machine Settings).
4. Click All Settings.
The Web Based Management page appears.
5. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
6. If you want to pin the navigation menu on the left side of the screen, click and then click .
You can now change the machine's settings.
You can also access Web Based Management from Brother Mobile Connect for mobile devices.
Access Web Based Management from Brother Utilities (Windows)
1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
selected).
2. Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Machine Settings.
The Web Based Management page appears.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. If you want to pin the navigation menu on the left side of the screen, click and then click .
You can now change the machine's settings.
If you change the protocol settings, you must restart the machine after clicking Submit to activate the
configuration.
After configuring the settings, click Logout.
Related Information
• Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
Related Topics:
• Print the Network Configuration Report
• Create a Self-signed Certificate
• Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows Users as Administrators
• Use SSL/TLS
593
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management > Set or Change a
Login Password for Web Based Management
Set or Change a Login Password for Web Based Management
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd". We recommend immediately changing the default password to protect your machine from unauthorized
access.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. Do one of the following:
• If you have previously set your own password, type it, and then click Login.
• If you have not previously set your own password, type the default login password, and then click Login.
4. In the left navigation bar, click Administrator > Login Password.
• The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and
marked "Pwd".
• If the left navigation bar is not visible, start navigating from .
5. To change the password, type your current password in the Enter Old Password field.
6. Following the on-screen Login Password guidelines, type your new password in the Enter New Password
field.
7. Retype the new password in the Confirm New Password field.
8. Click Submit.
You can also change the lockout settings in the Login Password menu.
Related Information
• Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
Related Topics:
• Access Web Based Management
594
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management > Set Up Your
Machine's Address Book Using Web Based Management
Set Up Your Machine's Address Book Using Web Based Management
• We recommend using the HTTPS security protocol when configuring settings using Web Based
Management.
• When you use HTTPS for Web Based Management configuration, your browser will display a warning
dialog box.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your
machine's IP address).
For example:
https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such
as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login.
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
"Pwd".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Address Book.
Start from
, if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click the target address numbers, and then add or update the Address Book information as needed.
6. Click Submit.
Related Information
• Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
595
Home > Appendix > Specifications
Specifications
>> General Specifications
>> Document Size Specification
>> Print Media Specifications
>> Fax Specifications
>> Copy Specification
>> Scanner Specifications
>> Printer Specifications
>> Interface Specifications
>> Direct Print Feature Specifications
>> Supported Protocols and Security Features
>> Computer Requirements Specifications
General Specifications
Printer Type
LED
Print Method Electrophotographic LED Printer
Memory Capacity Standard 512 MB
Machine display
3.5 in. (87.6 mm) TFT Color touchscreen LCD
1
Power Source 110 V to 120 V AC 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
(Average)
Peak Approximately 960 W
Printing
2
Approximately 660 W at 77°F (25°C)
Printing
(Quiet Mode)
2
Approximately 310 W at 77°F (25°C)
Copying
2
Approximately 660 W at 77°F (25°C)
Copying
(Quiet Mode)
2
Approximately 310 W at 77°F (25°C)
Ready
2
Approximately 70 W at 77°F (25°C)
Sleep
2
Approximately 7 W
Deep Sleep
2
Approximately 0.55 W
Power Off
3 4
Approximately 0.02 W
Dimensions
(Typical outline view)
Unit: in. (mm)
* : 16.1 (410)
** : 15.8 (401)
*** : 18.2 (462)
Weight (with supplies) 47.8 lb (21.7 kg)
Noise Level Sound Pressure Printing LpAm = 48 dB (A)
Printing
(Quiet Mode)
LpAm = 43 dB (A)
Ready
Default: Inaudible
5
597
Noise Level Sound Pressure
Sound Power
Printing
6
Monochrome
LWAc = 6.62 B (A)
Color
LWAc = 6.67 B (A)
Printing
(Quiet Mode)
Monochrome
LWAc = 5.79 B (A)
Color
LWAc = 5.86 B (A)
Ready
Default: Inaudible
7
Temperature Operating From 50°F to 90.5°F (10°C to 32.5°C)
Storage From 32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C)
Humidity Operating 20% to 80% (without condensation)
Storage 35 to 85% (without condensation)
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Up to 50 sheets
For best results we recommend:
• Temperature: 68°F to 86°F (20°C to 30°C)
• Humidity: 50% to 70%
• Paper: 20 lb (80 g/m
2
)
1
Measured diagonally.
2
Measured when the machine is connected using the same network connection as the ENERGY STAR Ver. 3.1 test method.
3
Measured according to IEC 62301 Edition 2.0.
4
Power consumption varies slightly depending on the usage environment.
5
If fan motor is functioning: LpAm = 40 dB (A)
6
Measured in accordance with the method described in ISO 7779.
7
If fan motor is functioning: LWAc = 3.17 B (A)
Document Size Specification
Document Size
ADF Width 4.1 in. to 8.5 in. (105 mm to 215.9 mm)
ADF Length 5.8 in. to 14.0 in. (147.3 mm to 355.6 mm)
Scanner Glass Width Maximum 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)
Scanner Glass Length Maximum 11.8 in. (300 mm)
Print Media Specifications
Paper Input
Paper Tray
(Standard)
Paper Type Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Thick Paper, Recycled Paper
Paper Size A4, Letter, B5 (JIS), B5 (ISO), A5, A5 (Long Edge), B6
(JIS), A6, Executive, Legal, Folio, Mexico Legal, India
Legal, 16K(195x270mm), A4 Short (270mm Paper)
Paper Weight 16 to 43 lb (60 to 163 g/m²)
Maximum Paper
Capacity
Up to 250 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m
2
) Plain Paper
Multi-Purpose Tray
(MP tray)
Paper Type Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Thick Paper, Recycled Paper,
Bond, Label, Envelope, Env. Thin, Env.Thick, Glossy
Paper
Paper Size • Width:
3.0 in. to 8.5 in. (76.2 mm to 216 mm)
• Length:
598
Paper Input Multi-Purpose Tray
(MP tray)
4.57 in. to 14 in. (116 mm to 355.6 mm)
• Envelope:
COM-10, DL, C5, Monarch
Paper Weight
16 to 43 lb (60 to 163 g/m
2
)
Maximum Paper
Capacity
• Up to 30 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m
2
) Plain Paper
• Envelope: three envelopes up to 0.2 in. (6 mm) thick
Paper Tray 2
(Optional)
Paper Type Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Recycled Paper
Paper Size A4, Letter, B5 (JIS), A5, Executive, Legal, Folio, Mexico
Legal, India Legal, 16K (195x270mm), A4 Short (270mm
Paper)
Paper Weight
16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m
2
)
Maximum Paper
Capacity
Up to 250 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m
2
) Plain Paper
Paper
Output
1
Face Down Output Tray
Up to 150 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m
2
) Plain Paper (face-
down delivery to the face-down output paper tray)
Face Up Output Tray One sheet (face up delivery to the face up output tray)
2-sided Automatic 2-sided
Printing
Paper Type Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Recycled Paper
Paper Size Letter, Legal, Folio, Mexico Legal, India Legal
Paper Weight
16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m
2
)
1
For labels, we recommend removing the printed sheets from the output paper tray immediately after they exit the machine to avoid the
possibility of smudging.
Fax Specifications
NOTE
This feature is available for MFC models.
Compatibility
ITU-T Super Group 3
Coding System MH / MR / MMR / JBIG
Modem Speed 33,600 bps (with Automatic Fallback)
2-sided Print Receiving Yes
Automatic 2-sided Sending Yes (from the ADF)
Scanning Width Maximum 8.19 in. (208 mm)
Printing Width Maximum 8.17 in. (207.4 mm)
Gray Scale 8 bit / 256 levels
Resolution Horizontal 203 dpi
Vertical Standard: 98 dpi
Fine: 196 dpi
Super fine: 392 dpi
Photo: 196 dpi
Address Book 300 Locations
Groups Up to 20
Broadcasting 350 Locations
Automatic Redial 1 time at 5-minute intervals
Memory Transmission
Up to 500 pages
1
599
Out of Paper Reception
Up to 500 pages
1
1
‘Pages’ refers to the ‘ITU-T TestChart Document No.1’ (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, JBIG code).
Copy Specification
Copy Width Maximum 8.27 in. (210 mm)
Automatic 2-sided Copy Yes (from the ADF)
Sort Copy Yes
Stack Copy Up to 999 pages
Enlarge/Reduce 25 to 400% (in increments of 1%)
Resolution Maximum 600 x 600 dpi
First Copy Out Time
1
Monochrome
Less than 13.5 seconds at 73.4°F (23°C) / 115 V
Color
Less than 14.5 seconds at 73.4°F (23°C) / 115 V
1
From Ready Mode and standard tray.
Scanner Specifications
Color / Black
Yes / Yes
TWAIN Compliant Yes
(Windows 10 / Windows 11)
WIA Compliant Yes
(Windows 10 / Windows 11)
Color Depth • 48 bit color Processing (Input)
• 24 bit color Processing (Output)
Gray Scale • 16 bit color Processing (Input)
• 8 bit color Processing (Output)
Resolution
1
• Up to 19200 x 19200 dpi (interpolated)
• Up to 1200 x 1200 dpi (from Scanner Glass)
• Up to 600 x 600 dpi (from the ADF)
Scanning Width Maximum 8.27 in. (210 mm)
Automatic 2-sided Scanning Yes (from the ADF)
1
Maximum 600 × 600 dpi scanning with the WIA driver in Windows 10 and Windows 11 (resolution up to 19200 × 19200 dpi can be
selected by using the scanner utility).
Printer Specifications
Automatic 2-sided Print
Yes
Emulation PCL5e, PCL5c, PCL6 (PCL XL Class3.0), BR-Script3, PDF Version 1.7, XPS Version
1.0
Resolution 600 x 600 dpi, 2,400 dpi class (600 x 2400) quality
Print Speed
1
1-sided Print
2
Monochrome
Up to 31 pages/minute (Letter size)
Up to 30 pages/minute (A4 size)
Color
600
Print Speed
1
1-sided Print
2
Up to 31 pages/minute (Letter size)
Up to 30 pages/minute (A4 size)
2-sided Print Monochrome
Up to 12 sides/minute (Up to 6 sheets/minute) (Letter or A4 size)
Color
Up to 12 sides/minute (Up to 6 sheets/minute) (Letter or A4 size)
First Print Time
3
Monochrome
Less than 12.5 seconds at 73.4°F (23°C) / 115 V
Color
Less than 12.5 seconds at 73.4°F (23°C) / 115 V
1
The print speed may be slower when the machine is connected by wireless LAN.
2
These print speeds are for 1-sided printing and measured in accordance with the ISO/IEC 24734 standard.
3
Printing from Ready mode and standard tray.
Interface Specifications
USB
1
2
Hi-Speed USB 2.0
Use a USB 2.0 interface cable that is no more than 6 feet (2 meters) long.
LAN
10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T
3
Wireless LAN 5 GHz
IEEE 802.11a/n (Infrastructure Mode)
IEEE 802.11a/n (Wi-Fi Direct
®
)
2.4 GHz
IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Infrastructure Mode)
IEEE 802.11g/n (Wi-Fi Direct
®
)
NFC
4
Yes
1
Your machine has a USB 2.0 Hi-Speed interface. The machine can also be connected to a computer that has a USB 1.1 interface.
2
Third party USB hub devices are not supported.
3
Use a Category 5e (or greater) network cable.
4
When you connect an external IC card reader, use a HID class driver supported device.
Direct Print Feature Specifications
Compatibility
PDF version1.7, JPEG, Exif+JPEG, PRN (created by the machine's own printer driver), TIFF
(scanned by Brother models), XPS version 1.0
Interface USB direct interface: Front x1
Supported Protocols and Security Features
Ethernet
10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T
Wireless LAN (5 GHz)
IEEE 802.11a/n (Infrastructure Mode), IEEE 802.11a/n (Wi-Fi Direct)
Wireless LAN (2.4 GHz)
IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Infrastructure Mode), IEEE 802.11g/n (Wi-Fi Direct)
601
Protocols (IPv4)
ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA (Auto IP), WINS/NetBIOS name resolution, DNS Resolver, mDNS,
LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD, Custom Raw Port/Port9100, POP3, SMTP Client, IPP/IPPS, FTP Client and
Server, CIFS Client, TELNET Server, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, HTTP/HTTPS server, TFTP client and server, ICMP,
Web Services (Print/Scan), SNTP Client, LDAP, IMAP4, Syslog
Protocols (IPv6)
NDP, RA, DNS resolver, mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD, Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS, POP3,
SMTP Client, FTP Client and Server, CIFS Client, TELNET Server, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, HTTP/HTTPS server,
TFTP client and server, ICMPv6, SNTP Client, LDAP, Web Services (Print/Scan), IMAP4, Syslog
Network Security (Wired)
APOP, SMTP-AUTH, SSL/TLS (IPP, HTTP, SMTP, POP3, IMAP4, FTP), SNMP v3, 802.1x (EAP-MD5, EAP-
FAST, PEAP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS), Kerberos, IPsec
Network Security (Wireless)
APOP, SMTP-AUTH, SSL/TLS (IPP, HTTP, SMTP, POP3, IMAP4, FTP), SNMP v3, 802.1x (EAP-FAST, PEAP,
EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS), Kerberos, IPsec
Wireless Network Security
WEP 64/128 bit, WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES), WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES), WPA3-SAE (AES) (Wi-Fi Direct supports
WPA2-PSK (AES) only)
Wireless Certification
Wi-Fi Certification Mark License (WPA3
™
- Enterprise, Personal), Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
(WPS) Identifier
Mark License, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED
™
Wi-Fi Direct
Computer Requirements Specifications
Supported Operating Systems And Software Functions
Computer Platform &
Operating System Version
Computer Interface Processor
Hard Disk Space to Install
1
USB
2
Wired LAN Wireless
LAN
For Drivers For
Applications
(including
Drivers)
Windows
Operating
System
Windows 10
Home / 10 Pro / 10
Education / 10
Enterprise
3 4
Printing
PC Fax
5
Scanning
32 bit (x86)
or 64 bit
(x64)
processor
80 MB 1.8 GB
Windows 11 Home /
11 Pro / 11
Education / 11
Enterprise
3 4
64 bit (x64)
processor
Windows Server
2012
Printing
Scanning
Printing 64 bit (x64)
processor
80 MB 80 MB
Windows Server
2012 R2
Windows Server
2016
Windows Server
2019
Windows Server
2022
602
Mac
Operating
System
7
macOS v11 Printing
PC Fax (Send)
5 6
Scanning
64bit
processor
N/A 500 MB
macOS v12
macOS v13
Chrome OS Printing
Scanning
N/A N/A N/A
1
An Internet connection is required to install the software if the installation disc is not supplied.
2
Third party USB ports are not supported.
3
For WIA, 1200x1200 resolution. Brother Scanner Utility enables resolutions up to 19200 x 19200 dpi.
4
PaperPort
™
14SE supports Windows 10 and Windows 11.
5
PC Fax supports black and white only.
6
AirPrint only.
7
macOS Disclaimer AirPrint capable: Printing or scanning via macOS requires the use of AirPrint. Mac drivers are not provided for this
machine.
For the latest driver updates, go to your model's Downloads page at
support.brother.com/downloads.
For the latest supported OS, go to your model's Supported OS page at support.brother.com/os.
All trademarks, brand and product names are the property of their respective companies.
Related Information
• Appendix
603
Home > Appendix > 5 GHz Wi-Fi Network Channels Supported by Your Machine (USA, Canada, Mexico
and Caribbean countries only)
5 GHz Wi-Fi Network Channels Supported by Your Machine (USA,
Canada, Mexico and Caribbean countries only)
When connecting your machine to a 5 GHz Wi-Fi network, make sure your wireless LAN access point/router is
set to one of the channels available in your country and listed in the table below (recommended channel: 5.18 -
5.24 GHz). For more information about changing the channel setting, see the instructions supplied with your
wireless LAN access point/router.
Wi-Fi 5 GHz Channels 5.18 - 5.24 GHz (36/40/44/48)
5.26 - 5.32 GHz (52/56/60/64)
5.5 - 5.72 GHz (100/104/108/112/116/132/136/140/144)
5.745 - 5.825 GHz (149/153/157/161/165)
Related Information
• Appendix
Related Topics:
• I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration
604
Home > Appendix > Supplies
Supplies
When the time comes to replace supplies, such as the toner cartridge or drum unit, an error message will appear
on your machine's control panel or in the Status Monitor. For more information about the supplies for your
machine, visit www.brother.com/original or contact your local Brother dealer.
The Supply Order Number (No.) varies depending on your country and region.
Supply Items Supply Order No. Approximate Life
(Page Yield)
Applicable Models
Toner Cartridge Standard Toner:
TN229
• Black:
Approximately 1,500 pages
1
2
• Cyan / Magenta / Yellow:
Approximately 1,200 pages
1
2
MFC-L8395CDW
High Yield Toner:
TN229XL
• Black:
Approximately 3,000 pages
1
2
• Cyan / Magenta / Yellow:
Approximately 2,300 pages
1
2
MFC-L8395CDW
Super High Yield Toner:
TN229XXL
• Black:
Approximately 4,500 pages
1
2
• Cyan / Magenta / Yellow:
Approximately 4,000 pages
1
2
MFC-L8395CDW
Starter Toner:
(Supplied with your machine)
• Black:
Approximately 3,000 pages
1
2
• Cyan / Magenta / Yellow:
Approximately 1,400 pages
1
2
MFC-L8395CDW
Drum Unit
DR229CL
3
Approximately 20,000 pages
4
MFC-L8395CDW
Belt Unit BU229CL
Approximately 50,000 pages
5
MFC-L8395CDW
Waste Toner
Box
WT229CL
Approximately 50,000 pages
2
MFC-L8395CDW
1
The approximate cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.
2
Letter or A4 size single-sided pages
3
Contains four drum units; one black and three colors.
605
4
Approximately 20,000 pages based on one page per job and 30,000 pages based on three pages per job (A4/Letter single-sided pages).
The number of pages may be affected due to a variety of factors including but not limited to media type and media size.
5
Approximately 50,000 pages based on two pages per job and 60,000 pages based on three pages per job (A4/Letter single-sided pages).
The number of pages may be affected due to a variety of factors including but not limited to media type and media size.
Related Information
• Appendix
606
Home > Appendix > Important Information About Toner Cartridge Life
Important Information About Toner Cartridge Life
Toner Cartridge Life
This product detects the life of the toner cartridges using the following two methods:
• Detection by counting the dots of each color that are necessary to create an image
• Detection by counting the rotations of the developer roller
The print operation will stop when either of the upper limits is reached. The upper limit is set above the number of
dots or rotations that would be required for the cartridge to perform consistently with its advertised page yield.
This function is intended to reduce the risk of poor print quality and damage to the machine.
There are two messages that indicate when the toner is low or needs replacing: Toner Low and Replace Toner.
Toner Low is displayed on the LCD when the number of dots or rotations of the developer roller nears its
maximum count. Replace Toner is displayed on the LCD when the number of dots or rotations of the developer
roller reaches its maximum count.
Color Correction
The number of developer roller rotations that is counted may not only be for normal operations, such as printing
and copying, but also for machine adjustments, such as Color Calibration and Color Registration.
Color Calibration (Adjustment of Color Density)
To obtain stable print quality, the density of each toner cartridge needs to be maintained at a fixed value. If the
density balance between the colors cannot be kept, the tint becomes unstable, and accurate color reproduction
becomes impossible. The toner density can change due to chemical changes to the toner that affect its electrical
charge, deterioration of the developer unit, and temperature and humidity levels in the machine. During
calibration, the density level adjustment test patterns are printed on the belt unit.
Calibration is mainly performed at the following times:
• When you start the Color Correction from the control panel or the printer driver to improve the color density.
• When you replace a used toner cartridge or drum unit with a new one.
• When the machine detects that the ambient temperature and humidity have changed.
• When a specified number of printed pages is reached.
Color Registration (Correction of Color Position)
In this machine, the drum unit and developer unit are prepared for black (K), yellow (Y), magenta (M), and cyan
(C), respectively. Four color images are combined into one image, and therefore color registration errors (for
example, how the four color images align) may occur. When registration errors occur, registration correction test
patterns are printed on the belt unit.
Registration is mainly performed at the following times:
• When you start the Color Correction to clear the color registration error.
• When a specified number of printed pages is reached.
Related Information
• Appendix
607
Home > Appendix > Accessories
Accessories
Availability of accessories may vary depending on your country or region. For more information about the
accessories for your machine, visit www.brother.com/original or contact your Brother dealer or Brother Customer
Service.
Order No. Items Applicable Models
LT-310CL Lower Tray (250 sheets) MFC-L8395CDW
Related Information
• Appendix
608
Home > Appendix > Brother Help and Customer Support
Brother Help and Customer Support
IMPORTANT
For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be made from
within that country.
>> FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions)
>> For Customer Service
>> Ordering Accessories and Supplies
FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions)
For more information on your Brother machine, visit the Brother support website at support.brother.com. For
additional help and tips, go to your model's FAQs & Troubleshooting page; for the latest drivers and software,
go to your model's Downloads page.
For Customer Service
In USA:
www.brother-usa.com/support (Self-Service/Email/Chat)
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)
In Canada:
www.brother.ca/support
(Self-Service Videos, Email, Chat, Facebook and Twitter Help)
Service Center Locator (USA only)
For the location of a Brother authorized service center, call 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) or visit
www.brother-usa.com/support.
Service Center Locations (Canada only)
For the location of a Brother authorized service center, visit www.brother.ca/support.
Ordering Accessories and Supplies
We recommend Genuine Brother supplies, which are available at most Brother retailers. If you cannot find the
supplies you need and have a Visa, MasterCard, Discover, American Express credit card, or PayPal account,
you can order directly from Brother. Visit us online for a complete selection of the Brother accessories and
supplies that are available for purchase.
NOTE
In Canada, only Visa and MasterCard are accepted.
In USA:
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)
www.brother-usa.com/support
In Canada:
www.brother.ca
609
Brother International Corporation
200 Crossing Boulevard
P.O. Box 6911
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA
Brother International Corporation (Canada) Ltd.
1 rue Hôtel de Ville,
Dollard-des-Ormeaux, QC, Canada H9B 3H6
This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only. Local Brother companies or their
dealers may only support machines purchased in their own countries.
USA/CAN
Version 0
